MR Mk30 Regulador Tension

KCGG 122, 142
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242

Overcurrent and
Directional Overcurrent Relays
Service Manual
R8551A
SERVICE MANUAL R8551A
KCGG 122, 142
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
SAFETY SECTION
THIS MUST BE READ BEFORE ANY WORK IS CARRIED OUT ON THE RELAY
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 3 RELAY DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 4 APPLICATION OF PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT AND RECORDS
CHAPTER 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 7 TECHNICAL DATA
CHAPTER 8 COMMISSIONING
APPENDIX 1 RELAY CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
APPENDIX 2 LOGIC DIAGRAMS
APPENDIX 3 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
APPENDIX 4 COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

KCGG 122, 142
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment.
Health and safety

The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure that
products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe condition. It is
assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Section.
Explanation of symbols and labels

The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below.
Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal, note: this symbol may also be used

for a protective/safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.
*Note: The term earth used throughout product documentation is the direct equivalent of the
North American term ground.
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be
aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation should be
consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a
hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to
avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or the
appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or
disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in the Technical
Data section of the product documentation.
SS3/16A/0797
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating and polarity;
CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type
and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards

These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whilst it is energised, since
this may result in damage.
Current transformer circuits

Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric
shock or burns, if touched.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At
the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero,
to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs

When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before
insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
Fibre optic communication

Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal
level of the device.
SS3/16A/0797
Decommissioning and Disposal
Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across
the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after
completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc
supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external
terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is

avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any
products containing batteries should have them removed before disposal,
taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the
country of operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A, GEC
Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Data section of the product
documentation.
Insulation class: IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 This equipment requires a

Class I protective (safety) earth
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 connection to ensure user
Class I safety.
Installation IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2:1995 Distribution level, fixed
Category Category III installation. Equipment in this
(Overvoltage): EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 category is qualification tested
Category III at 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 500Ω,
0.5J, between all supply circuits
and earth and also between
independent circuits.
Environment: IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated by
Pollution degree 2 reference to generic safety
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 standards.
Pollution degree 2
Product safety: 73/23/EEC Compliance with the European
Commission Low Voltage
Directive.
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Compliance isdemonstrated by
EN 60950: 1992/A3: 1995 reference to generic safety
standards.
SS3/16A/0797
SS3/16A/0797
Chapter 1
Introduction
KCGG 122, 142 Chapter 1
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. INTRODUCTION 1
2. USING THE MANUAL 1
3. AN INTRODUCTION TO K RELAYS 2
4 MODELS AVAILABLE 3
5. AVAILABILITY OF MAIN FEATURES 4
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 4
Overcurrent and Directional Overcurrent Relays
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
The K Range of overcurrent and directional overcurrent relays has been

rationalised and additional features have been added to the individual relays
to widen their application. Some menu cell locations have changed to
accommodate the new features and so setting files that have been generated for
the series 1 relays to suit particular applications may need some small
modification before they can be used with the new K Range series 2. However, the
menu locations for measured values and other data that is accessed by SCADA
equipment retain their original locations. Hence the changes should be transparent
to most communication interfaces that may have been developed.
Manual R8501 should be used for K Range series 1 relays.
This manual details the menu, functions and logic for the K Range series 2 relays.
SECTION 2. USING THE MANUAL
This manual provides a description of the K Range series 2 overcurrent and

directional overcurrent range of protection relays. It is intended to guide the user
through application, installation, setting and commissioning of the relays.
The manual has the following format:
Chapter 1. Introduction
An introduction on how to use this manual and a general
introduction to the relays covered by the manual.
Chapter 2. Handling and installation
Precautions to be taken when handling electronic equipment
Chapter 3. Relay description
A detailed description of features that are common to all
K Range series 2 relays.
Chapter 4. Application of protection functions
An introduction to the applications of the relays and special
features provided.
Chapter 5. Measurements and records
How to customise the measurements and use the recording
features.
Chapter 6. Serial communications
Hints on using the serial communication feature.
Chapter 7. Technical data
Comprehensive details on the ratings, setting ranges and
specifications etc.
Chapter 8. Commissioning
A guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 4
Appendix Appendices include relay characteristic curves, logic diagrams,

connection diagrams and commissioning test records.
SECTION 3. AN INTRODUCTION TO K RELAYS
The K Range of protection relays brings numerical technology to the successful

MIDOS range of protection relays. Fully compatible with the existing designs
and sharing the same modular housing concept, the relays offer more
comprehensive protection for demanding applications.
Each relay includes an extensive range of control and data gathering functions
to provide a completely integrated system of protection, control,
instrumentation, data logging, fault, event and disturbance recording. The relays
have a user-friendly 32 character liquid crystal display (LCD) with 4 push buttons
which allow menu navigation and setting changes. Also, by utilising the simple 2-
wire communication link, all of the relay functions can be read, reset and changed
on demand from a local or remote personal computer (PC) loaded with the
relevant software.
With enhanced versatility, reduced maintenance requirements and low burdens,
K Range relays provide a more advanced solution to power system protection. The
K Range series 2 relays have new features that are additional to those found on
series 1 relays. The additional functions include:
Protection thermal, underfequency, broken conductor detection, rectifier
protection and improved undervoltage
Measurement thermal ammeters, single phase W and VAR
Logic improved logic flexibility
Recording additional methods of resetting the disturbance recorder,
triggering the disturbance recorder from the logic inputs,
thresholds on circuit breaker maintenance counter and contact
arcing duty plus 5 full fault records.
KCGG relays provide overcurrent and earth fault protection for power distribution
systems, industrial power systems and all other applications where overcurrent
protection is required. The relays are used in applications where time graded
overcurrent and earth fault protection is required. The earth fault protection
provides suitable sensitivity for most systems where the earth fault current is
limited.
KCEG relays provide directional overcurrent and earth fault protection. The
overcurrent elements can be selectively directionalised, making the relays a cost
effective option where both directional and non-directional protection is
required. The sensitivity of earth fault protection has been increased to cover
most applications. The earth fault protection provides suitable sensitivity for
most systems where the earth fault current is limited.
Integral features in K Range relays include circuit breaker failure protection, back
tripping, blocked overcurrent protection for feeders or busbars, cold load pick-up
facilities, load shedding capabilities and two alternative groups of predetermined
settings. The relays also have integral serial communication facilities via K-Bus.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 4
SECTION 4. MODELS AVAILABLE
The following list of models is covered by this manual

KCGG 122 One phase overcurrent and earth fault relay
KCGG 142 Three phase overcurrent and earth fault relay
KCEG 112 Directional earth fault
KCEG 142 Directional three phase overcurrent and earth fault relay
KCEG 152 Three phase overcurrent relay and directional earth fault relay
KCEG 242 Directional three phase overcurrent and directional earth fault relay
Note: The 100 series of relays are powered by a DC/AC auxiliary supply.
The 200 series of relays are dual powered, ie. powered by a DC/AC
auxiliary supply or from the current transformer circuit in the
absence of an auxiliary supply.
K Range series 2 relay Equivalent K Range series 1 relays

KCGG 122 KCGG 110, KCGU 110
KCGG 142 KCGG 120, KCGG 130, KCGG 140, KCGU 140
KCEG 112 KCEG 110, KCEU 110
KCEG 142 KCEG 130, KCEG 140, KCEU 140
KCEG 152 KCEG 150, KCEU 150, KCEG 160, KCEU 160
KCEG 242 KCGG/KCEG 210, KCGG/KCEG 230,
KCGG/KCEG 250, KCGG/KCGU 240,
KCEG/KCEU240.
Table of equivalence between K Range series 1 and series 2 relays
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 4
SECTION 5. AVAILABILITY OF MAIN FEATURES
The following table lists the features that vary between models
Feature KCGG KCGG KCEG KCEG KCEG KCEG

122 142 112 142 152 242
Protection
Overcurrent ● ● ● ● ●
Earth fault ● ● ● ● ● ●
Directional overcurrent ● ●
Directional earth fault ● ● ● ●
Underfrequency ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage ● ●
Thermal overload ● ● ● ● ●
Measurement
Frequency ● ● ● ●
Current ● ● ● ● ● ●
Voltage ● ●
Single phase power ● ●
Three phase power ● ●
Thermal ammeter(s) ● ● ● ● ●
Thermal demand(s) ● ● ● ● ●
Thermal state ● ● ● ● ●
CB operations ● ● ● ● ● ●
CB contact duty ● ● ● ● ●
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Logic inputs 3 8 3 8 8 8
Output relays 4 8 4 8 8 8
Chapter 2
Handling and Installation

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1
1.1 Receipt of relays 1
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 1
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 1
3. RELAY MOUNTING 2
4 UNPACKING 2
5. STORAGE 3
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 4
SECTION 1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
1.1 Receipt of relays

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful
treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined
immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has
been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport
contractor and GEC ALSTHOM T&D Protection & Control should be promptly
notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation
should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The
electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module
should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its
case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical
connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed
in an electrically conducting antistatic bag.
There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not
unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged
together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent
dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them.
Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary
metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static
electricity discharged from the body.
SECTION 2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of

several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices
when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may
not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been
reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when
housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing
modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module,
the folowing precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long
life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic
potential as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit
board. Avoid touching the electronic componenets, printed circuit track or
connectors.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 4
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both
at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which
is at the same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an
equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a
conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between
500kΩ - 10MΩ. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular
contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may
be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever
possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can
be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed
investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out
in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and
IEC documents.
SECTION 3. RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. If

loose relays are to be assembled into a scheme, then construction details can
be found in Publication R7012. If an MMLG test block is to be included it should
be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front).
Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a
panel or rack. The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes are accessible
without removal of the cover. For individually mounted relays an outline
diagram is normally supplied showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
These dimensions will also be found in Publication R6551.
SECTION 4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the
parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled
persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust
and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays
that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where
they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which
are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 4
SECTION 5. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored
in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-
humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The
action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed
to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about
an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton.
Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into
the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated
with moisture and the de-humifier will lose its efficiency.
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 4
Chapter 3
Relay Description
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. RELAY DESCRIPTION 1
2. USER INTERFACE 2
2.1 Frontplate layout 2
2.2 LED indications 3
2.3 Keypad 3
2.4 Liquid crystal display 3
2.5 Flag display format 3
3. MENU SYSTEM 5
3.1 Default display 5
3.2 Accessing the menu 5
3.3 Menu contents 6
3.4 Menu columns 6
3.5 System data 7
3.6 Fault records 8
3.7 Measurements 1 8
3.10 Earth fault 1 9
3.11 Phase fault 1 10
3.12 Earth fault 2 11
3.13 Phase fault 2 11
3.14 Logic 12
3.15 Input masks 13
3.16 Relay masks 14
3.17 Recorder 15
4 CHANGING TEXT AND SETTINGS 16
4.1 Quick guide to menu controls 16
4.2 To enter setting mode 17
4.3 To escape from the setting mode 17
4.4 To accept the new setting 17
4.5 Password protection 17
4.6 Entering passwords 18
4.7 Changing passwords 18
4.8 Restoration of password protection 19
4.9 Entering text 19
4.10 Changing function links 19
4.11 Changing setting values 19
4.12 Setting communication address 19
4.13 Setting input masks 20
4.14 Setting output masks 20
4.15 Resetting values and records 20
4.16 Resetting trip LED indication 20
5. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 21
5.1 Auxiliary supply 21
5.2 Dual powered relays 22
5.3 Logic control inputs 22
5.4 Analogue inputs 23
5.5 Output relays 23
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
5.6 Output relay minimum dwell time 24

5.7 Setting the relay with a PC or laptop 24
6. ALARM FLAGS 24
Figure 1 Frontplate layout 2

Figure 2 Flag display format 4
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 24
SECTION 1. RELAY DESCRIPTION
The KCGG and KCEG relays use numerical techniques to derive protection and
control functions. They can have up to eight multiplexed analogue inputs, sampled
eight times per power frequency cycle. The Fourier derived power frequency
component returns the rms value of the measured quantity. To ensure optimum
performance, frequency tracking is used. The channel that is tracked is chosen on
a priority basis, Va, Vb, Vc, Ia, Ib, Ic. Frequency tracking is not employed on the
residual voltage, or current to ensure the maximum harmonic rejection. In the
absence of a signal to frequency track, the sampling frequency defaults to the
rated frequency of the power system.
Eight output relays can be programmed to respond to any of the protection or
control functions and eight logic inputs can be allocated to control functions. The
logic inputs are filtered to ensure that induced AC current in the external wiring to
these inputs does not cause an incorrect response. Software links further enable the
user to customise the product for their own particular applications. They select/
interconnect the various protection and control elements and replace the
interconnections that were previously used between the cases of relays that
provided discrete protection or control functions.
The relays are powered from either a DC or an AC auxiliary supply which is
transformed by a wide ranging DC/DC converter within the relay. This provides
the electronic circuits with regulated and galvanically isolated supply rails. The
power supply also provides a regulated and isolated field voltage to energise the
logic inputs.
The dual powered version of the relay draws its energising supply from the current
transformers in the absence of an auxiliary voltage supply. This makes it suitable
for application where the auxiliary supply is not reliable or not available. They can
be used in shunt trip, capacitor discharge and AC series trip arrangements.
An interface on the front of the relay allows the user to navigate through the menu
to access data, change settings and reset flags, etc. As an alternative the relays
can be connected to a computer via their serial communication ports and the menu
accessed on-line. This provides a more friendly and intuitive method of setting the
relay, as it allows a whole column of data to be displayed at one time instead of
just a single menu cell. Computer programs are also available that enable setting
files to be generated off-line and these files can then be downloaded to the relay
via the serial port.
In addition to protection and control functions the relays can display all the values
that it measures and many additional ones that it calculates. They also store useful
time stamped data for post fault analysis in fault records, event records and
disturbance records. This data is available via a serial communication port for
access locally and/or remotely with a computer. The fault records, event records
and disturbance records can be extracted automatically via the serial port and
values can be polled periodically to determine trends. Remote control actions can
also be made and to this end many K Range relays have been integrated into
SCADA systems.
K Range relays provide the user with the flexibility to customise the relay for their
particular applications. They provide many additional features that would be
expensive to produce on an individual basis and, when the low installation costs
are taken into account, it will be seen to provide an economic solution for
protection and control.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 24
SECTION 2. USER INTERFACE
The front plate of the relay provides a man machine interface providing the user
with a means of entering settings to the relay displaying measured values, fault
records and alarms. The series 2 relays have additional graphics to assist the user.
The area in which the fault flags are displayed is divided up to denote the area
associated with each phase and there is a marked position for the appropriate
phase colours to be marked and for labels to be affixed to denote the use of the
three overcurrent stages and the three auxiliary timers.
2.1 Frontplate layout
Model number
Relay types
KCGG14000102125
KCGG140 No P967701
Serial number
Liquid SETTING GROUP
FAULT No
A B
crystal
Fn _2G 2A _ _ * B _ _ * V<
display
AUX 2 C* N BT
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AUX TIMER C
AUX 1
AUX 2
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
*
-*
Digit identifiers
AUX 3 STAGE 3 --*
Flag identifiers
ALARM TRIP
HEALTHY
Entry keys
LED indicators
F + - 0
Ratings
In 1 A V 110/125 V
Vn 110 V 50/60 Hz
Figure 1. Frontplate layout

The frontplate of the relay carries a liquid crystal display LCD on which data such
as settings and measured values can be viewed. The data is accessed through a
menu system. The four keys [F]; [+]; [-] and [0] are used to move around the menu,
select the data to be accessed and enter settings. Three light emitting diodes (LEDs)
indicate alarm, healthy and trip conditions.
A label at the top corner identifies the relay by both its model number and serial
number. This information uniquely specifies the product and is required when
making any enquiry to the factory about a particular relay. In addition there is a
rating label in the bottom corner which gives details of the auxiliary voltage,
reference voltage (directional relays only) and current ratings. Two handles, one at
the top and one at the bottom of the frontplate, will assist in removing the module
from the case.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 24
2.2 LED indications

The three LEDs provide the following functions:
GREEN LED Indicates the relay is powered up and running. In most
cases it follows the watchdog relay but dual powered
relays are the exception because the watchdog does not
operate for loss of auxiliary supply.
Such a condition would be considered a normal
operational condition when the relays are energised
from line current transformers alone.
YELLOW LED Indicates alarm conditions that have been detected by
the relay during its self checking routine. The alarm lamp
flashes when the password is entered (password
inhibition temporarily overridden).
RED LED Indicates a trip that has been issued by the relay. This
may be a protection trip or result from a remote trip
command; this can be determined by viewing the trip
flags.
2.3 Keypad
The four keys perform the following functions:
[F] function select/digit select key/next column
[+] put in setting mode/increment value/accept key/previous column
[-] put in setting mode/decrement value/reject key/next column
[0] reset/escape/change default display key
Note: Only the [F] and [0] keys are accessible when the relay cover is in place.
2.4 Liquid crystal display
The liquid crystal display has two lines each of sixteen characters. A back-light is
activated when any key on the frontplate is momentarily pressed and will remain lit
until ten minutes after the last key press. This enables the display to be read in all
conditions of ambient lighting.
The numbers printed on the frontplate just below the display, identify the individual
digits that are displayed for some of the settings, ie. function links, relay masks etc.
Additional text around the display is used to define the areas in which the various
parts of the fault information will be found.
2.5 Flag display format
Now that there are five full fault records the top four left-hand digits no longer
display “Fn”, “Fn-1”, . . . “Fn-4” to denote the last and previous fault flags. Instead
they now display “Fn” to indicate latched fault flags and “Fnow” to indicate
unlatched flags (when cell 0023 is selected from the System Data column).
The next two digits indicate the setting group that was in operation during the fault
when “Fn” is displayed eg. “G1” indicates setting group 1 and “G2” indicates
setting group 2. When “Fnow” is displayed then the setting group is that which is
currently active.
The next most important areas are the four marked by a circle. These circles are
over printed with a letter (A, B or C) to indicate the phase, or a symbol to
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 24
represent an earth fault. Alternatively a coloured disc may be stuck over the circles
to indicate the phases by colour eg. red, yellow and blue. There are four
characters on the display associated with each of these four areas to flag
operation of the start and operation of the three overcurrent stages for that phase.
SETTING GROUP
A B
FAULT No
Fn _2G 2A _ _ * B _ _ * V<
AUX 2 C* N BT
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AUX TIMER C
AUX 1 STAGE 1 *
AUX 2 STAGE 2 -*
AUX 3 STAGE 3 --*
ALARM TRIP
HEALTHY
Figure 2. Flag display format

Consider the four digits above the circle marked |©|. If the relay trips during a
fault involving phase C then the first digit will be the letter C to indicate the current
exceeded the I> threshold and that the protection has started. The next three
characters are flags for each of the three overcurrent stages (t>, t>>, t>>>)
associated with that phase (phase C in this example) and an asterisk (*) will be
displayed for the stage or stages that have operated.
Thus:
C would indicate that a current above the I> setting had been detected by
the phase C element during the fault (START condition).
C* would indicate the first overcurrent stage (t>) had operated
C_* would indicate the second stage (t>>) had timed out
C__* would indicate t>>> had timed out - third overcurrent stage
C*_* would indicate that both t> and t>>> had timed out
Flag information is similarly provided for the other two phases and for earth faults.
The six digits at the left-hand side of the display on the bottom line identify the
auxiliary functions AUX1, AUX2, AUX3 as AUX123. Two printed panels below the
display may be used to indicate the function of each of the three auxiliary
functions and those of the three main overcurrent functions respectively. The
appropriate pre-printed labels can be affixed in these two areas.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 5 of 24
The two characters at the extreme right-hand end of the top line of the display will
indicate V< when the undercurrent element has operated. Operation of the breaker
failure protection is indicated by the letter ‘B’ and operation of the thermal element
by the letter “T” immediately below the V<. For indication of a local/remote trip
via relay RLY7 the ‘B’ is replaced by an ‘R’. Where ‘B’ and ‘R’ are both valid, ‘B’ is
given priority.
SECTION 3. MENU SYSTEM
Data within the relays is accessed via a menu table. The table is comprised of cells
arranged in rows and columns, like a spreadsheet. A cell may contain text values
limits or functions. The first cell in a column, the column heading, contains text
identifying the data grouped under it in that column.
3.1 Default display
The selected default display will normally show on the LCD and a momentary press
of the function key [F] will change the display to the heading for the first column,
SYSTEM DATA. Further momentary presses of the [F] key will step down the
column, row by row, so that data may be read. If at any time the [F] key is pressed
and held for one second the cursor will be moved to the top of the next column
and the heading for that column will be displayed. Further momentary presses of
the [F] key will then move down the new column, row by row.
A new feature is that pressing the [F] and [0] keys together and holding for one
second can be used to step back up the menu column. A short press of the [0] key
will switch on the back light for the LCD without changing the display in any way.
In this way the full menu may be scanned with just the [F] and [0] keys that are
accessible with the relay cover in place, and reset actions can be effected.
Following a protection trip red trip LED will be lit. The display will change
automatically from the default display to that of the fault flags for the last fault.
Whilst the fault flags are displayed the trip LED can be reset by holding down the
[0] for at least one second. The trip LED will be reset and the display will change
to the default display that was last selected. The flag information will not be lost by
this action, it can still be accessed under FAULT RECORDS.
The display will not default to the flag information if the user interface is in use at
the time. The default display will return 15 minutes after the last key press, or it can
be selected more quickly by moving to any column heading and then pressing the
[0] key for 1 second. The selected default display will appear unless there has
been a fault when the fault flags will be displayed. It is possible to step through the
available default displays by momentary presses of the reset key [0].
3.2 Accessing the menu
The only settings which can be changed with the cover in place are those that can
be reset either to zero or some preset value. To change any other settings the cover
must be removed from the relay to gain access to the [+] and [-] keys that are used
to increment or decrement a value. When a column heading is displayed the [-]
key will change the display to the next column and the [+] key will change the
display to the previous column, giving a faster selection.
When a cell that can be changed is displayed the action of pressing either the [+]
or [-] keys will put the relay in setting mode (indicated by a flashing cursor in the
display). To escape from the setting mode without making any change the [0] key
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 6 of 24
should be depressed for one second. Section 4 gives instructions for changing the
various types of settings.
Password protection is provided for the configuration settings of the relay because
an accidental change could seriously affect the ability of the relay to perform its
intended functions. Configuration settings include the selection of time curves,
function links, CT and VT ratios, opto-input and relay output allocation. Individual
protection settings are protected from change when the relay cover is in place.
3.3 Menu contents
Related data and settings are grouped in separate columns of the menu. Each
column has a text heading (in capital letters) that identifies the data contained in
that column. Each cell may contain text, values, limits and/or a function. The cells
are referenced by the column number/row number. For example 0201 is column
02, row 01. When a cell is displayed the four characters at the top left hand
corner of the LCD indicate the column number and row number in the menu table.
The full menu is given in the following tables, but not all the items listed will be
available in a particular relay. For example, a single pole earth fault relay would
not display any phase fault settings and a non-directional relay would not display
any settings associated with the directional feature. Those cells that do not provide
any useful purpose are not made available in the factory configuration. Certain
settings will disappear from the menu when the user de-selects them; the alternative
setting group is a typical example. If group 2 settings have not been enabled then
the menu columns EARTH FLT 2 and PHASE FLT 2 will be hidden and make them
visible, the system data link SD4 must be set to ‘1’. This note is included at this time
to explain why some of the items listed below may not appear in the menu for a
relay that is being compared with the full list.
3.4 Menu columns
Column Heading Description
Number
00 SYSTEM DATA Settings and data for the system -
relay and serial communications
01 FLT RECORDS Fault records for the last five faults
02 MEASURE 1 Directly measured quantities
(V & I etc.)
03 MEASURE 2 Calculated quantities (W & VAR etc.)
04 MEASURE 3 Calculated (additional)
05 EARTH FLT 1 Earth fault protection settings - group 1
06 PHASE FLT 1 Phase fault protection settings - group 1
07 EARTH FLT 2 Earth fault protection settings - group 2
08 PHASE FLT 2 Phase fault protection settings - group 2
09 LOGIC Settings for miscellaneous functions used
in the logic
0A INPUT MASKS User assigned allocation of logic input
0B RELAY MASKS User assigned allocation of output
relays
0C RECORDER Settings for the disturbance recorder
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 7 of 24
The menu cells that are read only are marked [READ].
Cells that can be set are marked [SET].
Cells that can be reset are marked [RESET].
Cells that are password protected are marked [PWP].
3.5 System data
Display Status Description
0000 SYSTEM DATA READ Column heading
0002 Password PWP Password that must be entered before certain settings
may be changed
0003 SD Links PWP Function links that enable the user to enable (activate)
the options required
0 Rem ChgStg 1 = enable remote setting changes
2 Rem CB Ctrl 1 = enable remote control of circuit breaker
3 Rem ChgGrp 1 = enable remote change of setting group
4 En Grp2 1 = enable group 2 settings to be used and
displayed
5 Auto Flag 1 = enable flags to be reset automatically on load
restoration
6 Auto Rec 1 = enable disturbance recorder to reset on load
restoration
7 Log Evts 8 1 = enable logic inputs and output relay status to be
stored in event records
8 Alt Rec Rst 1 = enable alternative reset method for disturbance
recorder
0004 Description PWP Product description - user programmable text
0005 Plant PWP Plant reference - user programmable text
0006 Model READ Model number that defines the product
0008 Serial No. READ Serial number - unique number identifying the
particular product
0009 Freq SET Default sampling frequency - must be set to power
system frequency
000A Comms Level READ Indicates the Courier communication level supported
by the product
000B Rly Address SET Communication address (1 to 255)
000C Plnt Status READ Binary word used to indicate the status of circuit
breakers and isolators
000D Ctrl Status READ Binary word used to indicate the status of control data
000E Grp now READ Indicates the active setting group
000F LS Stage READ Indicates the last received load shedding command
0010 CB Control SET Indicates the status of the circuit breaker control
0011 Software READ Software reference for the product
0020 Log Status READ Indicates the current status of all the logic inputs
0021 Rly Status READ Indicates the current status of the output relay drives
0022 Alarms READ Indicates the current state of internal alarms
0 Uncfg READ Error in facotry configuration settings
1 Uncalib READ Operating in uncalibrated state
2 Setting READ Error detected in stored settings
3 No Service READ Protection out-of-service and not functioning
4 No Samples READ No A/D samples but still in service
5 No Fourier READ Fourier is not being performed
6 Test Wdog SET Test watchdog by setting this bit to “1”
0023 FnowG1 READ Indicates the current status of the fault flags
(These flags are not latched)
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 8 of 24
3.6 Fault records

0100 FLT RECORDS READ Column heading
0101 Fault No 1 SET Number of fault record displayed - may be selected
(Fn; Fn -1; Fn -2; . . . Fn -5)
0102 Fn G1 READ Flags (latched) indicating the functions that operated
during the fault
0103 Ia READ Highest value of current measured in phase A during
the fault
0104 Ib READ Highest value of current measured in phase B during
the fault
0105 Ic READ Highest value of current measured in phase C during
the fault
0106 Io READ Highest value of residual current measured during the
fault
0107 Vab READ Value of Vab during the fault
0108 Vbc READ Value of Vbc during the fault
0109 Vca READ Value of Vca during the fault
010A Vo READ Highest value of residual voltage measured during
the fault
010B CB Trip Time READ Circuit breaker trip time
0110 Clear = O RESET Press [0] key to clear all fault records when this cell is
displayed
3.7 Measurements 1
0200 MEASURE 1 READ Column heading
0201 Ia READ Measured current in phase A
0202 Ib READ Measured current in phase B
0203 Ic READ Measured current in phase C
0204 Io READ Measured residual current
0205 Vab READ Measured line voltage Vab
0206 Vbc READ Measured line voltage Vbc
0207 Vca READ Measured line voltage Vca
0208 Va READ Measured phase voltage Va
0209 Vb READ Measured phase voltage Vb
020A Vc READ Measured phase voltage Vc
020B Vo READ Measured residual voltage Vo
020C F READ Measured power system frequency F
3.8 Measurements 2
0301 3W READ Three phase active power
0302 3VA READ Three phase apparent power
0303 3VAr READ Three phase reactive power
0304 Imax READ Highest of the three phase currents measured - not a
peak demand value
0309 Wa READ Active power in phase A
030A Wb READ Active power in phase B
030B Wc READ Active power in phase C
030C PowerFactor READ Power factor - three phase
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 9 of 24
030D VARa READ Reactive power in phase A

030E VARb READ Reactive power in phase B
030F VARc READ Reactive power in phase C
0310 Sum (ops) PWP Number of circuit breaker operations
0311 CBdutyA PWP Sum of I, or I2 broken by phase A of circuit breaker
0312 CBdutyB PWP Sum of I, or I2 broken by phase B of circuit breaker
0313 CBdutyC PWP Sum of I, or I2 broken by phase C of circuit breaker
031E Power mode PWP Sets the convention used for signing the direction of
measured power flow
3.9 Measurements 3
0404 IthA READ Thermal ammeter reading in phase A
0405 IthB READ Thermal ammeter reading in phase B
0406 IthC READ Thermal ammeter reading in phase C
0407 Thermal PWP Thermal state (%)
040A Pk IthA PWP Peak thermal ammeter reading in phase A - demand
value
040B Pk IthB PWP Peak thermal ammeter reading in phase B - demand
value
040C Pk IthC PWP Peak thermal ammeter reading in phase C - demand
value
3.10 Earth fault 1

0500 EARTH FLT1 READ Column heading
0501 EF Links PWP Software links that are used to select the available
optional earth fault functions
1 En Io>> 1 = enable earth fault stage 2
2 EN Io>>> 1 = enable earth fault stage 3
3 Drn to> 1 = directionalise earth fault stage 1
4 Drn to>> 1 = directionalise earth fault stage 2
5 Drn to>>> 1 = directionalise earth fault stage 3
6 Io>>NoPeak 1 = no peak measurement for stage 2 earth faults
0502 CT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the line or neutral CT feeding the
earth fault protection elements
0503 VT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the voltage transformer feeding the
relay
0504 Curve PWP Selected characteristic from the definite time or 10
inverse time options
0505 Io> SET Current setting for start output and first earth fault
stage
0506 to>/TMS SET Time multiplier setting that will be used with a
selected inverse time curve
0507 to>/DT SET Time delay that will be effective when the definite time
characteristic is selected
0508 toRESET SET Hold time for which the current must remain below
Io> before the timer resets to zero
0509 Io>> SET Current setting for second earth fault stage
050A to>> SET Time delay for second earth fault stage
050B Io>>> SET Current setting for third earth fault stage
050C to>>> SET Time delay for third earth fault stage
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 10 of 24
050D Char Angle SET Characteristic angle setting for earth fault directional
element
050E Io< SET Setting for earth fault undercurrent element
050F Vop> SET Setting for minimum polarising voltage below which
the directional element is blocked
3.11 Phase fault 1

0600 PHASE FLT 1 READ Column heading
0601 PF Links PWP Software links that are used to select the available
optional phase fault functions
0 En Therm 1 = enable thermal element
1 En I>> 1 = enable stage 2 overcurrent
2 En I>>> 1 = enable stage 3 overcurrent
3 Drn t> 1 = directionalise stage 1 overcurrent
4 Drn t>> 1 = directionalise stage 2 overcurrent
5 Drn t>>> 1 = directionalise stage 3 overcurrent
6 I>> NoPeak 1 = No peak measurement for stage 2 overcurrent
7 I>>> = 2/3 1 = 2 out of 3 phase elements to operate for t>>>
to give an output
8 CB blk V< 1 = undervoltage blocked when circuit breaker is
open
9 V< any = 1 1 = output for any phase undervoltage;
0 = output for all phases undervoltage
A V< P-N = 1 1 = undervoltage responds to phase voltage;
0 = undervoltage responds to line voltage
B SynPol = 3.2 1 = synchronous polarising extended to 3.2s;
0 = 0.32s
C Brkn Cond 1 = enables broken conductor logic
D En F< 1 = enable under frequency element to initiate tAUX1
0602 CT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the line CT feeding the phase fault
protection elements
relay
0605 I> SET Current setting for start output and first overcurrent
stage
0606 t>/TMS SET Time multiplier setting that will be used with a
0607 t>/DT SET Time delay that will be effective when the definite time
0608 tRESET SET Hold time for which the current must remain below I>
before the timer resets to zero
0609 I>> SET Current setting for second overcurrent stage
060A t>> SET Time delay for second overcurrent stage
060B I>>> SET Current setting for third overcurrent stage
060C t>>> SET Time delay for third overcurrent stage
060D Char Angle SET Characteristic angle setting for overcurrent directional
element
060E I< SET Setting for earth fault undercurrent element
060F V< SET Setting for undervoltage element
0610 tV< SET Definite time delay for undervoltage feature
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 11 of 24
0611 F< SET Setting for underfrequency

0612 th> Alarm SET Thermal alarm level (%)
0613 Ith> Trip SET Thermal current rating (trip level = 100%)
0614 TC SET Setting for thermal time constant
3.12 Earth fault 2

0700 EARTH FLT 2 READ Column heading
0701 EF Links PWP Software links that are used to select the available
optional earth fault functions
1 En Io>> 1 = enable earth fault stage 2
2 En Io>>> 1 = enable earth fault stage 3
3 Drn to> 1 = directionalise earth fault stage 1
4 Drn to>> 1 = directionalsise earth fault stage 2
5 Drn to>>> 1 = directionalise earth fault stage 3
6 Io>> NoPeak 1 = no peak measurement for stage 2 earth faults
0702 CT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the line or neutral CT feeding the
earth fault protection elements
relay
0705 Io> SET Current setting for start output and first earth fault
stage
0706 to>/TMS SET Time multiplier setting that will be used with a
0707 to>/DT SET Time delay that will be effective when the definite time
0708 toRESET SET Hold time for which the current must remain below
Io> before the timer resets to zero
0709 Io>> SET Current setting for second earth fault stage
070A to>> SET Time delay for second earth fault stage
070B Io>>> SET Current setting for third earth fault stage
070C to>>> SET Time delay for third earth fault stage
070D Char Angle SET Characteristic angle setting for earth fault directional
element
070E Io< SET Setting for earth fault undercurrent element
070F Vop> SET Setting for minimum polarising voltage below which
the directional element is blocked
3.13 Phase fault 2

0800 PHASE FLT 2 READ Column heading
0801 PF Links PWP Software links that are used to select the available
optional phase fault functions
0 En Therm 1 = enable thermal element
1 En I>> 1 = enable stage 2 overcurrent
2 En I>>> 1 = enable stage 3 overcurrent
3 Drn t> 1 = directionalise stage 1 overcurrent
4 Drn t>> 1 = directionalise stage 2 overcurrent
5 Drn t>>> 1 = directionalise stage 3 overcurrent
6 I>> NoPeak 1 = No peak measurement for stage 2 overcurrent
7 I>>> = 2/3 1 = 2 out of 3 phase elements to operate for t>>>
to give an output
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 12 of 24
8 CB blk V< 1 = undervoltage blocked when circuit breaker is

open
9 V< any = 1 1 = output for any phase undervoltage;
0 = output for all phases undervoltage
A V< P-N = 1 1 = undervoltage responds to phase voltage;
0 = undervoltage responds to line voltage
B SynPol = 3.2 1 = synchronous polarising extended to 3.2s;
0 = 0.32s
C Brkn Cond 1 = enables broken conductor logic
D EN F< 1 = enable under frequency element to initiate tAUX1
0802 CT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the line CT feeding the phase fault
protection elements
relay
0805 I> SET Current setting for start output and first overcurrent
stage
0806 t>/TMS SET Time multiplier setting that will be used with a
0807 t>/DT SET Time delay that will be effective when the definite time
0808 tRESET SET Hold time for which the current must remain below I>
before the timer resets to zero
0809 I>> SET Current setting for second overcurrent stage
080A t>> SET Time delay for second overcurrent stage
080B I>>> SET Current setting for third overcurrent stage
080C t>>> SET Time delay for third overcurrent stage
080D Char Angle SET Characteristic angle seting for overcurrent directional
element
080E I< SET Setting for earth fault undercurrent element
080F V< SET Setting for undervoltage element
0810 tV< SET Definite time delay for undervoltage feature
0811 F< SET Setting for underfrequency
0812 th>Alarm SET Thermal alarm level (%)
0813 Ith>Trip SET Thermal current rating (trip level = 100%)
0814 TC SET Setting for thermal time constant
3.14 Logic
0900 LOGIC READ Column heading
0901 LOG Links PWP Software links that are used to select the available
optional logic functions
0 CB Rec 1 = enable CB operations and contact duty registers
to be incremented
1 CBI*I = 0 1 = CB contact proportional to I;
0 = CB contact duty proportional to I2
2 BF blk strt 1 = enables the start outputs to be reset when
breaker failure protection operates
3 tAUX2=I< 1 = tAUX1 initiated by undercurrent in all three
phases
4 tAUX2=/Io< 1 = tAUX2 initiated when the earth fault current
exceeds the Io< setting
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 13 of 24
5 tAUX3 Grp2 1 = tAUX3 selects setting grp2

6 tAUX2-tAUX3 1 = enables the pick up of tAUX3 to be delayed by
tAUX2
7 Latch Strt 1 = start latches fault flags and generate fault record
8 Hold Grp2 1 = selects and holds the grp2 settings operational
9 Rst CBclose 1 = enables a circuit breaker trip to reset the close
pulse timer
A Log Rly7 1 = enable relay 7 to initiate fault records
B tAUX3=DDO 1 = tAUX3 is delayed on drop-off
0 = tAUX3 is delayed on pick-up
0902 tBF SET Breaker failure protection time delay setting
0903 tAUX1 SET Auxiliary timer 1 setting
0906 tTRIP SET Trip pulse time setting
0907 tCLOSE SET Close pulse time setting
0908 CB ops> SET Alarm 1 setting for excessive circuit breaker operations
0909 CB duty> SET Alarm 1 setting for excessive circuit breaker contact
duty
090F Display SET Default display that is selected on power-up
0 Manufact Manufacturer’s name
1 Descript Description of product
2 Plant Plant reference
3 Thermal Thermal State (%)
4 IthA B C Thermal ammeter readings for each of the three
phases
5 Ia Ib Ic Instantaneous reading of phase currents (prospective
value of thermal ammeter)
6 Ia Io Vab Vo Line current and voltage plus residual current and
voltage
7 kW kVAr Active and reactive three phase power
3.15 Input masks

0A00 INPUT MASKS READ Column heading
0A01 Blk to> PWP Logic input to block first stage earth fault timer to>
0A02 Blk to>> PWP Logic input to block second stage earth fault timer
to>>
0A03 Blk to>>> PWP Logic input to block third stage earth fault timer
to>>>
0A04 Blk t> PWP Logic input to block first stage overcurrent timer t>
0A05 Blk t>> PWP Logic input to block second stage overcurrent timer
t>>
0A06 Blk t>>> PWP Logic input to block third stage overcurrent timer
t>>>
0A07 L Trip PWP Logic input to initiate trip pulse timer from external
input
0A08 L Close PWP Logic input to initiate close pulse timer from external
input
0A09 Ext Trip PWP Logic input to initiate breaker fail and records from
an external trip signal
0A0A Aux 1 PWP Logic input to initiate timer tAUX1 from external input
0A0B Aux 2 PWP Logic input to initiate timer tAUX2 from external input
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 14 of 24
0A0C Aux 3 PWP Logic input to initiate timer tAUX3 from external input
0A0D Set Grp 2 PWP Logic input to select group 2 protection settings from
external input
0A0E CB Closed PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in closed

position
0A0F CB Open PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in open position
0A10 Bus2 PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in bus 2
position
0A11 Reset Ith PWP Logic input to block/reset thermal protection,
also resets thermal ammeters
3.16 Relay masks

0B00 RELAY MASKS READ Column heading
0B01 Io> Fwd PWP Earth fault forward start (non directional start for non
directional relays)
0B02 Io> Rev PWP Earth fault reverse start (only available when
directionalised)
0B03 to> PWP First stage time delayed earth fault output
0B04 to>> PWP Second stage time delayed earth fault output
0B05 to>>> PWP Third stage time delayed earth fault output
0B06 I> Fwd PWP Overcurrent forward start (non directional start for non
directional relays)
0B07 I> Rev PWP Overcurrent reverse start (only available when
directionalised)
0B08 tA> PWP First stage time delayed overcurrent output for
phase A
0B09 tB> PWP First stage time delayed overcurrent output for
phase B
0B0A tC> PWP First stage time delayed overcurrent output for
phase C
0B0B t>> PWP Second stage time delayed overcurrent output
0B0C t>>> PWP Third stage time delayed overcurrent output
0B0D CB Trip PWP Trip pulse output
0B0E CB Close PWP Close pulse output
0B0F CB Fail PWP Breaker fail output for initiation of back tripping
0B10 Aux 1 PWP Output from the auxiliary 1 time delayed function
0B11 Aux2 PWP Output from the auxiliary 2 time delayed function
0B12 Aux3 PWP Output from the auxiliary 3 time delayed function
0B13 tV< PWP Undervoltage time delayed output
0B14 Level 1 PWP Output in response to command to load shed to
level 1
level 2
level 3
0B17 thAlarm PWP Thermal overload alarm
0B18 thTrip PWP Thermal overload trip
0B19 CB Alarm PWP Alarm for circuit breaker maintenance
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 15 of 24
3.17 Recorder
0C00 RECORDER READ Column heading
0C01 Control SET Manual stop/start control (running = started;
triggered = stopped)
0C02 Capture SET Select the functions to be captured: magnitudes/
phase angles/samples
0C03 Post trigger SET Select the number of samples recorded after the
trigger (1 to 511)
0C04 Logic trig SET Select the logic input to trigger the recorder
(0 to 7 pick-up or drop-off)
0 +Opto0 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L0
8 -Opto0 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L0
9 -Opto1 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L1
A -Opto2 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L2
B -Opto3 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L3
C -Opto4 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L4
D -Opto5 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L5
E -Opto6 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L6
F -Opto7 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic
input L7
0C05 Relay Trig SET Select the output relay tio trigger the recorder
(0 to 7 pick-up or drop-off)
0 +Rly 0 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay
RLY 0
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
RLY 5
RLY 6
RLY 7
8 -Rly 0 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 16 of 24
RLY 0
9 -Rly 1 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 1
A -Rly 2 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 2
B -Rly 3 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 3
C -Rly 4 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 4
D -Rly 5 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 5
E -Rly 6 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 6
F -Rly 7 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay
RLY 7
SECTION 4. CHANGING TEXT AND SETTINGS
Settings and text in certain cells of the menu can be changed via the user
interface. To do this the cover must be removed from the front of the relay so that
the [+] and [-] keys can be accessed.
4.1 Quick guide to menu controls
Quick guide to menu control with the four keys
Current display Key press Effect of action
Default display [0] long Back-light turns ON - no other effect

[0] short Steps through the available default displays
[F] ê steps down to column heading SYSTEM DATA
[+] Back-light turns ON - no other effect
[-] Back-light turns ON - no other effect
Fault flags after a trip [0] Back-light turns ON - no other effect
[F] ê steps down to column heading SYSTEM DATA without
resetting the fault flags
[0] long resets trip LED and returns default display
[+] Back-light turns ON - no other effect
[-] Back-light turns ON - no other effect
Column heading [0] short Back-light turns ON - no other effect
[0] long Re-establishes password protection immediately and
returns the default display
[F] long ì move to next column heading
[F] short ê steps down the menu to the next item in the column
[-] è move to next column heading
[+] ç move to previous column heading
Any menu cell [F] short ê steps down the menu to the next item in the column
[F] long ì displays the heading for the next column
[F] + [0] é steps back up the menu to the previous item
[0] short Back-light turns ON - no other effect
[0] long Resets the value if the cell is resettable
Any settable cell [+] or [-] Puts the relay in setting mode. The password must first be
entered for protected cells
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 17 of 24
Setting mode [0] Escapes from the setting mode without a setting change
[+] Increments value - with increasing rapidity if held
[-] Decrements value - with increasing rapidity if held
[F] Changes to the confirmation display
[F] If function links, relay or input masks are displayed the
[F] key will step through them from left to right and finally
changing to the confirmation display
Confirmation mode [+] Confirms setting and enters new setting or text
[-] Returns prospective change to check/modify
[0] Escapes from the setting mode without a setting change
The actions shown in the shaded area can only be performed when the cover is
removed.
[F] long means press F key and hold for longer than 1s
[F] short means press F key and hold for less than 1s
[F] means press the F key length of time does not change the
response
4.2 To enter setting mode
Give the [F] key a momentary press to change from the selected default display
and switch on the back-light; the heading SYSTEM DATA will be displayed. Use the
[+] and [-] keys, or a long press of the [F] key, to select the column containing the
setting, or text that is to be changed. Then with the [F] key step down the column
until the contents of that cell are displayed. Press the [+] key to put the relay into
the setting mode. Setting mode will be indicated by a flashing cursor on the bottom
line of the display. If the cell is read-only, or password protected, then the cursor
will not appear and the relay will not be in the setting mode.
4.3 To escape from the setting mode
IMPORTANT! If at any time you wish to escape from the setting mode without
making a change to the contents of the selected cell: Hold the [0] key depressed
for 1s, the original setting will be returned and the relay will exit the setting mode.
4.4 To accept the new setting
Press the [F] key until the confirmation display appears:
Are you sure?
+ = YES - = NO
Press the [0] key if you decide not to make any change.
Press the [-] key if you want to further modify the data before entry.
Press the [+] key to accept the change. This will terminate the setting mode.
4.5 Password protection
Password protection is provided for the configuration settings of the relay. This
includes time curve selection, CT and VT ratios, function links, input masks and
relay masks. Any accidental change to configuration could seriously affect the
ability of the relay to perform its intended functions, whereas, a setting error may
only cause a grading problem. Individual settings are protected from change when
the relay cover is in place by preventing direct access to the [+] and [-] keys.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 18 of 24
The password consists of four characters that may contain any upper case letter
from the alphabet. The password is initially set in the factory to AAAA, but it can
be changed by the user to another combination if necessary. If the password is lost
or forgotten, access to the relay will be denied. However, if the manufacturer or
their agent is supplied with the serial number of the relay, a back-up password can
be supplied that is unique to that particular product.
4.6 Entering passwords
Using the [F] key, select the password cell [0002] in the SYSTEM DATA column of
the menu. The word “Password” is displayed and four stars. Press the [+] key and
the cursor will appear under the left hand star. Now use the [+] key to step through
the alphabet until the required letter is displayed. The display will increment faster
if the key is held down and the [-] key can be used in a similar way to move
backwards through the alphabet. When the desired character has been set the [F]
key can be given a momentary press to move the cursor to the position for the next
character. The process is then repeated to enter the remaining characters that
make up the password. When the fourth character is acknowledged by a
momentary press of the [F] key the display will read:
Are you sure?
+ = YES - = NO
Press the [0] key if you decide not to enter the password.
Press the [-] key if you want to modify the entry.
Press the [+] to enter the password. The display will then show four stars and if the
password was accepted the alarm LED will flash. If the alarm LED is not flashing
the password was not accepted - a further attempt can be made to enter it, or the
[F] key pressed to move to the next cell.
Note: When the password cell is displayed, do not press the [+] or [-] key
whilst the alarm led is flashing unless you want to change the
password!
4.7 Changing passwords
When the password has been entered and the alarm LED is flashing the [+] key is
pressed to put the relay in setting mode. A new password can now be entered as
described in Section 4.6. After entering the fourth character make a note of the
new password shown on the display before pressing the [F] key to obtain the
confirmation display.
Are you sure?
+ = YES - = NO
Press the [0] key if you decide not to enter the new password.
Press the [-] key if you want to modify your entry.
Press the [+] to enter the new password which will then replace the old one.
Note: Make sure the new password has been written down before it is
entered and that the password being entered agrees with the written
copy before accepting it. If the new password is not entered
correctly you may be denied access in the future. If the password is
lost a back-up password unique to that relay can be provided from
the factory, or certain agents, if the serial number of the product is
quoted.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 19 of 24
4.8 Restoration of password protection

Password protection is reinstated when the alarm LED stops flashing. This will occur
fifteen minutes after the last key press. To restore the password protection without
waiting for the fifteen minute time-out, select the password cell or any column
heading and hold the reset key [0] depressed for 1s. The alarm LED will cease to
flash to indicate the password protection is restored.
4.9 Entering text
Enter the setting mode as described in Section 4.2 and move the cursor with the [F]
key to where the text is to be entered or changed. Then using the [+] and [-] keys,
select the character to be displayed. The [F] key may then be used to move the
cursor to the position of the next character and so on. Follow the instructions in
Section 4.4 to exit from the setting change.
4.10 Changing function links
Select the column heading required and step down to the function links “SD Links”,
“EF Links”, “PF Links”, or “LOG Links” and press either the [+] or [-] to put the relay
in a setting change mode. A cursor will flash on the bottom line at the extreme left
position. This is link “F”; as indicated by the character printed on the frontplate
under the display.
Press the [F] key to step along the row of links, one link at a time, until some text
appears on the top line that describes the function of a link. The [+] key will
change the link to a “1” to select the function and the [-] key will change it to a “0”
to deselect it. Follow the instructions in Section 4.4 to accept the setting change.
Not all links can be set, some being factory selected and locked. The links that are
locked in this way are usually those for functions that are not supported by a
particular relay, when they will be set to “0”. Merely moving the cursor past a link
position does not change it in any way.
4.11 Changing setting values
Move through the menu until the cell that is to be edited is displayed. Press the [+]
or [-] key to put the relay into the setting change mode. A cursor will flash in the
extreme left hand position on the bottom line of the display to indicate that the
relay is ready to have the setting changed. The value will be incremented in single
steps by each momentary press of the [+] key, or if the [+] key is held down the
value will be incremented with increasing rapidity until the key is released.
Similarly the [-] key can be used to decrement the value. Follow the instructions in
Section 4.4 to exit from the setting change.
Note: When entering CT RATIO or VT RATIO the overall ratio should be
entered, ie. 2000/5A CT has an overall ratio of 400:1. With rated
current applied the relay will display 5A when CT RATIO has the
default value of 1:1 and when the ratio is set to 400:1 the displayed
value will be 400 x 5 = 2000A.
4.12 Setting communication address
The communication address will be set to 255, the global address to all relays on
the network, when the relay is first supplied. Reply messages are not issued from
any relay for a global command, because they would all respond at the same time
and result in contention on the bus. Setting the address to 255 will ensure that
when first connected to the network they will not interfere with communications on
existing installations. The communication address can be manually set by selecting
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 20 of 24
the appropriate cell for the SYSTEM DATA column, entering the setting mode as
described in Section 4.2 and then decrementing or incrementing the address. Then
exit setting mode as described in Section 4.4.
To automatically allocate an address to the relay, see Chapter 6.
4.13 Setting input masks
An eight bit mask is allocated to each protection and control function that can be
influenced by an external input applied to one or more of the logic inputs. When
the menu cell for an input mask is selected the top line of the display shows text
describing the function to be controlled by the inputs selected in the mask. A series
of “1”s and “0”s on the bottom line of the display indicates which logic inputs are
selected to exert control. The numbers printed on the frontplate under the display
indicate each of the logic inputs (L7 to L0) being displayed. A “1” indicates that a
particular input is assigned to the displayed control function and a “0” indicates
that it is not. The same input may be used to control more than one function.
4.14 Setting output masks
An eight bit mask is allocated to each protection and control function. When a
mask is selected the text on the top line of the display indicates the associated
function and the bottom line of the display shows a series of “1”s and “0”s for the
selected mask. The numbers printed on the frontplate under the display indicate the
output relay (RLY7 to RLY0) to which each bit is associated. A “1” indicates that the
relay will respond to the displayed function and a “0” indicates that it will not.
A logical “OR” function is performed on the relay masks so that more than one
relay may be allocated to more than one function. An output mask may be set to
operate the same relay as another mask so that, for example, one output relay
may be arranged to operate for all the functions required to trip the circuit breaker
and another for only those functions that are to initiate autoreclose.
4.15 Resetting values and records
Some values and records can be reset to zero, or some predefined value. To
achieve this the menu cell must be displayed and then the [0] key held depressed
for at least one second to effect the reset. The fault records are slightly different
because they are a group of settings and to reset these the last cell under
FLT RECORDS must be selected. This will display:
Clear = [0]
To reset ALL FIVE fault records hold the [0] key depressed for more than 1s. If the
records are not cleared the oldest record will be overwritten by the next fault.
4.16 Resetting trip LED indication
The trip LED can be reset when the flags for the last fault are displayed. They are
displayed automatically after a trip occurs, or can be selected in the fault record
column. The reset is effected by depressing the [0] key for 1s. Resetting the fault
records as described in 4.15 will also reset the trip LED indication.
Set function link SD5 to “1” for the trip LED to automatically reset. This will then
occur when the circuit breaker is reclosed and the load current exceeds the
undercurrent setting (I<) for three seconds. The LED will not reset if the circuit
breaker is not reclosed and so it is a useful function to employ with autoreclose
equipment, as it will prevent unwanted trip flags being displayed after a successful
reclosure of the circuit breaker.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 21 of 24
SECTION 5. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
Standard connection table

Function Terminal Function
Earth terminal - 1 2 - Not used
Watchdog relay b 3 4 m Watchdog relay
(break contact) - 5 6 - (make contact)
48V field voltage [+] 7 8 [-] 48V field voltage
Capacitor trip voltage [+] 9 10 [-] Capacitor trip voltage
Not used - 15 16 - Not used
Auxiliary voltage input (+) 13 14 (-) Auxiliary voltage input
Not used - 15 16 - Not used
A phase voltage In 17 18 In B phase voltage
C phase voltage In 19 20 Out Common voltage neutral
A phase current In 21 22 Out A phase current
B phase current In 23 24 Out B phase current
C phase current In 25 26 Out C phase current
Neutral current In 27 28 Out Neutral current
Output relay 4 - 29 30 - Output relay 0
31 32
35 36
39 40
43 44
Opto control input L3 (+) 45 46 (+) Opto control input L0
Opto control input L6 (+) 51 52 (-) Common L0/L1/L2
Opto control input L7 (+) 53 54 - K-BUS serial port
Common L3/L4/L5/L6/L7 (-) 55 56 - K-BUS serial port
Key to connection tables

[+] and [-] indicate the polarity of the dc output from these terminals
(+) and (-) indicate the polarity for the applied dc supply
In/out the signal direction for forward operation
Note: All relays have standard Midos terminal blocks to which connections
can be made with either 4mm screws or 4.8mm pre-insulated
snap-on connectors. Two connections can be made to each terminal.
5.1 Auxiliary supply
The auxiliary voltage may be DC or AC provided it is within the limiting voltages
for the particular relay. The voltage range will be found on the frontplate of the
relay; it is marked (Vx = (24V - 125V) or (48V - 250V). An ideal supply to use for
testing the relays will be 50V DC or 110V AC because these values fall within
both of the auxiliary voltage ranges.
The supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 only. To avoid any
confusion it is recommended that the polarity of any applied voltage is kept to the
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 22 of 24
Midos standard:
- for dc supplies the positive lead connected to terminal 13 and the negative to
terminal 14
- for ac supplies the live lead is connected to terminal 13 and the neutral lead
to terminal 14.
5.2 Dual powered relays
Dual powered relays derive power from the current transformer circuit and may be
used with this power source alone. However, the application of an auxiliary DC or
AC voltage will enable lower earth fault settings to be used, also settings to be
applied and data to be read when the load current is insufficient to power the
relay. It will also allow communications to be maintained at such times.
When powered from the CT circuit alone the 48V field voltage will be available to
power the opto-isolated control inputs when the protection starts up. The phase
fault current setting range is limited to the minimum current levels at which the
power requirements of the relay can be maintained. See Technical Data, Chapter 7.
This model of relay is rated for an auxiliary voltage
Vx = (100V to 250V).
Note: The capacitance discharge circuit is not isolated from the auxiliary
supply and to prevent the relay from being damaged, no external
ground connection should be made to this circuit.
5.3 Logic control inputs
There are a number of logic control inputs to the relay that are optically coupled to
provide galvanic isolation between the external and internal circuits. They are
rated at 48V and the power supply within the relay provides an isolated field
voltage to energise them. This arrangement keeps the power consumption of these
inputs to a minimum and ensures that they always have a supply to energise them
when the relay is operational. This is particularly important for the dual powered
relay when there is no auxiliary supply voltage available and the relay is
energised by the current from the line current transformers.
Software filtering is applied to prevent induced AC signals in the external wiring
causing operation of logic inputs. This is achieved by sampling the logic inputs
eight times per cycle and five consecutive samples have to indicate that the input is
energised in a positive sense before it is accepted. This ensures that the inputs are
relatively immune to spurious operation from induced ac signals in the wiring. The
capture time is:
12 ±2.5ms at 50Hz
10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz
Note: These inputs will not capture a fleeting contact unless it dwells in the
closed state for a time exceeding the above values.
The opto-isolated logic control inputs are divided into two groups. Three (L0, L1,
L2) have their common connection on terminal 52 and the remainder (L3, L4, L5,
L6, L7) have their common connection on terminal 55. When they are to be
energised from the field voltage then terminals 52 and 55 must be connected to
terminal 8, the negative of the field voltage. The logic inputs can then be energised
by connecting a volt free contact between the positive of the field voltage, terminal
7, and the terminal for the appropriate logic input.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 23 of 24
The circuit for each opto-isolated input contains a blocking diode to protect it from
any damage that may result from the application of voltage with incorrect polarity.
Where the opto-isolated input of more than one relay is to be controlled by the
same contact it will be necessary to connect terminal 7 of each relay together to
form a common line. In the example circuit below, contact X operates L1 of relay 1
and contact Y operates L0 of relay 1 as well as L0 and L1 of relay 2. There are no
connections made to L2 as it is not used on either relay.
The logic inputs can be separated into two isolated groups when it is necessary to
energise some from the station battery. The logic inputs are rated at 48V and it will
be necessary to connect an external resistor in series with the input if the battery is
of higher rated voltage. The value of this resistor should be 2.4kΩ for every
additional 10V.
The field voltage is not earthed and has insulation rated for 2kV for 1 minute. Thus
if necessary the positive terminal of the field voltage could be connected to the
positive terminal on the external battery. Also the two separate groups of logic
inputs could be energised from separate batteries.
5.4 Analogue inputs
The relays can have up to eight analogue inputs, two on the microprocessor board
and six on the auxiliary expansion board. Each is fed via an input transducer, a
low pass filter and a three range scaling amplifier. The analogue signals are
sampled eight times per cycle on each channel as the sampling rate tracks the
frequency of the input signal.
The wide setting range provided on the auxiliary powered version of the relays is
sufficient to enable the 5A version of the relay to operate from either 1A or 5A
current transformers and this version of the relay can be used where dual rated
relays are specified. Alternatively, the wide setting range makes the relay suitable
for use on circuit breakers that may be applied to a wide range of load circuit
ratings with only one current transformer ratio. For example a circuit breaker rated
at 2kA and fitted with current transformers rated at 2000/10A (or 2000/2A) and
relays rated at 5A (or 1A) could be applied to circuits with load ratings from 100A
to 2000A.
The dual powered relays have a narrower setting range and must be used with
current transformers that match their current rating. Thermal dissipation is the
limitation for the upper end of the setting range and the energy required to power
the relay is the limitation at the lower end. When the relay is powered from an
additional auxiliary voltage source, earth fault settings can be applied below that
at which the relay can derive sufficient power from the CTs. For this reason the
earth fault setting range has not been restricted.
5.5 Output relays
Four programmable output relays are provided on relays with no more than two
analogue inputs and eight on all other models. They can be arranged to operate in
response to any or all of the available functions by suitably setting the output
masks. The protection and control functions to which these relays respond are
selectable via the menu system of the relay.
In addition there is a watchdog relay which has one make and one break contact.
Thus it can indicate both healthy and failed conditions. As these contacts are
mainly used for alarm purposes they have a lower rating than the programmable
outputs. The terminal numbers for the output relay contacts are given in the table at
the start of Section 5.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 24 of 24
5.6 Ouput relay minimum dwell time

Outputs from t>, t>>, t>>>, to>, to>>, to>>> have a minimum dwell of 100ms. The
thermal trip will have an inherent delay dependent on the selected time constant.
The contact dwell ensures a positive trip signal is given to the circuit breaker.
All other outputs such as I>, I>>, I>>>, Io>, Io>>, Io>>>, tV>, Aux1, Aux2 and
Aux3 have no deliberate dwell time added to them. This is because they are either
followed by a timer, or used for control purposes which require a faster reset time.
5.7 Setting the relay with a PC or laptop
Connection to a personal computer (PC) or lap top via a K-Bus/RS232 interface
type KITZ 101 will enable settings to be changed more easily. Software is
available for the PC that allows on line setting changes in a more user friendly way
with a whole column of data being displayed instead of just single cells. Setting
files can also be saved to floppy disk and downloaded to other relays of the same
type. There are also programs available to enable setting files to be generated off-
line, ie. away from the relays that can be later down-loaded as necessary.
The communication connections and available software are covered under
‘Applications’ in Chapter 6.
SECTION 6. ALARM FLAGS
A full list of the alarm flags will be found in Section 3.3 and is located in cell 0022
of the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu. They consist of nine characters that may
be either “1” or “0” to indicate the set and reset states respectively. The control
keys perform for this menu cell in the same way as they do for function links. The
cell is selected with the function key [F] and the relay then put in the setting mode
by pressing the [+] key to display the cursor. The cursor will then be stepped
through the alarm word from left to right with each press of the [F] key and text
identifying the alarm bit selected will be displayed.
The only alarm flag that can be manually set is the bit 6, the watchdog test flag.
When this flag is set to “1” the watchdog relay will change state and the green led
will extinguish.
When any alarm flag is set the alarm led will be continuously lit. However, there is
another form of alarm condition that will cause the alarm led to flash and this
indicates that the password has been entered to allow access to change protected
settings within the relay. This is not generally available as a remote alarm and it
does not generate an alarm flag.
Note: No control will be possible via the key pad if the “unconfigured”
alarm is raised because the relay will be locked in a non-operate
state.
Chapter 4
Application of Protection Functions

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. CONFIGURATION 1
1.1 Configuring the relay 1
1.2 Default configuration 2
2. CHANGING THE CONFIGURATION OF THE RELAY 2
2.1 System data (SD) 2
2.2 Earth fault links (EF) 3
2.3 Phase fault links (PF) 4
2.4 Logic links (LOG) 5
2.5 Preferred use of logic inputs 6
2.6 Preferred use of output relays 6
3. OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION 7
4 FIRST STAGE OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT LOGIC 8
4.1 Start function 8
4.2 Definite time 9
4.3 Inverse time curves 9
4.4 Reset timer 10
4.5 Matching the reset response of an electromechanical relay 10
4.6 Protection against intermittent recurrent faults 10
4.7 Time graded protection 11
4.8 Dual rate inverse time curves 12
5. SECOND/THIRD STAGE OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT LOGIC 12
5.1 Two out of three logic 13
5.2 Broken conductor logic 13
5.3 Transformer inrush currents 13
5.4 Sensitivity to harmonics 14
5.5 Autoreclose inhibition of instantaneous low set 14
5.6 Blocked overcurrent protection 14
5.6.1 Blocked IDMT overcurrent 14
5.6.2 Blocked short time overcurrent 15
5.7 Protection of busbars on radial system 16
5.8 Points to consider with blocking schemes 17
5.9 Back-up transfer tripping scheme 18
5.10 Restricted earth fault protection 18
5.10.1 Setting voltage for stability 18
5.10.2 Rs stabilising resistor 19
5.10.3 Is current setting 19
5.10.4 Metrosil assessment 19
5.11 Rectifier protection 20
5.12 Cold load pick-up 21
6. DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT 23
6.1 Directional overcurrent logic 23
6.2 Directional start output 23
6.3 Directional first stage overcurrent 24
6.4 Directional second and third overcurrent stages 24
6.5 Directional earth fault logic 24
6.6 Application of directional phase fault relays 25
6.7 Synchronous polarisation 25
6.8 Application of directional earth fault relays 26
6.9 Power directional earth fault element 26
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
6.10 Directional stability for instantaneous elements 27

6.11 Protection of circuits with multiple in-feeds 27
6.11.1 Blocked directional overcurrent protection 28
6.11.2 Blocked overcurrent protection for the feeder 28
6.11.3 Blocked overcurrent protection for the bus section 28
7. THERMAL OVERCURRENT 29
7.1 Thermal state 29
7.2 Thermal trip and alarm levels 29
7.3 Operation time 30
7.4 Thermal memory 30
7.5 Thermal reset 30
7.6 Dual time constant characteristic 30
7.7 Application of thermal protection 31
8. UNDERCURRENT 32
8.1 Breaker failure protection 32
9. UNDERVOLTAGE 33
9.1 Undervoltage trip 33
9.2 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection 33
10. UNDER FREQUENCY 34
11. AUXILIALRY TIMERS 34
11.1 Extra earth fault stage 35
11.2 Loss of load protection 35
11.3 Delayed under frequency trip 35
12. SETTING GROUP SELECTION 36
12.1 Remote change of setting group 36
12.2 Manual change of setting group 36
12.3 Controlled change of setting group 36
13. DUAL POWERED RELAYS 37
13.1 Powered from current transformers alone 37
13.2 Powered from an auxiliary ac voltage and from current transformers 38
13.3 Special application notes for dual powered relays 38
13.4 Dead substation protection 39
13.5 Capacitor discharge tripping 39
13.6 AC series tripping 39
14. AUTORECLOSE - SINGLE SHOT SCHEME 40
14.1 Overview 40
14.2 Connections 41
14.3 Successful reclose description 42
14.4 Unsuccessful reclose 43
14.5 Blocking instantaneous low set protection when reclosing 43
14.6 Circuit breaker operation counter 44
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
Figure 1. Available overcurrent characteristics and their settings 7

Figure 2. First stage overcurrent and earth fault logic 8
Figure 3. Matching electromechanical reset time 10
Figure 4. Intermittent recurrent fault 11
Figure 5. Dual rate curves 12
Figure 6. Second and third stage overcurrent logic 13
Figure 7. Blocked IDMT overcurrent 15
Figure 8. Blocked overcurrent for busbar protection 16
Figure 9. Back-up transfer trip scheme 17
Figure 10. Protection for silicon rectifiers 20
Figure 11. Matching curve to load and thermal limit of rectifier 20
Figure 12. compensation for motor starting current 22
Figure 13. Directional characteristic 23
Figure 14. Directional overcurrent relay logic 24
Figure 15. Circuit with multiple infeeds 27
Figure 16. Thermal alarm and trip logic 29
Figure 17. Circuit breaker fail logic 32
Figure 18. Undervoltage logic 33
Figure 19. Auxiliary timer logic 35
Figure 20. Setting group selection logic 36
Figure 21. Start-up time delay 37
Figure 22. Capacitor discharge trip 39
Figure 23. AC series trip arrangement 40
Figure 24. Connection diagram for single shot autoreclose scheme 41
Figure 25. Successful autoreclose sequence 42
Figure 26. Unsuccessful autoreclose sequence 43
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 44
SECTION 1. CONFIGURATION
The settings that customise the relay for a particular application are referred to as
the configuration. They include the function links, input masks, relay masks, etc.
and they are password protected to prevent them being changed accidentally.
Together these settings select the functions that are to be made available and how
they are to be interconnected.
Before the advent of integrated numerical relays, protection and control schemes
comprised individual relays that had to be interconnected and a diagram was
produced to show these interconnections. The configuration of a numerical relay is
the software equivalent of these interconnections. With the software approach,
installations can be completed in much shorter times, especially for repeat
schemes, saving valuable time and cost. A second advantage is the ability to make
some changes without having to disturb the external wiring.
Before the connection diagrams can be drawn for an installation, it will be
necessary to decide how the logic within the relay is to function. A copy of the
logic diagram will be found at the back of this manual. It should be copied and the
appropriate squares in the input and relays masks should be shaded in to show
which logic inputs and output relays are to be assigned in each mask. The function
links should then be drawn on the diagram in position “0” or “1” as required.
These software links may turn functions on, or off, and when in the “off” state some
unnecessary settings may not appear in the menu. The second and third
overcurrent stages are typical examples of this. As supplied the third overcurrent
stage is turned off and its associated settings I>>>/t>>> will not appear in the
menu. The function link settings can now be read off the logic diagram and
entered as a series of ones and noughts, in the boxes provided on the logic
diagram.
Case connection diagrams will be found at the back of this manual for the current
models of K Range directional and non directional overcurrent relays. They may be
copied and notes added in the appropriate boxes to indicate the function of the
logic inputs and relay outputs. This diagram will then give the appropriate terminal
numbers to which the external wires must be connected. In particular, it will show
the terminal numbers to which the current and voltage transformers connections are
to be made.
Enough information is available from the logic and case connection diagrams to
enable the full external wiring diagrams to be drawn and the operation of
complete protection and control scheme to be understood.
1.1 Configuring the relay
Each scheme of protection and control will have its own particular configuration
settings. These can be named appropriately and the name entered as the
“description” in cell 0004 in the system data column of the menu. If the scheme is
likely to become a standard that is to be applied to several installations it would be
worthwhile storing the configuration on a floppy disc so that it can be downloaded
to other relays.
The configuration file can be made even more useful by adding appropriate
general settings for the protection and control functions. It will then only require the
minimum of settings to be changed during commissioning the installation.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 44
1.2 Default configuration

The relays are provided with a basic configurations and typical settings to suit a
basic application. The basic configuration provides:
One settings group only.
One IDMT characteristic (t> = standard inverse)
Instantaneous overcurrent (t>>=0)
Breaker failure protection with backtrip relay
CB maintenance alarm
Remote circuit breaker control
SECTION 2. CHANGING THE CONFIGURATION OF THE RELAY
2.1 System data (SD)

Select the system data column of the menu, enter the password and then step down
to the cell containing the SD links. Press the [+] key to put the relays into setting
mode and use to [F] key to step through the options. The option will be shown in
abbreviated form on the top line of the display as each function link is selected. To
select an option set the link to “1” with the [+] key and to deselect it set it to “0”
with the [-] key.
The following options are available via links SD0 to SD8:
SD0 Rem ChgStg 1= enable remote setting changes
SD1 Not used
SD2 Rem CB Ctrl 1= enable remote control of circuit breaker
SD3 Rem ChgGrp 1= enable remote change of setting group
SD4 En Grp2 1= enable group 2 settings to be used
SD5 Auto Flag 1= enable flags to reset automatically on load
restoration
SD6 Auto Rec 1= enable disturbance recorder reset on load
restoration
SD7 Log Evts 1= enable logic events to be stored
SD8 Alt Rec Reset 1= enable alternative reset method for disturbance
record.
When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until the
confirmation display appears and confirm the selection.
Now step down the menu to cell [0004 Description] and enter a suitable name for
the configuration; a maximum of sixteen characters are available.
Step down one cell [0005 Plant Ref.], where a suitable reference can be entered
for the plant that the relay is to protect. If the configuration is for a relay that is to
be applied to one particular circuit, then the reference by which the circuit is
known can be entered at this time; a maximum of sixteen characters are available.
Now move down the system data column to cell [0009 Freq] and set the frequency
to 50Hz or 60Hz as appropriate. This is an important setting because it will be the
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 44
default frequency used by the analogue/digital converter when appropriate

signals are not available for frequency tracking.
If the address of the relay on the serial communication bus is known then it can be
entered at this time. This cell is password protected on the series 2 relays.
This concludes the settings that can be entered in this menu column at this time.
2.2 Earth fault links (EF)
Select the column EARTH FAULT (1) and EF Links. Press the [+] key to put the relay
into setting mode and set the links to “1” that enable the required options available
via links EF0 to EF6.
EF 0 Not used
EF 1 En Io>> 1= enable earth fault stage 2
EF 2 En Io>>> 1= enable earth fault stage 3
EF 3 Drn to> 1= earth fault stage 1 directionalised
EF 4 Drn to>> 1= earth fault stage 2 directionalised
EF 5 Drn to>>> 1= earth fault stage 3 directionalised
EF 6 Io>> NoPeak 1= no peak measurement for stage 2 earth fault element
The links EF3, EF4 and EF5 enable the three overcurrent stages Io>, Io>> and
Io>>> to be selectively directionalised. If all three links EF3, EF4 & EF5 are set non
directional then the forward start will also be non directional and the reverse start
will retain its normal function provided a directionalising voltage signal is
available. The directional options are not be available on non directional KCGG
overcurrent relays.
For KCGG relays the Io>>/Io>>> elements are responsive to peak measurement
so that they respond faster, but they will be more sensitive to harmonic currents that
create peaks on the waveform. The “NoPeak” option can be selected for Io>>
element, with link EF6, when the relay is required to be insensitive to harmonics.
However, the “NoPeak” option is only provided for the Io>> setting. The KCEG
directional overcurrent relays do not respond to peak values and are not provided
with this link option.
confirmation display appears and then confirm the selection.
Next enter the time delay characteristic for the to> element.
Enter, or copy, the same settings into the EARTH FAULT (2) column if it is active. It is
not essential that the links are set the same in both setting groups. For example the
Io>>> element could be made available in group one and not in group two
settings.
Note: It would be wise to ensure the logic is such that an element that is to
be switched out in the alternative setting group is reset before the
alternative setting group is selected, or alternatively make a physical
test to ensure there are no latch-up problems.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 44
A different time characteristic can be selected for to> in the second setting group,
but it is not advisable to select inverse in one group and definite time in the other if
it is intended to dynamically switch between setting groups. If two different inverse
curves are selected then the same register will be used for both. These registers are
not reset to zero when the setting group is changed unless the current falls below
the set threshold.
2.3 Phase fault links (PF)
Select the PF Links under the PHASE FAULT (1) menu column heading and put the
relay into setting mode by pressing the [+] key. Step through the function links with
the [F] key and set the links for the options required.
There are more options available for phase faults, but most of the additional ones
are associated with voltage functions that are only available of the directional
relays. The exceptions are the thermal characteristic which can be enabled by
setting PF0=1 and the broken conductor detection which is activated by setting
PFC=1. The 2/3 logic is also required for the broken conductor detection, so set
link PF7=1 as well when using this function.
PF 0 En Therm 1 = enable thermal element
PF 1 En I>> 1 = enable stage 2 overcurrent
PF 2 Enable I>>> 1 = enable stage 3 overcurrent
PF 3 Drn t> 1 = stage 1 overcurrent directionalised
PF 4 Drn t>> 1 = stage 2 overcurrent directionalised
PF 5 Drn t>>> 1 = stage 3 overcurrent directionalised
PF 6 I>> NoPeak 1 = No peak measurement for stage 2 overcurrent
PF 7 I>>>=2/3 1 = 2 out of 3 phase elements to operate for I>>>/t>>>
trip
PF 8 CB blk V< 1 = V< blocked when CB open
PF 9 V< any=1 1 = any phase undervoltage for trip
0 = all phases undervolted for trip
PF A V< P-N=1 1 = V< measure phase/neutral voltage
0 = V< measure line voltage
PF B SynPol=3.2 1 = synchronous polarising time extended to 3.2s
PF C Brkn Cond 1 = enable broken conductor logic
The links PF3, PF4 and PF5 enable the three overcurrent stages I>, I>> and I>>>
to be selectively directionalised. If all three links PF3, PF4 & PF5 are set non
directional then the forward start will also be non directional and the reverse start
will retain its normal function provided a directionalising voltage signal is
available. The directional options are not be available on non directional KCGG
overcurrent relays.
For KCGG relays the I>>/I>>> elements are responsive to peak measurement so
that they respond faster, but they will be more sensitive to harmonic currents that
create peaks on the waveform. The “NoPeak” option can be selected for I>>
element, with link PF6, when the relay is required to be less sensitive to harmonics.
However, the “NoPeak” option is only provided for the I>> setting. The KCEG
directional overcurrent relays do not respond to peak values and are not provided
with this link option.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 5 of 44
Next enter the time delay characteristic for the t> element.
Enter, or copy, the same settings into the PHASE FAULT (2) column if it is active. It is
not essential that the links are set the same in both setting groups. For example the
I>>> element could be made available in group one and not in group two
settings.
Note: It would be wise to check that an element that is to be switched out
in the alternative setting group is reset before the alternative setting
group is selected, or alternatively make a physical test to ensure
there are no latch-up problems.
A different time characteristic can be selected for t> in the second setting group,
but it is not advisable to select inverse in one group and definite time in the other if
it is intended to dynamically switch between setting groups. If two different inverse
curves are selected then the same register will be used for both and these registers
will not be reset to zero when the setting group is changed unless the current is
below the set threshold.
2.4 Logic links (LOG)
The Logic Links under the LOGIC menu column heading customise the auxiliary
functions of the relay. Put the relay into setting mode by pressing the [+] key. Step
through the function links with the [F] key and set the links for the options required.
LOG0 CB Rec 1 = enable CB records to be generated;
= 0 to inhibit when testing.
LOG1 CB1*1=0 1 = sum of currents; 0 = sum of current squared.
LOG2 BF blk Start 1 = enable breaker fail to reset start relays.
LOG3 Aux2=I< 1 = enable I< to initiate timer tAUX2 (loss of load
function).
LOG4 Aux2=/Io< 1 = enable tAUX2 to start when Io exceeds Io< .
LOG5 tAUX Grp2 1 = Group 2 settings selected whilst tAUX3 is
giving an output.
LOG6 tAUX2-tAUX3 1 = enable tAUX2 to delay pick-up of tAUX3.
LOG7 Latch Strt 1 = enable start flags to be latched.
LOG8 Hold Grp2 1 = manual selection of group 2 settings.
LOG9 Rst CBclose 1 = enable a trip to terminate the CB close pulse
LOGA Log Rly7 1 = enable relay RLY7 to initiate latch flags and
log records
LOGB tAUX3=DDO 1 = tAUX3 delayed on drop-off
0 = delayed on pick-up
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 6 of 44
Set the breaker failure protection time delay tBF.
Set the circuit breaker close and trip pulse time delays tCLOSE and tTRIP.
Select the default display that appears on start-up.
2.5 Preferred use of logic inputs
The following table is not mandatory, but it is suggested that it is followed where
possible so that different schemes will use the a particular logic input for the same
or similar function.
L0 Stg grp2 [change setting group]
L1 Blk t>>/to>> [Block instantaneous low set from autoreclose]
L2 Blkt>>>/to>>> [Block overcurrent for busbar/unit feeder protection]
L3 EXT TRIP [external trip input from other protection]
L4 AUX2 [Auxiliary input to initiate timer tAUX2/CLP]
L5 AUX3 [Auxiliary input to initiate timer tAUX3/CLP]
L6 CB closed [indication that CB is closed]
L7 CB open [indication that CB is open]
2.6 Preferred use of output relays
The following table is not mandatory, but it is suggested that it is followed where
possible so that differrent schemes will use the a particular output relay for the
same or similar function.
RLY0 START [earth fault start or combined phase and earth forward
start]
RLY1 START [phase start or combined phase and earth reverse start]
RLY2 AR INITIATE [any function assigned to initate autoreclose]
RLY3 TRIP [any protection function assigned to trip the circuit
breaker]
RLY4 ALARM [Any function assigned to produce an alarm]
RLY5 BACKTRIP [Output to backtrip for breaker fail]
RLY6 CB close [in response to a remote command]
RLY7 CB trip [in response to a remote command]
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 7 of 44
SECTION 3. OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
Three independent time delayed overcurrent stages are provided for each phase
and residual current input. In addition there is an undercurrent function associated
with each of these currents and in some instances a thermal overcurrent
characteristic is provided. The settings are marked I>/t>; I>>/t>>; I>>>/t>>>; I<
and Ith>/TC; shown appropriately in the diagram below. These settings affect all
three phases equally.
The earth fault elements have similar settings marked Io>/to>; Io>>/to>>; Io>>>/
to>>> and Io<; there being no thermal element associated with this input.
Both the peak value and the Fourier derived rms value of the power frequency
component of the fault current are used to derive the protection functions Each
value has its own associated characteristics that can be used to advantage. For
example, a change in the peak value may be detected in one half cycle of fault
current and so this measurement is used for the undercurrent elements to obtain the
fast reset required by breaker fail applications. The Fourier derived values are
particularly useful for earth fault applications due to their high rejection of
harmonic currents, in particular the third harmonic. Fourier values are also used for
all measurements where a phase angle reference is required.
Ith>
TC
Time I>
t>
I>>
t>>
I>>>
I<
t>>>
Current
Figure 1. Available overcurrent characteristics and their settings

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 8 of 44
SECTION 4. FIRST STAGE OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT LOGIC
The following diagram shows the logic associated with the first earth fault and
overcurrent stages. When the residual current exceeds the Io> threshold and
provided that no logic inputs selected in the input mask [0A01 Blk to>] are
energised, the time delay to> will start to time out. When the delay time expires
the output relays selected in the relay mask [0B03 Io>] will be energised, causing
them to pick-up.
If a logic input selected in mask [0A01 BLK to>] is energised then the time delay
will be blocked and held reset.
+ 0A01 BLK to> -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B03 to>
& to> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Io>
0B01 Io> START
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OBO8 tA>
0A05 BLK t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B09 tB>
& t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B0A tC>
I>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B06 I> START
≥1
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Blocking signal from breaker fail protection
Figure 2. First stage overcurrent and earth fault logic.

Similar logic is provided for the phase fault overcurrent protection and here a
separate overcurrent threshold and time delay is used for each phase, but the
same settings for I> and t> will apply to the elements on all three phases. A
separate relay mask is provided for each phase so that a differrent output relay
can be assigned to each phase output and/or the same output relays to all three
phases.
4.1 Start function
As soon as the Io> threshold is exceeded an instantaneous output is available via
relay mask [0B01 Io>]. This is used to indicate that the protection has detected an
earth fault and that the time delay to> has started. This time delay can be blocked
by energising a logic input assigned in the input mask [0A01 Blk to>]. If this
blocking input is energised by the start output from a downstream relay then
operation will be blocked only if the relay nearer to the fault can clear the fault.
This is the principle known as “Blocked Overcurrent Protection”, described more
fully in a later section.
The phase element is also provided with a start output via mask [0B06 I>] and a
blocking input via mask [0A02 Blk t>]. The start outputs for both the phase and
earth fault elements are gated with a blocking signal, the function of which is
described in the Section 4.8.1 Breaker failure protection.
The time delayed output is via mask [0B03 to>] for the earth faults and for phase
faults masks [0B08 tA>], [0B09 tB>] and [0B0A tC>] provide separate outputs for
each of the phase elements.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 9 of 44
4.2 Definite time

The first stage can be selected have a definite time characteristic. The operation
time will be the set time for the time delay to>/t>, plus the operation time of the
output relay and the time taken to detect the overcurrent condition.
The same register is used for the time delay t> in both setting groups and the timer
is not reset when switching from one setting group to the other. Thus switching from
the setting group with a long time setting to that with a short time setting may result
in an instantaneous trip if the shorter time setting had already elapsed.
4.3 Inverse time curves
Alternatively, the first stage can be selected have a current dependent inverse time
characteristic. The operation time is given accurately by a mathematical
expression, into which the constants for the selected characteristic must be
inserted.
Nine inverse time characteristics are available and the general mathematical
expression for the curves is:
k
t = TMS I a -1 + c seconds
Is
where TMS = Time Multiplier (0.025 to 1.5 in step 0.025)

I = Fault current
Is = Overcurrent setting
k, c, a = Constants specifying curve
Curve No. Description Name IEC Curve k c a

0 Definite Time DT - 0 0 to 100 1
1 Standard Inverse SI30xDT A 0.14 0 0.02
2 Very Inverse VI30xDT B 13.5 0 1
3 Extremely Inverse EI10xDT C 80 0 2
4 Long Time Inverse LTI30xDT - 120 0 1
5 Moderately Inverse MI D 0.103 0.228 0.02
6 Very Inverse VI E 39.22 0.982 2
7 Extremely Inverse EI F 56.4 0.243 2
8 Short Time Inverse STI30xDT - 0.05 0 0.04
9 Rectifier Protection RECT - 45900 0 5.6
Although the curves tend to infinity at the setting current value (Is), the guaranteed
minimum operation current is 1.05Is ±0.05Is for all inverse characteristic curves,
except curve 9 for which the minimum operating current is 1.6Is±0.05Is (see
section on rectifier protection).
Note: Definite time characteristic and the start functions operate at Is
±0.05Is.
Curves numbers 1, 2, 4, and 8 become definite time for currents in
excess of 30 x Is. Curve 3 becomes definite time for currents above
10 x Is to give extra time grading steps at high current levels.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 10 of 44
4.4 Reset timer

A delayed reset is provided with the t>/to> time delays and the time set for this
timer determines the duration that the current must remain below the threshold I>/
Io> before the time delay register is reset to zero. There is an exception to this
when the protection trips, because for this condition the time registers t>/to> are
reset immediately. For the majority of applications the reset delay could be set to
zero. For others a more appropriate setting can be used and some examples
applications are given later.
4.5 Matching the reset time response of an electromechanical relay
tReset
Is
Figure 3. Matching electromechanical reset time

The reset characteristic of an electromechanical relay is inverse and the reset timer
can be used to give the relay a reset characteristic which approximates to this as
shown in the diagram.
It should be noted that the tRESET is not affected by the time multiplier setting and
must therefore be set to the required delay.
4.6 Protection against intermittent recurrent faults
This type of fault is also sometimes referred to as a pecking or flashing fault. A
typical example of an intermittent recurrent fault would be one in a plastic
insulated cable where, in the region of the fault, the plastic melts and reseals the
cable, extinguishing the fault but after a short time the insulation breaks down
again. The process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses each of
increasing duration with reducing intervals between, until the fault becomes
permanent.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 11 of 44
2000A
0.2s 3.0s 0.3s 2.0s 0.5s

0A
Trip level
Figure 4. Intermittent recurrent fault

When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is less than the interval between the
fault current pulses, the relay will be continually reset and not be able to integrate
up to the trip level until the fault becomes permanent. Having the reset time set to
give as long a delay as possible, but less than that which would interfere with
normal operation of the protection and control system, will help to eliminate some
less common health and safety problems.
Overcurrent relays in Midos K Range have provision for adjusting the reset delay
to values between 0 and 60 seconds for timers t>/to>. Reset times of 60 seconds
are most suited to cable applications where autoreclose is not generally permitted.
For overhead lines with fast reclosing equipment, it can be an advantage to set the
reset time to zero; this will ensure that all relays will have fully reset before a
reclosure takes place and that some relays will not be held part way towards
operation as a result of the last fault.
When grading with electro-mechanical relays which do not reset instantaneously,
the reset delay can be used to advantage to gain closer discrimination. In these
instances the reset time should be set to a value less than the dead time setting of
any autoreclose relays on the system. Sensitive earth/ground fault relays will also
benefit from having the reset time set as high as possible so that fault current pulses
are summated.
Any reset delay will give an improvement in the detection of intermittent faults.
4.7 Time graded protection
Inverse definite minimum time relays are time graded such that the relay nearer to
the fault operates faster than the relays nearer to the source. This is referred to as
relay co-ordination because if the relay nearest to the fault does not operate, the
next one back towards the source will trip in a slightly longer time. The time
grading steps are typically 400ms, the operation times becoming progressively
longer with each stage.
Where difficulty is experienced in arranging the required time grading steps the
use of a blocked overcurrent scheme should be considered (described in a later
section).
Note: The dynamic range of measurement is typically 820 times minimum
setting.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 12 of 44
4.8 Dual rate inverse time curves
I>(1) I>>
I>(2)
Figure 5. Dual rate curves

The same registers are used for the time delay in both setting group 1 and setting
group 2. They are not reset when switching from one group to the other, unless the
current falls below the threshold, or a blocking input is asserted.
One of the other two time stages I>>, or I>>>, must be set in both setting groups,
to the current level at which the curve is to change. When this current setting is
exceeded, an output relay that is externally connected to energise a logic input will
select the second setting group. I>(2), the current setting in the second setting
group, must be set to less than 95% of the I>>, the current at which the
characteristic is switched, to ensure that the register does not reset.
The same TMS setting is advised for both setting groups, as an instantaneous trip
may occur when switching to a lower TMS setting if the shorter time setting has
already elapsed.
SECTION 5. SECOND/THIRD STAGE

OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT LOGIC
The second and third overcurrent and earth fault stages must be selected by setting
links PF1, PF2, EF1 and EF2 =1 as appropriate for their associated settings to
appear in the menu table. For these elements to operate the Fourier derived value
of current must exceed the set threshold, or the peak value of the current must
exceed twice the set threshold. This latter function ensures faster operation for
currents above twice setting whilst ensuring negligible transient overreach.
The time delays for the second and third stage overcurrent elements can be
blocked by the energisation a logic input. If the time delay has started it will be
reset by the application of the blocking signal. Each phase fault and earth fault
element has its own independent time delay to ensure correct discrimination and
fault indication.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 13 of 44
0A02 BLK to>>

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B04 to>>
EF1 Stage 2
0
1
& to>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Earth fault
Io>>
0A03 BLK to>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B05 to>>> Stage 3
EF2
0
1
& to>>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Earth fault
Io>>>
0A05 BLK t>>

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B0B t>>
PF1 ≥1 Stage 2
0
1
& t>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Overcurrent
I>>
PFC
0
1 &
I<
≥1
0A06 BLK t>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7 OBOC t>>>
PF2 ≥1 Broken conductor
0
1
& t>>> 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Stage 3 Overcurrent
I>>> 2/3
1
Figure 6. Second and third stage overcurrent logic

5.1 Two out of three logic
The t>>> element is provided with a two out of three logic, selected by setting link
PF7=1. When selected, operation only occurs for phase/phase faults and double
phase to earth/ground faults. It will not operate for single phase earth/ground
faults.
5.2 Broken conductor logic
The Broken Conductor Detection feature is associated with t>>> element and is
based on the principle that if a conductor is broken there will be load current in
two phases, but not in all three.
The logic associated that provides this function is shown in Figure 6 above. It is
enabled when links PF2, PFC and PF7 are each set to ‘1’. Link PF2 activates the
third overcurrent stage and when link PF7 is set to ‘1’ an output will be produced if
current is flowing in at least two phases for a time in access of the setting t>>>.
Link PFC enables the undercurrent elements to block the operation of t>>> if current
is flowing in all three phases. Typically settings are, I< = 0.06In: I>>>= 0.08In
for this application to ensure positive discrimination.
An output relay can be allocated in the output mask [0B0C t>>>] for detection of
a broken conductor. To latch the flags relay RLY3 must be assigned in this same
output mask and the flags will indicate the fault with a _ _ * for two of the three
phases and exclude the letters identifying the phases if the current is below the I>
threshold. The broken conductor will be in the phase for which no flags have
operated, because the current is zero.
5.3 Transformer inrush currents
Either I>>/Io>>, or I>>>/Io>>> elements, may be used as high-set instantaneous
elements. The design is such that they do not respond to the DC transient
component of the fault current. The principle of operation allows the current
settings to be set down to 35% of the prospective peak inrush current that will be
taken by a transformer when it is energised. To a first approximation the peak
inrush is given by the reciprocal of the per unit series reactance of the transformer.
Use of the cold load pick up feature, to increase the time setting for the
instantaneous elements when energising the primary circuit, may be considered as
a way of allowing lower current thresholds to be used.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 14 of 44
5.4 Sensitivity to harmonics

The sampling frequency of the digital/analogue converter is synchronised to the
power frequency by a frequency tracking algorithm. This improves both accuracy
of measurement and the harmonic rejection. The tracking follows the analogue
phase inputs with a preference to track the voltage inputs, but in their absence the
current inputs are tracked. When the signal levels are too small to track the
sampling frequency defaults to the set system frequency. It is important that this has
been correctly set in menu cell 0009.
The fundamental component of the residual voltage and current is usually relatively
small and this can result in the harmonic content being predominant. Frequency
tracking does not take place on the residual signals because it can lock-in to a sub-
harmonic of the predominant frequency resulting in a reduced harmonic rejection
level. An example where this would become a problem is when a transformer is
energise and an almost pure second harmonic current can appear in the neutral
circuit. With frequency tracking of this signal the harmonic rejection could fall
significantly. For this application a multiphase relay is best suited as it will give
maximum harmonic rejection whilst tracking the phase quantities.
The I>>/Io>> and the I>>>/Io>>> elements in the KCGG relays respond to the
peak value and the fourier derived values. This allows them to respond more
quickly to an overcurrent condition, but at the same time it reduces the harmonic
rejection. The I>>/Io>> elements are each provided with a software link PF6/EF6
that inhibits the peak measurement when they are set to ‘1’. If the Io>> element is
used for sensitive earth fault applications it is advised that link EF6 is set to ‘1’. The
KCEG directional relays do not respond to the peak values and so for them links
PF6 and EF6 cannot be set.
5.5 Autoreclose inhibition of instantaneous low set
When overcurrent relays from the Midos K Range are used with autoreclose relays
the I>>/Io>> elements may be used as low set instantaneous elements. The
associated time delays t>>/to>> would be set to zero seconds to effect rapid fault
clearance. Although the timer is set to zero, its output still may be blocked via one
of the logic inputs to the relay. Blocking this element instead of the trip path, with a
contact of the autoreclose relay, will ensure correct flagging at all times.
Where lightning strikes are frequent, it can be an advantage to make the I>>/
Io>> setting equal to I>/Io>, in order to detect the maximum number of transient
faults. It will also be advantageous to set SD5 = 1 so that the protection flags
automatically reset after a successful reclose sequence.
5.6 Blocked overcurrent protection
This type of protection is applicable to radial feeder circuits where there is little or
no back feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits, or where there can be a back feed
from generators, directional relays should be considered.
5.6.1 Blocked IDMT overcurrent
This application relies on the up-stream IDMT relay being blocked by the start
output from a down-stream relay that detects the presence of fault current above its
setting. Thus both the up-stream and down-stream relays can then have the same
current and time settings and grading will be automatically provided by the
blocking feature. If the breaker fail protection is selected, the block on the up-
stream relay will be released if the down-stream circuit breaker fails to trip. Thus
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 15 of 44
for a fault below relay C, the start output from relay C will block operation of relay
B and the start output of relay B will block operation of relay A. Hence all three
relays could have the same time and current settings and the grading would be
obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives
a constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event
of the pilots being short circuited.
Note: There is a small window where operation may not occur with this
arrangement. This occurs because the start relay picks-up at the
current setting (I>), but the IDMT curve requires the current to be
1.05I> before it operates. Hence the up-stream relay should have a
slightly lower current setting than the downstream relay to prevent
this situation arising. Alternatively, the up-stream relay may have an
increased current flowing through it due to the load current for other
feeders and this would be a solution.
Figure 7. Blocked IDMT overcurrent

5.6.2 Blocked short time overcurrent
Reduced fault clearance times and increased security can be obtained by using
blocked short time overcurrent protection. For this the I>>/t>> and the Io>>/to>>
elements are used with their current threshold set above the transient load level and
setting t>>/to>> to 80ms for non-directional relays. This time delay is for worst
case conditions and may be reduced, depending on the system X/R and maximum
fault level.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 16 of 44
The time delays t>>/to>> are arranged to be blocked by the start output of the
downstream relay when the downstream relay detects a fault current flowing. The
short time delay is essential to ensure that the blocking signal will be received by
the upstream relay before operation can occur.
The inverse time overload elements should be graded in the normal way for
cascade operation and to provide overload and backup protection. The short time
elements, operating in the blocking mode, then provide an instantaneous zone of
protection and again the breaker fail feature can be used to advantage. On
detection of a breaker failure condition the start output would be reset to remove
the block from the upstream relay and allowing the upstream relay to trip its
breaker to clear the fault.
Overcurrent relays are adequate for non-cascade operation on radial circuits, but
for ring circuits, or where there are parallel feeds, it will be necessary to use
directionalised overcurrent relays.
5.7 Protection of busbars on radial system
This is simply achieved on radial circuits by setting for the short time lags (t>>/
to>>) of the relay on the incoming feeder 80ms for non-directional relays, and
blocking these time delays when the start output of any relay on the load circuits
detects fault current flowing from the busbar to a feeder. The 80ms time delay is
for worst case conditions and may be reduced, depending on the system X/R and
maximum fault level. Feedback from regenerative loads must be less than the relay
setting.
The protection can be enhanced by arranging for the internal breaker fail circuits
of the feeder relays to backtrip the incoming circuit breaker and/or adding the
back-up transfer tripping arrangement. The use of a dual powered relay on the
incoming feeder can also be considered to provide dead substation protection.
These topics are described more fully in other sections.
Incomer
KCEG Block short time overcurrent

242
Back trip
F1
KCGG KCGG KCGG KCGG

142 142 142 142
F2 F3 F4 F5
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder 4
Figure 8. Blocked overcurrent for busbar protection

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 17 of 44
5.8 Points to consider with blocking schemes

It is possible to separate the phase and earth fault start outputs and use them to
block the respective elements of the upstream relay. However, if this is done then
the effect of current transformer saturation during phase faults has to be
considered. If the current transformers transiently saturate on one of the circuits
then a spill current is produced in the neutral circuit of the current transformers. This
can result in one of two effects:
- The current exceeds the threshold of the earth/ground fault element then it
will attempt to trip if it does not receive a blocking signal from a down stream
relay. This will be an incorrect operation that may trip more circuits than
necessary.
- As a result of spill current, an earth/ground fault element gives a blocking
signal to the relay on the in-feed for a short duration.
The first of these problems can be lessened by increasing the time setting of to>>,
but this will reduce the benefits of blocked overcurrent schemes. The solution to
consider is to block the phase and earth fault trip elements with the phase and
earth fault start elements of the downstream relays, but prevent blocking of the
phase fault trip elements under transient current transformer saturation conditions.
This will be most easily achieved by setting the earth fault element polarising
voltage threshold (Vop) above the maximum expected zero sequence voltage
occurring under healthy conditions, thus preventing the earth fault elements on the
incoming feeder relay producing a blocking signal under transient CT saturation
conditions.
The second effect may not be a problem at all if the transient spill current only lasts
a short time, as the added delay caused by a spurious blocking signal will stabilise
the protection for only a short time. If this is seen as a problem then the use of a
stabilising resistor could be considered.
+ Watchdog Trip -
repeat relay relays
t>> t>> set to 60ms

Incomer
t>>> t>>> set to 260ms
Incomer
Feeder
1
Feeder
2
Feeder
3
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

Watchdog Watchdog 4 1 2 3 4
Contacts. Contacts.
Figure 9. Back-up transfer trip scheme

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 18 of 44
5.9 Back-up transfer tripping scheme

In this application a trip from the relay on the incoming feeder can be diverted via
the watchdog contacts of a failed relay to the circuit breaker on that feeder. Thus a
fault on an outgoing feeder can be cleared by tripping the feeder circuit breaker
even though the relay on that circuit has failed. Without this feature the fault would
only have been cleared by tripping the circuit breaker on the incoming feeder and
thus losing the total busbar load.
Consider the radial feed arrangement shown in the diagram. The protection relay
on the incomer provides two additional time delayed outputs: t>> with an 80ms
delay if the downstream feeder relays are non-directional, or 200ms if they are
directional, and t>>> with a delay of t>> plus grading margin. The t>> delay is for
worst case conditions and may be reduced, depending on the system X/R and
maximum fault level. The t>> output contact is wired through a normally open
contact on the watchdog repeat relay, to the trip relay for the circuit breaker on the
in-feed. The t>>> output is wired directly to the trip relay for the circuit breaker on
the in-feed.
With all the relays in a healthy state, the watchdog repeat relay will be energised
and for a busbar fault the circuit breaker on the incoming circuit will be tripped by
t>>. For a fault on any of the outgoing feeders t>> and t>>> of the relay on the
incoming circuit will be blocked by the start contact of the overcurrent relay on the
outgoing feeder which is carrying the fault current. The circuit carrying the fault
current will be tripped by the overcurrent relay on that circuit.
In the event of any relay on the outgoing circuits becoming defective, the
watchdog repeat relay drops off to give an alarm and to transfer the t>> trip from
the incoming circuit breaker to the buswire connected, via the watchdog break
contact of each relay on the outgoing feeders, to the appropriate circuit breaker.
Thus the trip will be transferred to the circuit breaker with the failed relay and so a
fault on that circuit will be cleared without tripping the busbar. For a busbar fault
the incoming circuit breaker will be tripped by t>>> after a short delay. For faults
on any healthy outgoing feeder both t>> and t>>> of the incoming feeder will be
blocked and correct discrimination will be obtained with only the faulted feeder
being tripped.
5.10 Restricted earth fault protection
Where back up overcurrent or differential protection does not provide adequate
earth fault coverage of the secondary and/or primary winding of a transformer,
restricted earth fault protection is often applied.
Restricted earth fault protection can be provided by a dedicated electro-
mechanical (MCAG14 or MFAC14), static (MCTI14), or via the Io>> element of
the K Range.
The procedure for setting a K Range relay for REF applications is similar to the
traditional high impedance calculations required for the electro-mechanical
equivalents, namely:
5.10.1 Setting voltage for stability:
VS = k.IF(RCT + 2RL + RB)
where: k = A constant for through fault stability
IF = Maximum prospective secondary fault current
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 19 of 44
RL = Resistance per lead from CT

RB = Other series connected burdens on the CT
The stability of a differential relay varies inversely with its speed of operation. Thus
the value for (k) in the above expression is dependent upon the operation time of
the relay. The faster the relay operates the higher the value of k required. For this
application the Io>> element shall be set to respond only to the Fourier derived
component of the fault current by setting link EF6=0. The relay will then have
maximum harmonic rejection and the operation time for the relay alone will be in
the order of 40 to 50 ms. For this operating speed a k factor of 0.6 can be used
for general application.
The required setting voltage for the restricted earth fault protection can then be
calculated from the above expression. To maintain the speed of operation the knee
point voltage of the current transformers (VK) should be at least 4 times the setting
voltage . If the ratio VK/VS is less than 4 then the operating time of the relay will
increase and a reduced value for k may be used as shown in the following table:
Ratio VK/VS 1 2 3 4 5 10
Operation t 80ms 70ms 60ms 50ms 40ms 40ms
Factor k 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6
5.10.2 RS, stabilising resistor

The value of stablising resistor (RS) required to raise the voltage setting VS of the
relay to calculated value is given by:
RS = VS/IS where IS is the current setting of the relay (Io>>).
5.10.3 IS, current setting
The selection of the current setting should be made taking the earthing
arrangements, allowable phase unbalance, CT magnetising current and maximum
earth fault current into consideration. Once these figures are known, the following
calculation can be made.
IS = (Ip/CT Ratio) - nIe
where:
IS = Current setting applied to relay (Io>>)
Ip = Minimum primary operating current
n = Number of CTs in parallel
Ie = CT exciting current at VS volts
5.10.4 Metrosil assessment
If a very low setting (Io>>) is applied a correspondingly high value will be
required for the stabilising resistor. This will enable a larger percentage of the
transformer winding to be protected but the increased impedance of the differential
circuit may result in high voltages being developed across it during internal faults.
If the peak voltage exceeds 3kV then it is advisable to connect a non linear
resistor, such as a Metrosil, across the differential circuit to limit the voltage
developed.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 20 of 44
The peak voltage developed across the differential circuit during an internal fault,
is given by:
Vpeak = √2.IFRS = √2.IFVS/IS volts of a high impedance relay,
and:
Vpeak = 2 √[2Vk(VF - VK)] volts for a medium impedance relay
A high impedance relay would have a current setting in the range 0.005In to
0.05In and a medium impedance relay would have a current setting between
0.1In to 1.0In.
The Metrosil should have a C value of 450 for differential voltage settings 0 to
125V and a C value of 900 for settings 125V to 350V.
Application of Midos K-series relays for restricted earth fault protection is further
described in publication R4120.
5.11 Rectifier protection
A
+
B
C
-
A B C N
Transformer Rectifier
Rs
Protection
Figure 10. Protection for silicon rectifiers
10000
Typical thermal limit

1000 for silicon rectifier
Protection curve
Time (seconds)
100 Instantaneous
overcurrent
10
Typical
1 load area
0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Multiple of rated current
Figure 11. Matching curve to load and thermal limit of rectifier

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 21 of 44
The rectifier protection feature has been based upon the inverse time/current
characteristic as used in the MCTD 01 and the above diagram shows a typical
application.
The protection of a rectifier differs from the more traditional overcurrent
applications in that many rectifiers can withstand relatively long overload periods
without damage, typically 150% for 2 hours and 300% for 1 min.
The relay I> setting of the relay should be set to the rated rms value of the current
that flows into the transformer when the rectifier is delivering its rated load. The
relay will give a start indication when the current exceeds this setting but this is of
no consequence because this function is not used in this application. Curve 9
should be selected for the inverse time curve and this cuts-off for currents below
1.6 times allowing the rectifier to carry 150% overload for long periods. If this is
not acceptable the I> setting can be adjusted to move the cut-off point relative to
the current scale. The operation time can be modified by adjustment of the time
multiplier setting (TMS) so that it lies between limiting characteristic of the rectifier
and the allowable load area.
Typical settings for the TMS are:
Light industrial service TMS = 0.025
Medium duty service TMS = 0.1
Heavy duty traction TMS = 0.8
The high set is typically set at 8 times rated current as this ensures HV AC
protection will discriminate with faults covered by the LV protection. However, it
has been known for the high set to be set to 4, or 5, times where there is more
confidence in the AC protection.
Use of the thermal element to provide protection between 70% and 160% of rated
current could enhance the protection. It is also common practice to provide
restricted earth fault protection for the transformer feeding the rectifier. See the
appropriate section dealing with restricted earth fault protection.
5.12 Cold load pick-up
The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) feature enables the settings of the relay to be changed
to cater for temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts, such
as switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or any load
that takes a high initial starting current.
Initiation of CLP is usually by an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker that is
closed when the circuit breaker is in the open state. This would be used to energise
a logic input that would be allocated in mask [0A0C Aux3]. If a logic input is
already available to indicate the circuit breaker open status, it can be allocated in
more than one mask; it would not be necessary to use an additional logic input.
For short duration starting loads it may only be necessary to delay the short time
protection functions. Allocating a relay in output mask [0B12 Aux3] and
energising a logic input via its contacts. The logic input can then be allocated in
the appropriate input masks to block the short time overcurrent elements.
Alternatively setting link LOGB = 1 gives timer tAUX3 a delay on drop-off, when it
can be used to select group 2 settings. Then, with the appropriate preset settings
applied, the protection levels can be raised above starting currents and held there
for the time set on tAUX3, after which they return to their normal values. To select
this mode of operation set link [LOG5] = 1 and [SD4]=1. Group 2 settings will be
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 22 of 44
in operation when tAUX3 is energised, that is before the load comes on and for
the set time for tAUX3 after the circuit breaker closes. See also the section entitled
“SETTING GROUPS” which explains the alternative methods by which group 2
settings can be selected.
This latter arrangement is useful when there are no spare output relays and can be
used as an alternative means of blocking the short time elements without using
external connections. To achieve it, the elements that are set to a short time must be
deselected in the group 2 settings, or preferably given a higher setting. This is
possible for elements t>>; t>>>; to>> and to>>>.
If delayed initiation is required, allocate the logic input in mask [0A0B Aux2]
instead of [0A0C Aux3]; set link [LOG6] =1 and set the required delay on tAUX2.
For retrofit installations where an auxiliary circuit breaker contact is not available,
undercurrent initiation via tAUX2 may be used. It is possible to set tAUX2 to zero if
no initial delay is necessary.
The above change of setting group can also be enabled if a 52B contact is not
available, or during instances when the operation of upstream circuit breakers will
cut the supply without opening the down-stream circuit breakers. This is achieved
by using the loss of load feature associated with tAUX2 and by setting [LOG6] =1.
The time delay of the tAUX2 when used in this configuration must be set longer
than the total fault clearance time of the system.
Note: It will be essential to check for correct resetting of any function that is
deselected when switching to group 2 settings.
Time
Stall (CLP)
Overlo
ad (CL
P)
t>
Stall
t>>
Over
load
Short circuit
t>>>
I> I>> I>>> Current
Figure 12. Compensation for motor starting current

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 23 of 44
SECTION 6. DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Zone of
forward start
forward operation
Is
Øc–90 Øc Øc+90
–Is
Reverse start
–I
Figure 13. Directional characteristic

Phase fault directional elements are polarised by the quadrature phase/phase
voltage, and the earth/ground fault elements are polarised by the zero sequence
voltage. The directional part of the measurement includes a threshold value on the
polarising quantity, and for phase fault measurement this threshold is fixed.
However for earth/ground faults an adjustable threshold is provided to allow a
setting above any imbalance in the zero sequence polarising signal to be applied.
Control is provided for adjustment of the characteristic angle of the relay.
The directional decision is applied after the current threshold and before the
following associated time delay. The directionalisation of any element can be
selectively overridden by adjusting software links in the relay menu to a suitable
setting. The undercurrent element I< is the exception since this element is not
provided with directional control.
6.1 Directional overcurrent logic
The directional overcurrent logic provides directional control for the overcurrent
elements in the forward direction and start indication in both the forward and
reverse direction. The forward direction will usually be for current flowing from the
busbar to the feeder.
6.2 Directional start output
When the current threshold I> is exceeded and the polarising signal is above the
threshold Vp>, an output is directed to the [0B06 I> Fwd] mask for forward current
flow and to the [0B07 I> Rev] for reverse current flow. A non-directional start can
be obtained by allocating the same output relay in both start masks so that it
operates for forward or reverse current flow.
If all three elements are selected to be non directional (links PF3, PF4 and PF5 set
to ‘0’) then the forward start will become a non-directional start, but the reverse
start will retain its directionality (on the series 1 relays, KCEG110/130/140/150,
the reverse start was inhibited when all three elements were selected to be non
directional).
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 24 of 44
+ 0A01 BLK to> -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B03 to>
& to> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Io> EF3
0 EF4 EF5 0B01 Io> FWD START
0 0
1 1 1 & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FWD
0B02 Io> REV START
REV
0A02 BLK to>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B04 to>>
EF1
0
1
EF4
0
& to> > 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Io>>
1
FWD
0A03 BLK to>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B05 to>>>
EF2
0
1
EF5
0
& to> >> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Io>>>
1
FWD
0B08 tA>
0A04 BLK t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B09 tB>
& t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B0A tC>
I>
PF3 PF4 PF5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0B06 I> FWD START
1 1 1
≥1
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FWD
≥1 0B07 I> REV START
0A05 BLK t>> REV
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B0B t>>
PF1 ≥1
0
1
PF4
& t>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I>> 0
FWD 1
PFC
0
1 &
I<
≥1
0A06 BLK t>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7 0B0C t>>>
PF2 ≥1
0
1
PF5
& t>>> 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I>>> 0 2/3
1
FWD 1
Block start from breaker fail protection
Figure 14. Directional overcurrent relay logic

6.3 Directional first stage overcurrent
If link PF3=0 the time delay t> will start timing when the current exceeds the I>
setting to give a non-directional trip via the appropriate relay mask [0B08 tA>],
[0B09 tB>], or [0B0A tc>]. With link PF3 set to “1” the time delay will only run if
the current exceeds the I> threshold and is in the forward direction. External
control is asserted via input mask [0A04 Blk t>] and when this input is energised
the time delay is reset to zero after the reset delay (tRESET).
6.4 Directional second and third overcurrent stages
Elements I>>/t>> and I>>>/t>>> can also be selectively directional, or non-
directional. To directionalise them links PF4 and PF5 respectively, should be set to
‘1’. If these links are set to ‘0’ then the elements will be non-directional. The delay
has a definite time characteristic for these elements, which can be blocked via the
appropriate input mask [0A05 Blk I>>] and [0A06 Blk I>>>]. There are no start
functions associated with these two elements.
6.5 Directional earth fault logic
The logic for the earth fault element is similar to that described for phase faults. An
independent set of software links, input masks and relay masks are provided to
give optimum flexibility to the user.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 25 of 44
6.6 Application of directional phase fault relays

It is normal practice to set the characteristic angle of the relay (fc) to the angle
between the prospective fault current and the polarising voltage. A fault will then
lie at the centre of the directional characteristic. For a three phase fault the fault
current will normally lag the phase voltage by an angle of 45° to 60°. However
the polarising voltage is the quadrature line voltage, which lags the phase voltage
by 90°. Thus if the fault current lags the phase voltage by an angle (-φ), the angle
difference with respect to the polarising voltage will be (90° - φ). Thus
characteristic angle setting for the relay will be the phase angle of the fault current
with respect to the polarising voltage. Thus φc = (90° - φ) and so for a fault angle
of -60° the setting for fc will be +30°.
K Range series 2 relays have the range for the characteristic angle setting
increased to ±180°, so that it is possible to reverse the direction of operation. For
the above example the characteristic angle setting is +30° for operation when
current flows from the busbar to the feeder, so for operation when current flows
from the feeder to the busbar the characteristic angle must be shifted by 180°.
Thus for operation in the reverse direction φc = -(90 + φ) = -150°.
The minimum operating value of the voltage input to the directional overcurrent
relay should be as low as practicable from the aspect of correct directional
response of the relay itself. This follows because of the important requirement for
the relay to achieve correct directional response during a short circuit fault close to
the relay when the voltage input can be below 1% of rated value. Furthermore,
there is no restriction on the minimum operating value from the aspect of the power
system or voltage transformer performance. Hence the threshold for the phase fault
elements of the KCEG relays has been set at 0.5V.
6.7 Synchronous polarisation
The phase directional elements are polarised by the quadrature line voltage,
referred to a cross polarisation, they will always have a polarising signal for close-
up phase to phase faults. However, for close-up three phase faults the polarising
voltage may be lost completely and synchronous polarising is then used.
The phase angle of the line voltages with respect to the sampling frequency is
measured for each cycle and the last value measured is stored in memory. When
the polarising signal is lost the last stored phase reference for the voltage is used
for the directional decision. The phase angle of the current relative to the sampling
frequency is measured and from this is subtracted the stored phase angle of the
polarising voltage to give the phase angle of the current with respect to the
polarising voltage and this is compared with the set operational angle limits for
operation. Because the relay tracks the frequency the stored phase reference for
the voltage holds good even though the frequency may drift during the fault and
hence the term synchronous polarisation.
The duration of the synchronous polarisation is 320ms, but an option is now
provided to extend this to 3.2s to allow operation of the IDMT element. The
duration is selected with link [PFB]. For PFB=0 duration is 320ms and for PFB=1
duration it is increased to 3.2s. The longer duration will be useful when fault
current is limited and the operation time of the relay is expected to be relatively
slow for close-up faults.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 26 of 44
6.8 Application of directional earth fault relays

The earth fault elements use the zero sequence voltage as the polarising quantity.
With the KCGG142/242 relays this voltage is internally derived from the three
phase/neutral voltages applied to the relay. With the KCEG112/150 (and the
KCEU142/242 relays, when available) this voltage has to be externally derived
from an open delta winding on the line voltage transformers, or via star/open
delta interposing voltage transformers.
The characteristic angle will be directly as marked for earth faults and lagging
angles of between 0° to -60° may be used as appropriate, dependent on the
system earthing arrangements.
When providing sensitive earth fault protection for an insulated system a core
balance transformer is recommended. Where this is oriented as for an earthed
system ie. with the relay looking down the feeder, the relay characteristic angle
should be set to +90°. If the current transformer is reversed , anticipating
capacitive current flow from the feeder onto the busbar, -90° should be used.
Where a directional relay is used to prevent sympathetic tripping of the earth fault
overcurrent element, which would otherwise result from the currents flowing via the
cable capacitance to earth, an angle setting of +45°(lead) is recommended.
For earth faults the minimum operating value of the residual voltage input to the
directional earth fault relay is determined by power system imbalance and voltage
transformer errors. The zero sequence voltage on a healthy distribution system can
be as high as 1.0%, also the voltage transformer error can be 1.0% per phase
which results in a possible spurious residual voltage as high as 2.0% under healthy
conditions. In order to take account of both of the foregoing quantities and thus
eliminate unwanted relay operation it is necessary to introduce a minimum
operating value of up to 3.5%. In practice, a choice of settings of say 2.0% to
4.0% should be considered, with perhaps 10% and 20% for high resistance and
insulated neutral systems respectively. The setting for Vop> will be found in the
EARTH FAULT setting column of the menu and should be set appropriately, taking
the above notes into account.
Note: The KCEG 140 required a residual voltage in excess of 6.4V before
the voltage threshold circuit would function, regardless of the Vop>
setting. With the KCEG142/242 the sensitivity of this circuit has
been improved to less than 1V.
For protection of arc suppression (Petersen) coil earthed systems, a sensitive current
setting is required to enable accurate detection of the relatively small currents
flowing under fault conditions. Angle in the region of +5°(lead), 0°, –5°(lag) are
common, with the relays having suitably fine setting adjustment of 1°.
6.9 Power directional earth fault element
An alternative option for arc suppression (Petersen) coil earthed systems is
provided by the KCEU142/242 relays (when available). These relays operate
when the power measured in the residual circuit exceeds the power setting (Po>).
Power is measured in watts and is equal to VIcosφ.
Thus for operation the residual current must exceed Po> before it can operate.
Vo cosφ
The residual current required to operate the relay is high when there is little
residual voltage. By virtue of this feature the relay effectively ignores any residual
spill current, resulting from mismatch of the line CTs, due to the fact that there is
negligible zero sequence voltage present under load conditions.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 27 of 44
The power characteristic is relative to the set characteristic angle (φc), which will
typically be set to 0°. To reverse the direction of operation the characteristic angle
is changed by ±180°.
Note: If the power setting Po> = 0, then the normal directional
characteristic will be operative instead of the power characteristic.
6.10 Directional stability for instantaneous elements
Directional relays are required to withstand a fault in the reverse direction without
operating. In addition they are required to remain stable (ie. not operate) when the
reverse fault current is removed and the current falls to zero, or to a level that is
below the current setting of the relay and in a forward direction. With time
delayed protection, directional stability is not usually a problem, but with
directionalised instantaneous overcurrent relays it is much more difficult to achieve
and momentary operation may occur when the fault is removed.
The software of the K Range relays has been arranged to reduce transient
operation to a minimum, but even so it is advisable to set the associated time delay
for any directional overcurrent element to between 40ms and 200ms, depending
on the system X/R ratio and the maximum fault level, to ensure stability under this
condition.
6.11 Protection of circuits with multiple in-feeds
For the blocked overcurrent protection to be applied to a feeder that can be fed
from either end, or a busbar with multiple in-feeds, a directional feature must
incorporated. The START elements of any relay that detects current flowing from the
protected zone must block the operation of any relays that detect current flowing
into the protected zone. The directional feature is used to establish if the current is
flowing into, or out of, the protected zone. The principle can be applied to the
protection of busbars, parallel feeders, as shown in the following example, and it
is also suited to ring circuits to simplify grading problems.
The following diagram shows a busbar with several feeders connected to it and
divided by a bus section circuit breaker. The dotted lines indicate the zones of
protection that can be formed using short time overcurrent protection arranged in a
blocked overcurrent scheme. The basic IDMT protection is still applied in the
traditional fashion, but is now augmented by the additional overcurrent elements
within the feeder protection arranged to provide unit protection for both their
associated feeder the bus section to which the feeder is connected.
Incomer Incomer
KCEG KCEG KCEG

142 142 142
KCEG KCEG KCEG KCEG

142 142 142 142
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder 4
Figure 15. Circuit with multiple infeeds

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 28 of 44
6.11.1 Blocked directional overcurrent protection

Because the busbar is divided by a circuit breaker an extra directional overcurrent
relay is required to divide the protection into a separate zone for the bus sections.
The standard connections used for the relays connected to each feeder is such that
the forward start relays operate for fault current flowing from the busbar to the
feeder and the reverse start for fault current flowing towards the busbar. For the
bus section relay the forward start operates for current flowing from the left hand
to the right hand bus section.
6.11.2 Blocked overcurrent protection for the feeder
If the I>>/Io>> elements are set just above any transient loads on a feeder that
can be sourced from either end, they can be prevented from overreaching and
operating for faults beyond the next busbar by applying the blocked overcurrent
principle. Set links PF4=1 and EF4=1 for these elements to be directionalised, so
that they will not operate for faults on the busbar behind them. To prevent them
overreaching the remote busbar the reverse start contact of the relay at the other
end of the line is arranged to block the t>>/to>> time delays via a logic input.
For a fault on the feeder current will only be seen to flow in the forward direction,
into the feeder, and so the protection will operate. This arrangement is also tolerant
to high transient loads, so allowing the short time elements to be set closer to the
load current.
6.11.3 Blocked overcurrent protection for the bus section
Thus the circuits connected to the left hand bus section are the incomer, feeders 1
& 2 and the bus section. Either the I>> or the I>>> elements of each relay may be
used to form the blocked overcurrent protection, but for this example application
we will use I>>> elements. The I>>>/Io>>> elements shall be set non-directional
by setting function links PF5=0 and EF5=0, allowing these elements to operate for
faults either on the busbar or for faults on their feeder/other bus section.
The forward start contacts of each relay are connected in parallel across a pair of
buswires and arranged to block the operation of both the t>>>/to>>> time delays
when current flows from the busbar into any of these paths. Thus if fault current
flows away from the busbar the overcurrent protection is blocked and if current
flows towards the busbar and does not flow away down any other legitimate
circuit the busbar overcurrent protection operates to clears the fault.
Application of Midos K-series relays for single and double busbar protection is
further described in publications R4112 and R4114.
Note: The response of directional overcurrent relays to power system
disturbances will vary with the earthing arrangements. It is not
practical to consider all configurations of the power system and so
the application notes in this document can only be a general guide.
Each application will need to be engineered to suit the system.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 29 of 44
SECTION 7. THERMAL OVERCURRENT
The thermal overload protection shares the time constant setting with the thermal
ammeters and thus a compromise will be necessary if they are to be used at the
same time. It is recommended that the time constant is chosen to suit the protection
in such instances. The settings for the time constant (TC), the continuous thermal
current rating (Ith>) and the thermal alarm (th>) will be found in the menu columns
containing the phase fault settings.
The time constant can be set between 1 minute and 120 minutes in 1 minute steps
and the thermal current setting (Ith>) can be adjusted between 0.08In and 3.2In.
The thermal protection responds to I2 and will operate faster as the current
increases, but for currents in access of 5.3 times rated current the operation time
will remain the same as that for 5.3 times rated current. This will not be a problem
in practice because the normal IDMT, or definite time, protection will normally
have taken over at a lower level of current.
0 0B17 th ALARM
1 P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF0 Alarm 0B18 th TRIP
P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Trip
0A11 RESET Ith
Thermal
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 reset
Figure 15. Thermal alarm and trip logic

7.1 Thermal state
In simplified terms the thermal state is a percentage thermal current limit that has
been attained by the thermal replica. The thermal state will be found under
MEASURE 3 in cell 0407 and can be displayed on the front of the relay by
viewing this cell or selecting it from the default display.
The thermal state = I2[1-e-t/T]/[Ith>]2 x 100 = %Ith>
Final value of thermal state = [highest thermal ammeter reading]2 x100%
[continuous thermal current limit]2
The thermal state will tend to 100% when the highest of the three thermal ammeters
is displaying a current equal to the set thermal current limit (Ith>).
The time to reach 100% will depend upon:
Applied current
Prefault load current
Thermal time constant
Continuous thermal rating
7.2 Thermal trip and alarm levels
A thermal trip will be given via the output mask [0B18 th Trip] when the thermal
state reaches 110%. This is equivalent to the current being in excess of 1.05Ith>. It
should be noted that the thermal trip will remain asserted until the replica cools
and the thermal state falls below the trip level.
In addition an alarm setting can be set for a thermal state between 0% and 110%.
When this threshold is exceeded an output can be obtained via the alarm output
mask [0B17 th Alarm].
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 30 of 44
7.3 Operation time

The operation time characteristic is given by he following expression:
2
Ix - P
t = T.LOGe
2
Ix - 1
where
t = time in minutes
T = selected time contstant
Ix = current in multiples (Ith>)
P = (per untit of prefault load)2
P = (IL/Ith>)2
The characteristic curves will be found in the appendix to this document where the
times are shown as a multiple of the selected time constant for various levels of
prefault load.
7.4 Thermal memory
When the auxiliary energising supply is lost the thermal state is stored in non
volatile memory. On restoration of the supply the thermal state is restored.
However, if the stored value of the thermal state is in excess of 90%, the restored
thermal state will be set to 90%.
7.5 Thermal reset
The thermal state can be reset to zero after the password has been entered by
performing a reset function on cell [0407 Thermal] under MEASURE 3. This can be
achieved via the user interface of the relayby pressing the reset key [0] for one
second whilst this cell is displayed, or by a 'reset cell' command via the serial port.
However, this cell is protected and the password must be entered before it can be
reset.
Alternatively, the thermal state can be reset by energising a logic input that has
been allocated in the input mask [0A11 RESET th]. All input masks are password
protected against change, but once a logic input has been assigned to this function
it is not necessary to enter the password again before the reset function can
respond to this input being energised.
Note: The thermal state cannot be reset whilst viewing cell 0407 from the
default display.
If the thermal state is greater than 90% it will be reset to 90% after a
break in the auxiliary supply.
If link PF0 = 0 in either setting group, then the thermal state will not
reset to zero when that group is selected. If the thermal protection is
not to be used the thermal state should be manually reset to zero to
clear the memorised state.
7.6 Dual time constant characteristics
It is possible to set different time constants in setting group 1 and 2 and so
produce dual characteristics with dual time constants in a similar way to the
composite curves described in Section 4.8. For such an application the setting
group will be arranged to change in response to the current exceeding one of the
current thresholds I>> or I>>>.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 31 of 44
7.7 Application of thermal protection

The thermal protection characteristic can be used to protect electrical equipment in
such a way that the full thermal capacity is utilised with due regard to the thermal
inertia, but in a manner that prevents unacceptable temperatures from being
attained. It can be applied to standard high voltage cables with natural cooling
and to dry type power transformers.
The setting (Ith>) should be set to the maximum continuously rated current for the
protected item of plant. If the current transformer (CT) ratio has been entered then
this will be in primary quantities, but if the CT ratio has been set to 1:1 then the
continuous rated current entered should be that referred to the secondary winding
of the CT.
The appropriate thermal time constant (T) must be entered and the following table
gives some suggested values for typical cables. The curves for the thermal
characteristic are to be found in the appendix to this document and it will be seen
that they take due account of the pre-load current.
The typical values of time constants in the following table are paper insulated lead
sheathed cables, or polyethylene insulated cables laid above ground or in
conduits.
Conductor Rated voltage of cable
cross 6 to 11kV 22kV 33kV 66kV
section (mm)2 T minutes T minutes T minutes T minutes
25 10 15 - -
35 10 15 - -
50 10 15-25 40 -
70 15 25 40 -
95 15 25 40 60
120 20 25 40 60
150 25 40 50 60
185 25 40 60 60
240 40 40 60 75
300 40 60 60 90
Typical time constant values for cables

Other protectable items T minutes
Dry-type transformers 40
Air-cored reactors 40
Capacitor banks 10
Overhead lines from 100mm2 Cu or 150mm2 Al 10
Busbars 60
Typical time constants for other protected plant items

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 32 of 44
SECTION 8. UNDERCURRENT
These elements provide a quick response to an undercurrent condition when they

are used to terminate the breaker fail timer sequence and close the fault records
etc. To achieve this the peak value of each both half cycles of current are
compared with the current setting threshold I<. An undercurrent indication is
indicated given when the peak value of either the positive, or negative, half cycle
is below the I< threshold giving a theoretical detection time of half a cycle. A
logical OR function is performed on the outputs of the three phase fault
undercurrent elements to produce an output when an undercurrent condition is
detected in all three phases. Similarly the peak value of the residual current is
compared with the earth fault undercurrent threshold Io< to produce a separate
output.
The undercurrent elements are also be used to provide some additional functions in
conjunction with the auxiliary timers, but it should be remembered that they are
responsive to peak measurement and will be more responsive to the harmonic
content of the waveform.
8.1 Breaker failure protection
Reset start relays
LOG2
1
0A09 EXT. TRIP 0 0B0F CB FAIL
I< ≥1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Io<
tBF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RLY3
Figure 17. Circuit breaker fail logic

The breaker fail timer (tBF) will start to time if relay RLY3 operates and at least one
of the undercurrent elements is detecting current flowing in the circuit. The breaker
fail timer can also be initiated in response to a logic input being energised if that
logic input is allocated in the input mask [0A09 EXT TRIP]. If tBF times out before
the undercurrent element, relay RLY3, and the external trip reset, then the output
mask [0B0F BF] will be energised and any output relay assigned in this mask will
pick-up. If this relay picks-up the circuit breaker is assumed to have failed to clear
the fault and this output relay can be then used to back trip the next circuit breaker,
nearer the source, to clear the fault.
If a blocked overcurrent scheme is in use, logic link LOG2 can be set to ‘1’. This
will cause the start relays to reset releasing the block on the upsteram relay to
allow it to trip directly and clear the fault.
The time delay (tBF) will typically have a setting in the range of 200 to 400ms.
The exact time will depend on the sum of the delays in the tripping path including
the operation time of the circuit breaker.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 33 of 44
SECTION 9. UNDERVOLTAGE
The undervoltage elements can be selected to respond to changes in line voltage

by setting link PFA=0, or to the phase voltage by setting link PFA=1. The following
time delay tV< can be selected to time when ALL three phase elements indicate an
undervoltage condition by setting link PF9=0. Alternatively the delay can be
selected to start in response to any one, or more, elements indicating an
undervoltage condition by setting link PF9=1. One, or more, output relays can be
assigned in mask [0B13 tV<] to pick-up when the undervoltage condition has been
present for longer than the set time tV<.
PF8 PF9 0B13 tV<

V<
0
1
& 0
1
tV< 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
≥1
0A0E CB CLOSED IND
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Figure 18. Undervoltage logic

The undervoltage function can be selectively blocked when the circuit breaker is
open if link PF8=1. A logic input should be energised via an auxiliary contact of
the circuit breaker that will be closed when the circuit breaker is closed. This logic
input will indicate when the circuit breaker is closed and must then be assigned in
the input mask [0A0E CB CLOSED]. If the undervoltage element is to be
operational when the circuit breaker is open then set link PF8=0, then assigning a
logic input in mask [0A0E CB CLOSED] is not essential to the operation of the
undervoltage function.
9.1 Undervoltage trip
An undervoltage trip is often used to isolate the supplies to machinary when the
source of electrical supply is lost. This is a safety feature that prevents equipment
starting-up unexpectedly when the supplies are eventually restored.
The undervoltage elements can arranged to trip the circuit breaker when all three
phase voltages have been lost and for this application it does not matter if the
phase, or the line, voltages are used. It is advisable to block the undervoltage trip
function when the circuit breaker is open, otherwise the trip command will be
maintained and reclosing of the circuit breaker may be prevented.
Set links as follows: PF8 = 1; PF9 = 0, or 1; PFA = 0.
An appropriate delay may be applied to tV< to prevent tripping on voltage dips.
Assign relay RLY3 in output mask [0B17 tV<].
Assign a logic input, to indicate CB closed, in input mask [0A0E CB CLOSED].
These settings will be applicable to trigger the disturbance recorder for an
undervoltage condition, but it would be advisable to assign an alternative relay to
RLY3, because this relay is assigned functions that cause the fault flags to be
latched.
9.2 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
Applications where the fault current may be less than the nominal full load, eg.
generation current decrement, or remote back-up protection of long feeders, will
benefit from the application of voltage controlled overcurrent protection.
Discrimination between low load current and a low fault current is achieved by
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 34 of 44
detecting the reduction in the line voltage, at the relaying point, that is present
during a fault and not during normal load conditions. For this application the
following settings should be applied to the relay:
Set links as follows: PF8 = 1; PF9 = 1, or 1; PFA = 0 (the line voltage is used to
prevent operation during earth fault).
Assign a logic input, to indicate CB closed, in input mask [0A0E CB CLOSED].
Assign any relay, but not RLY3, in output mask [0B17 tV<] and externally wire this
contact to energise an unused logic input and then assign this input in mask [0A0D
SEL GRP2]. This will select the group 2 settings when an undervoltage condition
occurs.
Apply normal settings for phase faults in group 1and the appropriate lower phase
fault settings in group 2.
SECTION 10. UNDER FREQUENCY
The under frequency threshold (F<) is used in conjunction with an auxiliary timer to
provide a load shedding function. Setting link PFD = 1 will enable the under
frequency element to initiate tAUX1 when the frequency falls below the setting F<
provided a logic input is assigned in the input mask [0A0A AUX1] is energised, to
give a time delayed output via any relay assigned in the output mask [0B10
AUX1]. This will usually be relay RLY3, the main trip relay. This feature enables the
load shedding to be graded by both frequency and time.
The frequency measurement will default to the set rated frequency when the signals
are too small to measure and provided the under frequency setting is lower than
this no output should occur. However, it is known that when a circuit breaker is
opened there may be small signals present due to mutual coupling, or ringing
effects, that generate signals to which the underfrequency element can respond. In
such cases the undercurrent can be gated with some other function such as a
lowset overcurrent element, or the circuit breaker closed indication via the input
mask [0A0A AUX1].
SECTION 11. AUXILIARY TIMERS
When the auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, and tAUX3 are not being used by the
internal logic of the relay they may be used as discrete time delay elements. Timers
tAUX1 and tAUX2 will start to time when a logic input assigned in their input
masks is energised. They will then energise an output relay assigned in their
associated output masks after the set time has elapsed. Time delays can be set
from 0.01s up to 24 days.
Timer tAUX2 may be used as a discrete time delay function, or to give delayed
initiation of tAUX3. It can also be used to give longer reset delays for the
disturbance recorder (see the section on Disturbance Recorder).
Timer tAUX3 is slightly different to tAUX1 and tAUX2 in it can be selected to give a
delay on pick-up as in series 1 relays, or alternatively a delay on drop-off.
Software link LOGB is used to make the selection. Set LOGB = 0 for delay on pick-
up and LOGB = 1 for delay on drop-off.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 35 of 44
0A0A AUX1 LOG4 0B10 AUX1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 tAUX1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 F<
SD5
I< 0
3SEC 1 Reset trip flags
0A0B AUX2 SD8 SD6
0 0 Reset
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ≥1
SD8 1 1 disturbance
Recorder recorder
0 stopped
1
Recorder
LOG3 stopped
0 I<
1 & 0B11 AUX2
LOG4
Io<
≥1 tAUX2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0
1 1
LOG6 0B12 AUX3
0A0C AUX3 0
≥1 tAUX3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
LOGB
Figure 19. Auxiliary timer logic

The cold load start timer has been deleted in the K Range series 2 relays and when
this function is required tAUX3 should be utilised with link LOGB = 1. For delayed
initiation of the cold load start, set link LOG6 = 1 when the delayed initiation will
be given by tAUX2.
11.1 Extra earth fault stage
Setting link LOG4=1 will enable the earth fault undercurrent element Io< to start
tAUX2 when the current exceeds the Io< setting. This gives a fourth earth fault
stage, but note that this element is responsive to peak measurement and will not
provide a high degree of rejection to harmonic currents.
11.2 Loss of load protection
Setting link LOG3=1 will enable the phase fault undercurrent elements to start
tAUX2 when the current is less than the I< setting. This can be used to start the
cold load start sequence in retrofit installations. It can also be used to indicate loss
of critical loads.
11.3 Delayed under frequency trip
Setting link LOG8=1 will enable the under frequency element to initiate tAUX1
when the frequency falls below the setting F<, to give a time delayed output via
any relay assigned in the output mask for tAUX1. This can be used to provide a
time delayed under frequency trip for load shedding. This feature enables the load
shedding to be graded by frequency and time setting.
The under frequency will not maloperate when the signal that is being frequency
tracked is too small to track. This is because the frequency tracking will default to
the set rated frequency and provided the under frequency setting is lower than this
no output will occur.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 36 of 44
SECTION 12. SETTING GROUP SELECTION
The relay has two setting groups, but as supplied only setting group 1 will be
visible. To make the second group of settings visible in the menu, set function link
SD4=1 in the SYSTEM DATA column. The value of the group 2 settings is
unimportant when link SD4 = 0, because group 1 settings will be in use by default.
The menu cell 000E, in the SYSTEM DATA column, is a read only cell that displays
the setting group that is in operation.
Note: The logic associated with the change of setting group has changed
from that in the original K Range relay and the following notes only
apply to K Range series 2 relays.
1
LOG6 0B12 AUX3
0A0C AUX3 ≥1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
tAUX3 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LOG8 LOGB LOG5
0 0
1 1
SD4
0A0D STG GRP 2 0
≥1 1 Change to setting
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 group 2
SD3
0 Remote set Grp2
SET 1
1
RESET 0
Remote reset Grp1
Figure 20. Setting group selection logic

12.1 Remote change of setting group
Link [SD3] must be set to “1” before the relay will respond to a remote command
to change the selected setting group. Because the command cannot be sustained
over the serial link a set/reset register is used to remember the remotely selected
setting group. When link SD3=1, the set/reset register shall change to 0/1 in
response to the respective commands <Set Group 1>/<Set Group 2> via the serial
port. When the value of set/reset register is “0” then the group 1 settings shall be
in operation and when its value is “1” the group 2 settings will be in operation.
The state of this register stored when the relay is powered down and restored on
power up.
When link SD3=0 the value of the set/reset register will no longer change in
response to remote command and will retain its last set state prior to setting
SD3=0. When link SD3=0 the value of the cell cannot be changed via the serial
port and the value of this register will have no effect on the setting group in use.
Note: If [SD4] = 0 then the group 2 settings will be hidden and group 1
will be active by default.
12.2 Manual change of setting group
Link [SD4] must be set to “1” to make the second setting group active. Then
manual selection of Setting Group 2 shall be effected by setting link LOG8=1 in
the LOGIC column of the menu.
12.3 Controlled change of setting group
Link SD4 must be set to “1” to make the second setting group active. Now an
internally generated control signal from timer tAUX3 via link LOG5 will select
setting group 2. Alternatively, energising a logic input allocated in mask [0A0D
STG GRP2] will select setting group 2. Note that tAUX3 will have a delay on pick-
up if link LOGB = 0 and delay on drop-off if LOGB = 1. The logic input could be
energised via the contacts of one of the output relays so that change of setting
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 37 of 44
group will be in response to some protection function such as an overcurrent

element operating, or the directional contacts changing state. Three example uses
are given below:
Dual rate inverse time curves [see Section 4.8]
Cold load pick-up [see Section 5.12]
Voltage controlled overcurrent [see Section 9.2]
SECTION 13. DUAL POWERED RELAYS
Dual powered relays are powered from an AC, or DC, auxiliary supply. This
supply need not be secure because the relay will draw current from the current
transformer circuit in the absence of the auxiliary supply.
13.1 Powered from current transformers alone
When powered from the current transformer circuit alone, the minimum current to
operate the relay is that required to establish the power supply rails within the
relay. Lowering the design value of this parameter increases the burden on the
current transformers and the power dissipated within the relay case. The limits are
therefore a compromise based on these factors:
Minimum current to power the relay for phase faults = 0.4In
Minimum current to power the relay for earth faults = 0.2In
However, a combined three phase and earth/ground fault relay will operate with
lower earth/ground fault current settings when the load current in the protected
circuit is sufficient to power the relay ie. greater than 0.4In. Settings less than
0.2In are provided for earth faults, but they must be used with discretion.
0.8
0.6
Time (seconds)
0.4
0.2
0
1 7 10 70 100
Multiple of minimum current to power the relay
Figure 21. Start-up time delay

When switching onto a fault, the relay will be delayed in operation by the start up
time and this delay will need to be taken into account in any grading exercise. The
delay is the time taken by the processor to initialise its registers, read in settings
from non-volatile memory and perform self checks. There will be an additional
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 38 of 44
delay whilst the power supply builds up, but this will be less significant when using
an inverse time/current characteristic as the power supply delay similarly varies
with current. The start-up time is not reduced by lowering the time multiplier setting.
With prefault load current there will be no start-up time and the relays will operate
within their normal time settings.
Note: Where the start-up delay cannot be tolerated it is recommended that
the relay is also powered from an auxiliary AC voltage supply so
that it can be up and running before a fault occurs. It will also make
stored disturbance and event records more secure, because they are
discarded when the relay powers down.
13.2 Powered from an auxiliary AC voltage and from current
transformers
The addition of an auxiliary AC, or DC, voltage supply to power the relay will:
- enable the settings to be changed when the protected circuit is de-energised.
- enable records to be retrieved and control functions to be carried out over the
communication link.
- reduce the burden on the line CTs.
When using an auxiliary AC voltage, it may be lost during a fault, when power
will be drawn from the current transformer circuit to maintain the relay in a fully
operational state. However, if the source of the auxiliary voltage is carefully
chosen it is unlikely to be lost completely during earth faults but it may collapse to
50% of its rated value. Provided the voltage is still above the minimum required to
power the relay, very low earth fault settings can be successfully applied. In the
absence of the auxiliary voltage the relay is not guaranteed to operate for earth
fault currents less than 0.2In.
No alarm is given for loss of the ac auxiliary voltage, unless it is externally
monitored by a separate supervision relay.
13.3 Special application notes for dual powered relays
Dual powered relays may be fitted with eight opto-isolated inputs and eight relay
outputs, but at the claimed minimum operating current they cannot all be energised
at the same time. If they are, then the minimum operation current will be increased.
However, in applications requiring a dual powered relay it is unlikely that more
than two output relays will be energised at any one time. The following table
shows how the minimum operating current varies with the number of relays (not
including the watchdog) and inputs that are to be energised at the same time.
No.of output relays energised 2 4 6 8

8 opto-inputs energised 1.3xImin 1.5xImin 1.7xImin 2.0xImin
Imin = 0.4In for phase faults and 0.2In for earth/ground faults.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 39 of 44
13.4 Dead substation protection

The dual powered relays derive power for the electronics and the trip coil of the
circuit breaker from the line current transformers and optionally from an auxiliary
voltage supply. Applying one of these relays on the incoming feeder to the
substation will ensure that the substation is still protected in the event of complete
failure of the auxiliary supplies.
The application limitations are that the setting range of these relays is a little more
restricted when power is being derived from the current transformers alone and
that the circuit breaker must have a suitable trip coil fitted. The tripping energy is
provided by a 680µF capacitor charged to 50V and the circuit breaker should
reliably trip when this capacitor is discharged into its trip coil.
13.5 Capacitor discharge tripping
Dual powered relays may use either of the above methods. In addition, these
particular relays charge an internal capacitor from the current circuit and also from
the auxiliary voltage circuit (Figure 22). This capacitor is 680µF and it is charged
to 50V dc. It may be discharged directly into a suitably sensitive trip coil via one
of the programmable output relays. The minimum energy fed to the trip coil is that
from the capacitor, but in most cases it will be supplemented by a current from the
auxiliary voltage circuit and/or the current circuit.
When energized from current alone the lowest current for which the relay will
operate will be that necessary to start up the power supply. To be able to use
lower fault settings an auxiliary supply will be required.
The capacitance discharge circuit is not isolated from the auxiliary supply and to
prevent the relay from being damaged, no external ground connection should be
made to this circuit.
Relay
42
RLY3
44
9 Trip
+
10
Figure 22. Capacitor discharge trip

13.6 AC series tripping
As an alternative the trip capacitor in the dual powered relays may be discharged
into an auxiliary relay. This relay will be de-energized in the quiescent state, with
its break contacts short circuiting the trip coils of the circuit breaker (Figure 23).
The trip coils are connected in series with the current transformer secondary circuit
so that, when the auxiliary relay is operated, the full secondary current is diverted
through the trip coils.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 40 of 44
To cover all fault conditions, three trip coils are required and may be necessary to
limit the maximum energy that can be fed to each coil, by means of saturating
shunt reactors.
RELAY
42
RLY3
44
9
+
10
21 23 25 28
TC TC TC MVAZ
Ia
To Ib
Ic
line
CTs In
Figure 23. AC series trip arrangement
SECTION 14. AUTORECLOSE - SINGLE SHOT SCHEME
In many feeder protection schemes, autoreclose is used as an effective tool to

restore supply following transient faults such as flash overs caused by lightning
strikes.
Areas prone to sever lightning activity usually require multi-shot autoreclose
schemes to deal with multiple strikes. These schemes are quite complex, often
involving enabling and disabling of certain protection functions at each stage and
hence requires complex scheme logic and timing routines as provided in the KAVR
and KVTR relays. However, there are many instances where transient faults are
rare and not justifying dedicated autoreclose schemes, but even so a simple single
shot autoreclose scheme can reduce the number of instances of lost supply due to
these occasional transient faults.
14.1 Overview
The scheme provides a single shot autoreclose function using the scheme logic
capablilities of the KCGG or KCEG overcurrent relays together with a single
external auxiliary relay.
The auxiliary relay is an MVAA 15 relay or similar electrically reset relay, which is
utilised to latch the autoreclose initiate signal. This has the added advantage of
preventing hunting of the scheme.
The autoreclose dead time and reclaim time are controlled by the two auxiliary
timers tAUX2 and tAUX3 that form an integral part of the KCGG/KCEG. Timer
tAUX1 may be included in the scheme to detect unsuccessful reclosures. Of course
these auxiliary timers may already be in use with other K scheme options in which
case they may be replaced by external delay on energisation timers such as the
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 41 of 44
MVTT 14 or MVUA 11. In K Range series 2 relays only, auxililary timers tAUX3
may be configured for delay on pick-up, or delay on drop-off and for this
application it should be set for a delay on pick-up by setting link LOGB = 0 (in K
Range series 1 tAUX3 is always delayed on pick-up). Timers tAUX2 and tAUX3 are
always delayed on pick-up.
14.2 Connections
The connection diagram for the scheme using the K Range relay auxiliary timers is
shown in Figure 24.
Equipment list
Device Function Device Function
99-1,2 Multifunction protection FS-3 Close circuit fuse

SW-1 Manual trip/close switch 52T CB trip coil
SW-2 A/R in/out selector switch 52C CB close coil
PB-1 Manual A/R reset push button AUX1 Unsuccessful reclose timer
94 Electrically reset relay - MVAA 15 AUX2 Dead time
52-a CB aux-open when CB open AUX3 Reclaim time
52-b CB aux-closed when CB open AUX1-1 Unsuccessful reclose contact
FS-1 Trip circuit fuse AUX2-1 CB close initiate contact
FS-2 Protective relay circuit fuse AUX3-1 Successful reclose pulse contact
SW-1/1
TOC
+ -
99-1
(t>, t>>, t>>>) In Out
FS-1
52T
99-2 SW-2/1
(t>, t>>, t>>>) Out In
FS-2
94
PB-1 S
R
AUX3-1
MVAA15
13 14
48V
+ -
94-1 52-b AUX1
AUX2
52-a AUX3
AUX2-1
BLOCK
(99-t>>)
CB Close
AUX1-1
FS-3 CB Close -1
52C
99
KCGG/KCEG
SW-1/2
TOC
94-2
Figure 24. Connection diagram for single shot autoreclose scheme

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 42 of 44
14.3 Successful reclose description

When the protective relay operates (KCGG or KCEG) to trip the circuit breaker,
the MVAA 15 (device 94) electrically reset relay is latched in, initiating the
autoreclose sequence if the autoreclose service switch SW-2/1 is set to In Service.
99
52-a
52-b
94-1
Aux2
CB Close
Aux3
Aux1
1 2 3
1. Protection relay trips

2. AUX2 operates at end of dead time and closes breaker
3. AUX3 operates at end of reclaim time and resets scheme
Figure 25. Successful autoreclose sequence

The 94-1contact starts the AUX2 timer as the dead time of the scheme. At the end
of the dead time, contact AUX2-1 operates to energise the local CB close input to
the KCGG relay, which in turn closes its contact CBClose-1 to energise the CB
close coil 52C. The CB Close function of the K Range relay includes a timer setting
for the duration of the close pulse to prevent burn out of the 52C coil.
The 94-1 contact may also be used, if desired, to block any one or all of the K
range relay overcurrent stages by setting the appropriate input masks. The one
input from 94-1 can then be programmed to initiate CB Close as well as initiate
blocking.
As the 94-1 contact is latched in, as soon as the CB closes, the 52-a contact will
close to initiate the Aux3 timer as the reclaim time. If the breaker remains closed
for the duration of AUX3 reclaim time, the AUX3-1 contact operates to reset the 94
relay which resets the complete scheme. A second contact may be programmed
for the AUX3 timer as a successful reclose pulse contact which will remain closed
for the reset time of 94 plus the reset time of AUX3.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 43 of 44
14.4 Unsuccessful reclose

In the case of an unsuccessful reclose, a separate alarm is given by the AUX1
timer.
99
52-a
52-b
94-1
Aux2
CB Close
Aux3
Aux1
1 2 3 4 5
1. Protection relay trips

2. AUX2 operates at end of dead time and closes breaker
3. Protection relay trips again within reclaim time
4. AUX1 raises unsuccessful reclose alarm
5. Scheme reset by manual push-button - CB can now be closed manually
Figure 26. Unsuccessful autoreclose sequence

As the 94-1 contact is latched in when the autoreclose is initated, if the breaker
fails to close or fails to stay closed following the reclose pulse from CB Close-1, the
52-b contact will initate the AUX1 timer. This timer is set slightly longer (eg. 2s)
than the AUX2 Dead Time timer and raises the Unsuccessful Reclose alarm via
AUX1-1.
As a security against manual closing of the breaker either during a reclose
sequence or if there has been an unsuccessful reclose, the 94-2 contact prevents
the manual close switch energising the 52C coil.
14.5 Blocking instantaneous low set protection when reclosing
When using autoreclose equipment it is often the practice to utilise I>>/Io>> as
instantaneous low set elements. This will ensure that any transient fault is quickly
extinguished so that the autoreclose can then re-establish the supplies. It may be
considered an advantage to block the operation of the instantaneous elements
during the reclose cycle to allow time graded tripping to determine and isolate the
faulted circuits, with the minimum disruption of supplies. As described in Chapter
4, Section 5.5, it is advantageous to block the associated timers for the low set
elements t>>/to>> to ensure accurate flagging of the fault. The output from timer
AUX2 is shown in the diagram to perform this function as well as initiating the
close pulse timer. Setting link SD5 = 1 will result in the fault flags being reset
automatically following a successful reclosure.
Where lightning strikes are frequent, it can be an advantage to make the I>>/Io>>
setting equal to I>/Io>, in order to detect the maximum number of transient faults.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 44 of 44
14.6 Circuit breaker operation counter

Each K Range series 2 relay is equipped with a circuit breaker operation counter,
the value of which can be displayed on the LCD or remotely via the serial
communication port. In addition an output relay can be arranged to pick-up when
the counter value reaches a settable limit (see Chapter 5, Section 7.2). This counter
can be used to augment the autoreclose scheme.
Chapter 5
Measurement and Records

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. MEASURE 1 1
1.1 Current 1
1.2 Voltage 1
1.3 Frequency 1
2. MEASURE 2 1
2.1 Ιmax 1
2.2 Power 1
2.3 Power mode selection 1
2.4 Three phase power factor 2
3. MEASURE 3 3
3.1 Thermal ammeter 3
3.2 Thermal state 3
3.3 Peak demand 4
4. FAULT RECORDS 4
4.1 Generating fault records 4
4.2 Accessing fault records 5
4.3 Resetting fault records 5
4.4 Fault passage information 5
5. EVENT RECORDS 6
5.1 Triggering event records 6
5.2 Time tagging of event records 6
5.3 Accessing and resetting event records 6
6. DISTURBANCE RECORDS 7
6.1 Recorder control 7
6.2 Recorder capture 7
6.3 Recorder post trigger 8
6.4 Recorder logic trigger 8
6.5 Recorder relay trigger 8
6.6 Notes on recorded times 8
6.7 Disturbance recorder reset options 9
7. CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE RECORDS 9
7.1 Circuit breaker clearance time 9
7.2 Circuit breaker operations counter 9
7.3 Circuit breaker contact duty 10
7.4 Circuit breaker maintenance alarm 10
8. ALARM RECORDS 11
8.1 Watchdog 11
8.1.1 Auxiliary powered relays 11
8.1.2 Dual powered relays 11
8.2 Trip indication 11
8.3 Alarm indication 11
Figure 1 Mode of signing power flow 2

Figure 2 Record initiation logic 4
Figure 3 Recorder reset 9
Figure 4 Circuit breaker alarm 9
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 12
SECTION 1. MEASURE 1
The same menu cells have been retained for measurement values and new cells
have been used for any additional measurements that are now included.
1.1 Current
Current is measured once per power frequency cycle and Fourier is used to extract
the fundamental component. Measurements are made for each of the three phase
currents (Ia, Ib, Ic) and the residual circuit current (Io). These values are stored in
menu cells 0201, 0202, 0203 and 0204 respectively.
1.2 Voltage
The phase/neutral voltages are measured directly when the internal VTs are star
connected. The phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are then stored in menu locations
0208, 0209 and 020A. From the sum of these voltages the residual voltage (Vo) is
calculated. This voltage is equivalent to the output that would be obtained from an
open delta connection of a three phase VT and is three times the zero sequence
voltage. The residual voltage Vo is stored in menu location 020B. The phase
voltages are calculated from the measured phase voltages and stored in menu
locations 0205, 0206 and 0207.
In KCEU142 the internal VTs are delta connected. The line voltages (Vab, Vbc,
Vca) and the residual voltage are then directly measured and stored in their
respective menu locations.
1.3 Frequency
The sampling frequency of the analogue/digital converter is synchronised to the
power system frequency when there is a signal of sufficient strength to reliably
make a frequency measurement. In the absence of a signal to frequency track the
sampling frequency defaults to the power frequency setting in menu cell 0009. For
protection functions the measured frequency defaults to the power frequency
setting when the current and voltage is zero. The displayed frequency
measurement will also be the sampling frequency, but in this case it will read 0
when the frequency tracking stops.
2.1 Imax
Imax is not a demand value, but the highest of the three phase currents and is
stored in menu cell 0304. It is a useful value to display when all three phase
currents cannot be displayed.
2.2 Power
Active and reactive power is calculated for each of the three phases and from
these the three phase power is calculated. On series 1 relays only the three phase
power could be accessed, but on series 2 relays the single phase values are also
available. All the power measurements are to be found under MEASURE 2.
2.3 Power mode selection
The standard current and voltage connections, shown on connection diagrams,
follow the convention that forward current flows from the busbar to the feeder. This
will correspond to positive values of active power flowing from the busbar to the
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 12
feeder. However, alternative methods of signing the direction of power flow are
provided to suit other application, or user’s standard. The signing for the active
and reactive power can be changed in menu cell 031E to any of the following four
alternatives:
Lagging kVArs to busbar

Mode 0 = -VAr
Mode 1 = -VAr
Mode 2 = +VAr
Mode 3 = +VAr
Power to busbar Power to feeder

Mode 0 = -W Mode 0 = +W
Mode 1 = +W Mode 1 = -W
Mode 2 = -W Mode 2 = +W
Mode 3 = +W Mode 3 = -W
Lagging kVArs to feeder

Mode 0 = +VAr
Mode 1 = +VAr
Mode 2 = -VAr
Mode 3 = -VAr
Figure 1. Mode of signing power flow

When connected for forward power flow to the feeder then:
Mode 0 - Net export signing : + = net export of power and negative VArs
Mode 1 - Import to busbar : + = net power flow to busbar in (a+jB) form.
Mode 2 - Export from busbar : + = net power flow to feeder in (a+jB) form.
Mode 3 - Net import signing : + = net import of power and negative VArs
As a safeguard against accidental change this cell is password protected.
2.4 Three phase power factor
The three phase power factor is calculated after taking the selected signing mode
into account as follows:
pf = [active power]/[apparent power]
Range: -1<0<+1 [the sign (-/+) indicates reverse/forward and not lag/lead]
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 12
3.1 Thermal ammeter

The thermal ammeters have a representative characteristic similar to that produced
by a bi-metal type of instrument, where the movement would be proportional to the
bending of the bi-metal strip as a result of the heat applied. Its time/position
characteristic is essentially exponential during the heating and cooling cycle and
its response is measured in time constants.
This type of instrument does not respond to minor rises or dips in the measured
current. It displays a steady measurement of the average current over the demand
period, equal to six times the selected time constant. In the event of the auxiliary
supply to the relay being lost the thermal values are remembered and restored
when the supply is re-established.
The setting for the time constant is in menu cells 0614 and 0814 and is adjustable
from 1 to 120 minutes in 1 minute steps. However, the time constant is shared with
the thermal protection and if the thermal protection is in use its time constant
settings will probably be given priority over the instrument requirements.
UK applications
Electricity Supply Industry Specification ESI 50-2 states that the preferred time lag
is 30 minutes and this shall be equal to 6 time constants. Thus for this application
the time constant should be set to 5 minutes.
US applications
In the USA the response of such devices is expressed as the time to reach 90% of
the prospective current and the generally accepted time would seem to be in the
order of 15 minutes. The time to reach 90% of final value is 2.3 time constants and
so for such applications the recommended time constant would be 15/2.3 = 6
minutes.
Note: Link PF0 =1 for the thermal ammeters to operate.
If PF0 = 0 then they will not increment.
If both setting group 1 and 2 are to be used then this link must be set
appropriately in both setting groups.
The thermal ammeters can be reset by performing a reset cell operation on menu
cell 0404, 0405, 0406, or 0407 (display one of these cells then press the [0] key
for 1 second). The reset of this function is not password protected. The reset of the
thermal ammeters is common to the thermal protection and so they can be reset by
energising a logic input that that has been assigned in input mask [0A11 RESET
Ith].
3.2 Thermal state
The thermal state is a measure of the percentage of the limiting thermal capacity
that the protected item of plant is estimated to have reached. The maximum current
that the device can withstand continuously should be entered as the setting for
(Ith>) in the phase fault settings of the relay (cells 0613 and 0813). The time
constant will compensate for the cooling effects resulting from heat being radiated
to the surroundings. When a current equal to Ith> is applied the thermal state will
reach 100% after approximately 6 times the set time constant. Normal load current
will be less than Ith> and the thermal state, being proportional to I2 will be
considerably lower than 100%.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 12
On loss of the auxiliary supply the thermal state is memorised and when the supply
is restored the thermal state is restored to the memorised value unless the stored
value is greater than 90% when it will be restored to 90%. The thermal state is
protected and the password must be entered before it can be reset via the menu.
Cell 0407 under MEASURE 3 should then be displayed and the [0] key pressed
for 1 second. This does not reset the thermal ammeters or the peak demand
values.
3.3 Peak demand
The peak demand is the highest value the thermal ammeters have attained since
they were last reset and the demand for each phase is recorded separately. The
peak demand can be reset by entering the password, selecting one of the peak
demand values in the menu, cells 040A, 040B, or 040C, and pressing the reset
key [0]. This will also cause the thermal ammeters to reset at the same time but the
thermal state will not be reset.
SECTION 4. FAULT RECORDS
A full fault record is now stored for each of the last five faults, with the new record
overwriting the oldest record one. These records are stored in non volatile memory
and are retained when the relay is powered down. Fault records contain the
following information:
- fault flags
- three line voltages
- measured phase currents
- residual current and voltage
- time from trip command to cessation of current flow
Fault records are also recorded with a time tag in the event recorded
4.1 Generating fault records
Block start
0A0 L TRIP
0B0D CB TRIP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ≥1
SD2 tTRIP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Trip circuit breaker
1
0B0E CB CLOSE
0A0 L CLOSE Close circuit breaker ≥1 tCLOSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset
LOG9
0
≥1 1
LOG2
0A0 EXT. TRIP 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
≥1 I< ≥1 0B0F CB FAIL
tBF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RLY3 Io<
LOGA Generate circuit breaker

0 ≥1 maintenance records
1
RLY7
LOG7 Latch flags
0 ≥1 Generate fault records and
1 I> ≥1 Copy to events records
Io>
Figure 2. Record initiation logic

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 5 of 12
Fault records are generated when output relay RLY3, or a logic input assigned in
the input mask [0A09 EXT TRIP], is energised. The fault flags will be latched and
the trip LED lit in response to these two inputs. The circuit maintenance records will
be updated and the breaker fail protection initiated by either of these two inputs.
Relay RLY7 is used for remote, or manual trip, and can be arranged to trigger the
generation of fault and circuit breaker maintenance records by setting link
LOGA = 1, but in this case the breaker fail protection will not be initiated.
Setting link LOG7 = 1 will enable the start relays to generate a fault record and so
record the passage of fault current, but since if the fault is not cleared by this relay
operating output relay RLY3 or RLY7, the circuit breaker fail protection will not be
initiated, the trip LED will not be lit and the maintenance records will not be
updated.
4.2 Accessing fault records
Fault records can be accessed by selecting [0101 Fault No Fn] in the
[FLT RECORD] column menu. The fault number (Fn) denotes the record for the last
fault and the record for previous faults can be selected by successive long presses
of the [0] key. Fn-1 is the previous fault and Fn-2 is the one before that, etc.
The [0] key enables fault record selection with the cover in place on the relay, but
for remote selection, the usual change setting commands will give a quicker
response. With the cover removed and menu cell [0101 Fault NoFn] displayed,
the [+] and [-] keys can be used to change to the required record number.
4.3 Resetting fault records
All five fault records can be cleared by selecting cell 0110, the last cell under fault
records and pressing the [0] key for 1 second.
Note: If fault records are being viewed with ACCESS or PAS&T software;
hit return key and then select the reset cell option to reset all five fault
records.
4.4 Fault passage information
Any start function can be used to initiate a fault record when it detects the passage
of fault current through the protected zone. This fault record will contain the current
magnitude, the phases involved and voltage measurements, if appropriate. To
achieve this it is necessary to set function link LOG A = 1 so that recording is
initated by the start relays picking up. Several such records may be stored in the
event recorder and the number will be increased if the logging of logic events is
turned off by setting link SD7 = 0.
If the fault records are also generated by relay RLY3 they will still be generated for
faults that are cleared by the relay tripping as well as for those passing through the
protected section. The disturbance recorder, if set to trigger when relay RLY3 picks-
up, will only capture a record for faults cleared by RLY3 operating.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 6 of 12
SECTION 5. EVENT RECORDS
Fifty time tagged event records can be stored, after which the oldest record is
overwritten. They are stored in non volatile memory and will be lost if the relay is
powered down. The event records can only be accessed via the serial
communication port and PC software is available to support the automatic
extraction and storing of these records.
The following items are recorded by the event recorder:
· Fault records including: fault flags, fault currents and voltages.
· Setting changes made via the user interface on the front of the relay
· Logic events: status change of logic inputs and/or output relays
· Alarms: internal equipment alarms detected by self monitoring functions.
The number of full fault records that can be stored in events records can be
increased by setting link SD7=0 to inhibit storage of logic events.
5.1 Triggering event records
Event records are triggered automatically in response to the functions listed in the
previous section.
5.2 Time tagging of event records
The K Range relays do not have a real time clock. Instead, they each have a free-
running 32-bit counter that increments every 1ms. When an event occurs, the value
of this millisecond counter is recorded (Ta) and stored in the event buffer. When the
event is extracted, the present value of the millisecond counter is also sent in the
message (Tb). The master station must record the actual time at which it received
the event message (Tc). This is equivalent to Tb if we consider the transmission time
of the event over the communication network to be negligible. It then calculates
how long ago the event occurred by:
How long ago = (Tb - Ta) ms
Real time = (time message was received) - (how long ago it occurred)
= (Tc) - (Tb - Ta) ms
Time tagging is to a resolution of 1ms, the incrementation rate of the counter and
remains valid for approximately 49 days. However, the crystal to control the timing
has a nominal accuracy of ±50 ppm, is not externally synchronised and has no
temperature compensation. It can therefore introduce an error of ±1s in every 5.5
hours.
The event recording was originally designed for use with automatic extraction
programs running on a personal computer (PC) when these timing errors would be
insignificant. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 6.6 for notes on recorded times, as these
apply equally to event records.
5.3 Accessing and resetting event records
Event records cannot be viewed on the relay and can only be accessed via the
serial communication port of the relay. A PC with suitable software, such as PAS&T,
can automatically extract the records, display them on a screen, print them, or
store them to either a floppy disk or to the hard diskof the computer.
When a new record is generated the oldest event record is automatically
overridden and the event flag set. The PAS&T software responds to this flag and
extracts the record. When all records have been read, the event flag resets.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 7 of 12
SECTION 6. DISTURBANCE RECORDS
The internal disturbance recorder has one channel allocated to each of the
measured analogue quantities; one to record the eight control inputs and one to
record the eight relay outputs. As with the event recorder, when the buffer is full the
oldest record is overwritten and records are deleted if the auxiliary supply to the
relay is removed. This ensures that when the buffer is read the contents will all be
valid.
The disturbance recorder is stopped and the record frozen, a set time after a
selected trigger has been activated. For example, a protection trip command could
be the selected trigger and the delay would then set the duration of the trace after
the fault.
Each sample has a time tag attached to it so that when the waveform is
reconstituted it can be plotted at the correct point against the time scale, thus
ensuring that the time base is correct and independent of the frequency. The K
Range overcurrent relays measure eight samples per cycle, but the method of
recording allows the analysis program to perform with records that may have a
different sample rate.
The disturbance recorder may be triggered by several different methods dependent
on the settings in the RECORDER column of the menu. However, the records have
to be read via the serial communication port and suitable additional software is
required to reconstruct and display the waveforms. Only one complete record is
stored and the recorder must be reset before another record can be captured.
6.1 Recorder control
This cell displays the state of the recorder :
a) RUNNING - recorder storing data (overwriting oldest data)
b) TRIGGERED - recorder stop delay triggered
c) STOPPED - recorder stopped and record ready for retrieval
When this cell is selected, manual control is possible and to achieve this the relay
must be put into the setting mode by pressing the [+] key. A flashing cursor will
then appear on the bottom line of the display at the left-hand side. The [+] key will
then select 'running' and the [-] key will select 'triggered'. When the appropriate
function has been selected the [F] key is pressed to accept the selection and the
selected function will take effect when the [+] key is pressed to confirm the
selection. To abort the selection at any stage, press the reset key [0].
6.2 Recorder capture
The recorder can capture:
a) SAMPLES - the individual calibrated samples
b) MAGNITUDES - the Fourier derived amplitudes
c) PHASES - the Fourier derived phase angles
The relay has no electro-mechanical adjustments, all calibration is effected in
software and all three of the above options are used in the calibration process. For
normal use as a fault recorder, SAMPLES will be the most useful.
However, for 60Hz systems there is less processing time available per cycle and if
all the protection functions have been activated the menu system, being the lowest
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 8 of 12
priority task, may appear very slow. To improve this the disturbance recorder
should be stopped (triggered) via the menu. If records are still required at this time
then it is suggested that the recorder is set to record magnitudes rather than
samples because this will use less of the available processing time.
6.3 Recorder post trigger
The post trigger setting determines the length of the trace that occurs after the stop
trigger is received. This may be set to any value between 1 and 512 samples.
When recording samples the total trace duration is 512/8 = 64 cycles because
the interval between the samples is equivalent to one eighth of a cycle. However,
the Fourier derived values are calculated once per cycle and so the total trace
length when recording these calculated phase or amplitude values is 512 cycles.
6.4 Recorder logic trigger
Any, or all, of the opto-isolated inputs may be used as the stop trigger and the
trigger may be taken from either the energisation or the de-energisation of these
inputs. The bottom line of the display for this cell will show a series of 16
characters, each of which may be set to '1' or '0'. A '1' will select the input as a
trigger and a '0' will deselect it.
The selection is made using the instructions for the setting links in Chapter 3,
Section 3.4. The opto-isolated input (L0 to L7) associated with each digit is shown
on the top line of the display for the digit underlined by the cursor. A '+' preceding
it will indicate that the trigger will occur for energisation and a ' - ' will indicate the
trigger will occur for de-energisation.
6.5 Recorder relay trigger
Any, or all, of the output relays may be used as a stop trigger and the trigger may
be taken from either the energisation or the de-energisation of these outputs. The
bottom line of the display for this cell will show a series of 16 characters, each of
which may be set to '1' or '0'. A '1' will select the input and a '0' will deselect it.
The selection is made using the instructions for setting links in Chapter 3,
Section 3.4. The output relay (RLY0 to RLY7) associated with each digit underlined
by the cursor is shown on the top line of the display. A '+' preceding it will
indicate that the trigger will occur for energisation and a '-' will indicate the trigger
will occur for de-energisation.
6.6 Notes on recorded times
The times recorded for the opto-isolated inputs is the time at which the relay
accepted them as valid and responded to their selected control function. This will
be 12.5 ±2.5ms at 50Hz (10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz) after the opto-input was
energised.
The time recorded for the output relays is the time at which the coil of the relay was
energised and the contacts will close approximately 5ms later. Otherwise the time
tags are generally to a resolution of 1ms for events and to a resolution of 1µs for
the samples values.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 9 of 12
6.7 Disturbance recorder reset options
SD5
I< 0
3SEC SD8
1
SD6
Reset trip flags
0A0B AUX2
0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset disturbance
SD8 ≥1 1 1 recorder
Recorder
0 stopped
1
Recorder
LOG3 stopped
0 I<
1 & 0B11 AUX2
LOG4
Io<
P1 tAUX2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1
Figure 3. Recorder reset

The disturbance recorder is reset via cell [0C01 Control]. Alternatively it can be
arranged to reset automatically, 3 seconds after the current is detected by the
undercurrent elements to be above its set threshold. To select this option set link
SD6=1 and SD8=0. This automatic 3s reset may be useful when auto reclose
equipment is employed since a record will only be stored when the autoreclose
equipment fails to reclose the circuit breaker, or it locks out.
If a shorter or longer reset delay is required, set the links as follows. SD6 = 1 and
SD8 = 1 (LOG3 = 0, LOG4 = 0) and then tAUX2 can be set to the necessary reset
delay. The setting range for tAUX2 is 0 to 24 days in graduated steps with the
smallest step of 10ms. With this option the recorder can be reset instantaneously
by energising a logic input that is assigned in the input mask [0A0A AUX2].
SECTION 7. CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE RECORDS
0A09 EXT. TRIP

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
≥1
RLY3
Generate circuit breaker

≥1 maintenance records
RLY7
Latch red trip LED
LOG0 CB(ops)>
0 0B19 CB ALARM
1 ≥1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CB duty>
Figure 4. Circuit breaker alarm

7.1 Circuit breaker clearance time
The time taken for the circuit breaker to break the fault current is estimated and
stored in the fault records in menu cell [0109 CB Trp Time]. A sudden increase in
this time measurement may indicate the need for maintenance of the circuit
breaker.
7.2 Circuit breaker operations counter
A register sums the number of circuit breaker operations and the value can be
accessed via menu cell 0310 under the column heading MEASURE 2. This record
is updated every time output relay RLY3 operates, or an opto input assigned in
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 10 of 12
input mask [0A09 EXT TRIP] is energised by an external trip. If link LOGA = 1 then
operation of relay RLY7 will also be able to increment this register. RLY7 is normally
used for manual or remote trips via the trip pulse timer (tTRIP).
This function is inhibited if link LOG 0 =0 and operative if LOG 0 =1.
Incrementation of this counter can be blocked during testing by setting link
LOG 0 = 0.
The value of the counter can be reset to zero when it is displayed, by pressing the
reset key [0]. Alternatively a reset cell command can be sent via the serial
communication port. These cells are password protected and cannot be reset if the
password has not been entered.
Note: Resetting the (CBops) counter will also result in the 'CBduty' registers
being reset at the same time.
7.3 Circuit breaker contact duty
Three registers are used to sum the contact breaking duty separately for each
phase. These are labelled [0311 CBdutyA], [0312 CBdutyB] and
[0313 CBdutyC]. If link LOG 1=1 then the relay sums the current and it LOG 1=0
then the relay sums the squared current. The value of these registers can be
accessed under the column heading MEASURE 2. These records are updated
every time output relay RLY3 operates, if link LOGA = 1 and RLY7 operates, or an
opto input assigned in input mask [0A09 EXT TRIP] is energised by an external trip.
When a remote trip is issued via the serial communications, or a local trip initiated
via the input mask [0A07 LTrip] relay RLY7 should be assigned in output mask
[0B0D CB Trip]. Then the contact duty record will also be updated when relay
RLY7 operates if links LOG0 = 1, LOG1 = 0, LOGA = 1.
This function is inhibited if link LOG0 = 0 and operative if LOG1 = 1. Hence by
setting this link LOG0 = 0 during testing its incrementation can be blocked.
The value of these three registers can be reset to zero when any one of them is
displayed, by pressing the reset key [0]. Alternatively a reset cell command can be
sent via the serial communication port. These cells are password protected and
cannot be reset if the password has not been entered.
Note: Resetting the circuit breaker contact duty registers will also reset the
circuit breaker operations counter.
7.4 Circuit breaker maintenance alarm
A threshold can be set on the circuit breaker operations counter and the summated
contact duty. The settings will be found in menu cells [0908 CBops>] and
[0909 CBduty>1] under the LOGIC column heading. When the thresholds are
exceeded the output mask [0B19 CB ALARM] will be energised and any relay
assigned in this mask will pick-up to initiate an alarm. This is the only form of alarm
that is generated, except for the change in state of the output relay, which may be
recorded in the event records if link SD7 = 1. The alarm will be inhibited if link
LOG 0=0, or if the output relay is de-selected in the relay mask.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 11 of 12
SECTION 8. ALARM RECORDS
8.1 Watchdog
8.1.1 Auxiliary powered relays
The watchdog relay will pick up when the relay is operational to indicate a healthy
state, with its make contact closed. When an alarm condition is detected that
requires some action to be taken, the watchdog relay will reset and its break
contact will close to give an alarm.
8.1.2 Dual powered relays
The watchdog relay operates in a slightly modified way on this version of the
relay, because it does not initiate an alarm for loss of auxiliary power, as this may
have been taken from an insecure source, or it may be powered solely from the
current circuit. Operation of the watchdog is therefore inverted so that it will pick
up for a failed condition, closing its make contact to give an alarm and in the
normal condition it will remain dropped off with its break contact closed to
indicate a healthy state.
The green LED will usually follow the operation of the watchdog in either of these
two cases. It will be lit when the relay is powered-up, operational and has not
detected any abnormal conditions.
The watchdog can be tested by setting alarm flag 6 to '1' in menu cell 0003 in the
SYSTEM DATA column of the menu.
8.2 Trip indication
The trip LED will be lit following a trip condition where output relay RLY3 has
operated, or a logic input that has been assigned in input mask [0A08 EXT TRIP]
has been energised.
Relay RLY7 is generally reserved for remote trip initiation via the serial
communication port. When link LOGA = 1 and relay RLY7 is assigned in output
mask [0B0D CB Trip] the trip LED will be lit if relay RLY7 has operated. Relay RLY7
can also be initiated for manual trips via the trip pulse timer (tTRIP) by assigning a
logic input in mask [0A07 LTrip] to give a trip indication. Unlike relay RLY3, RLY7
does not initate the breaker fail protection, but they can both initiate the generation
of fault records and hence fault flags. When relay RLY7 operates and link
LOGA = 1, the default display changes to the fault flag display and a letter 'R' is
displayed in the extreme right-hand position on the bottom line of the display to
indicate a 'remote trip'.
If link LOGA = 0 relay RLY7 can be freely assigned to any output function, without
creating a trip indication.
8.3 Alarm indication
The alarm LED will flash when the password has been entered. It will be lit and
remain steady when an internal fault has been detected by its self test routine. The
alarm flags can then be accessed to determine the fault, provided the relay is still
able to perform this function. See Chapter 3, Sections 3.5 and 3.6 for more
information on alarm flags.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 12 of 12
Chapter 6
Serial Communications
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. COURIER LANGUAGE AND PROTOCOL 1

2. K-BUS 1
2.1 K-Bus transmission layer 2
2.2 K-Bus connections 2
2.3 Ancillary equipment 3
3. SOFTWARE SUPPORT 3
3.1 Courier Access 3
3.2 PAS&T 3
3.3 K-Graph 4
3.4 CourierCom 4
3.5 PC requirements 4
3.6 Modem requirements 4
4. DATA FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION 5
4.1 Difference between K Range series 1 and series 2 relays 5
4.2 Relay address 6
4.3 Measured values 6
4.4 Status word 6
4.5 Plant status word 7
4.6 Control status word 7
4.7 Logic input status word 7
4.8 Output relay status word 7
4.9 Alarm indications 8
4.10 Event records 8
4.11 Notes on recorded times 8
4.12 Protection flags 9
4.13 Fault records 10
4.14 Disturbance records 10
5. SETTING CONTROL 10
5.1 Remote setting change 11
5.2 Remote control of setting group 11
6. REMOTE OPERATION OF OUTPUT RELAYS 12
7. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL 12
7.1 Remote control of circuit breaker 13
7.2 Local control of the circuit breaker 13
7.3 Safe manual closing of the circuit breaker 13
7.3.1 Closing the circuit breaker via the serial communication port 13
7.3.2 Closing the circuit breaker via a lead mounted push-button 14
7.3.3 Delayed manual closure of the circuit breaker 14
8. AIDS TO CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE 15
Figure 1. Typical K-Bus connection diagram 2

Figure 2. Circuit breaker control logic 13
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 16
SECTION 1. COURIER LANGUAGE AND PROTOCOL
Serial communications are supported over K-Bus, a multi-drop network that readily
interfaces to IEC870-5 FT1.2 standards. The language and protocol used for
communication is Courier. It has been especially developed to enable generic
master station programs to access many different types of relay without the
continual need to modify the master station program for each relay type. The
relays form a distributed data base and the master station polls the slave relays for
any information required.
This includes:
Measured values
Menu text
Settings and setting limits
Fault records
Event records
Disturbance records
Plant status
Software is available to support both on-line and off-line setting changes to be
made and the automatic extraction and storage of event and disturbance records
as described in Section 3.
Courier is designed to operate using a polled system, which prevents a slave
device from communicating directly to a master control unit when it needs to inform
it that something has happened; it must wait until the master control unit requests
the information. A feature of Courier is that each piece of information is packeted
by preceding it with a ‘data type and length’ code. By knowing the format of the
data the receiving device can interpret it.
The Courier Communication Manual describes various aspects of this language
and other communication information necessary to interface these devices to other
equipment. It gives details on the hardware and software interfaces as well as
guidelines on how additional devices should implement the Courier language so
as to be consistent with all other devices.
SECTION 2. K-BUS
K-Bus is a communication system developed to connect remote slave devices to a

central master control unit, thus allowing remote control and monitoring functions
to be performed using an appropriate communication language. It is not designed
to allow direct communication between slave devices, but merely between a
master control unit and several slave devices. The main features of K-Bus are:
cost effectiveness, high security, ease of installation and ease of use.
Each relay in the K Range has a serial communication port configured to K-Bus
standards. K-Bus is a communication interface and protocol designed to meet the
requirements of communication with protective relays and transducers within the
power system substation environment. It has the same reliability as the protective
relays themselves and does not result in their performance being degraded in any
way. Error checking and noise rejection have been of major importance in its
design.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 16
2.1 K-Bus transmission layer

The communication port is based on RS485 voltage transmission and reception
levels with galvanic isolation provided by a transformer. A polled protocol is used
and no relay unit is allowed to transmit unless it receives a valid message,
addressed to it without any detected error. Transmission is synchronous over a pair
of screened wires and the data is FM0 coded with the clock signal to remove any
dc component so that the signal will pass through transformers.
With the exception of the master units, each node in the network is passive and
any failed unit on the system will not interfere with communication to the other
units. The frame format is HDLC and the data rate is 64kbits/s.
2.2 K-Bus connections
Connection to the K-Bus port is by standard Midos 4mm screw terminals or snap-
on connectors. A twisted pair of wires is all that is required; the polarity of
connection is not important. It is recommended that an outer screen is used with an
earth connected to the screen at the master station end only. Termination of the
screen is effected with the “U” shaped terminal supplied and which has to be
secured with a self tapping screw in the hole in the terminal block just below
terminal 56, as shown in the diagram. Operation has been tested up to 32 units
connected along 1,000 metres of cable. The specification for suitable cable will be
found in the technical data section. The method of encoding the data results in the
polarity of the connection to the bus wiring being unimportant.
Note: K-Bus must be terminated with a 150Ω resistor at each end of the
bus. The master station can be located at any position, but the bus
should only be driven from one unit at a time.
1
54
56
K-Bus
Screened 2 core cable
Figure 1. Typical K-Bus connection diagram

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 16
2.3 Ancillary equipment

The minimum requirement to communicate with the relay is a K-Bus/IEC870-5
converter box type KITZ and suitable software to run on an IBM or compatible
personal computer.
RS232 interconnection lead for connecting the KITZ to a personal computer (PC)
and software as described in Section 3.
SECTION 3. SOFTWARE SUPPORT
3.1 Courier Access

The Courier Access program is supplied with each KITZ and it allows on-line
access to any relay or other slave device on the system. It polls all available
addresses on the bus to build a list of the active relays. Each relay can be
programmed with a product description (16 characters) and a plant reference (16
characters).
A particular relay may then be chosen and accessed to display a table listing the
menu column headings. Selecting a heading from the list and pressing the return
key of the computer returns the full page of data that has been selected.
Selecting a setting from the displayed page and pressing the return key again will
bring up the setting change box displaying the current setting value and the
maximum and minimum limits of setting that have been extracted from the relay. A
new setting may be typed in and entered. The new value will be sent to the relay
and the relay will send back a copy of the data it received. If the returned value
matches what was sent, it is judged to have been received correctly and the
display asks for confirmation that the new setting is to be entered. When the
execution command is issued the relay checks the setting is within limits, stores it,
then replies to state if the new value has been accepted, or rejected.
If the setting selected is password protected, the relay will reply that access is
denied. Any data received in error is automatically resent. Any data not
understood, but received without error is ignored.
A complete setting file can be extracted from the relay and stored on disc and
printed out for record purposes. The stored settings can also be copied to other
relays.
Control commands, such as close/trip of a circuit breaker, are actioned in the
same way as setting changes and can be achieved with this program by using the
setting change mechanism. This program supports modem connection but it cannot
extract event or disturbance records.
3.2 PAS&T
The Protection Access Software and Toolkit (PAS&T) program performs all the
functions described for the Courier Access program, but additionally it can
perform the following functions:
- Generate a table of all circuit breakers that can be controlled via the relays
connected to K-Bus. These are listed by their plant reference and their open/
closed status is displayed. Selecting a circuit breaker from this table enables
it to be controlled with all the background security described for setting
changes.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 16
- Automatically extracts event records, displays them on screen, prints, or

stores them to disc.
- Automatically extracts disturbance records and stores them to disc in
COMTRADE format.
- Poll the relay for selected data at set intervals and displays the values on
screen, or stores a selected number of values that it can plot on screen to
show trend information.
- Display coded or decoded messages on screen to help de-bug the communi-
cation system.
- The auto-addressing feature allocates the next available address on the bus
to a new relay.
3.3 K-Graph
This program, supplied with PAS&T, can display disturbance records and print
them. The COMTRADE format in which the files are stored can also be loaded into
an Excel, or similar spreadsheet program.
3.4 CourierCom
CourierCom is a Windows based setting program that can be used off-line, i.e.
without the relays being connected. Setting files can be generated in the office and
taken to site on floppy disc for loading to the relays. This program can be used to
down-load the settings to the relay, alternatively ACCESS or PAS&T may be used.
3.5 PC requirements
To operate fully, the above programs require:
IBM PC/XT/AT/PS2 or true compatible.
640kB of main memory RAM
Graphics adapter CGA, EGA, VGA or MDA
Serial adapter port configured as COM1 or COM2 (RS232)
Floppy disk drive 3.5 inch
MS-DOS 3.2 or later/IBM PC-DOS 3.2 or later
Parallel printer port for optional printer.
Additional equipment
Printer
RS-232 link.
KITZ 101 K-Bus/ RS232 communication interface.
Modem
3.6 Modem requirements
GEC ALSTHOM T&D Protection & Control have adopted the IEC-870-5 ft1.2 frame
format for transmitting the courier communication language over RS-232 based
systems, which includes transmission over modems.
The IEC-870-5 ft1.2 specification calls for an 11-bit frame format consisting of 1
start bit, 8 data bits, 1 even parity bit and 1 stop bit. However, most modems
cannot support this 11-bit frame format, so a relaxed 10-bit frame format is
supported by the Protection Access Software & Toolkit and by the KITZ, consisting
of 1 start bit 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 5 of 16
Although Courier and IEC-870 both have inherent error detection, the parity
checking on each individual character in the 11-bit frame provides additional
security and is a requirement of IEC870 in order to meet the error rate levels it
guarantees. It is therefore recommended that modems should be used which
support these 11-bit frames.
The following modem has been evaluated for use with the full IEC870 ft1.2
protocol and is recommended for use:
Motorola Codex 3265 or 3265 Fast
Other modems may be used provided that the following features are available ;
refer to the modem documentation for details on setting these features:
- Support for an 11 bit frame (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 even parity bit and 1
stop bit). This feature is not required if the 10-bit frame format is chosen.
- Facility to disable all error correction, data compression, speed buffering or
automatic speed changes.
- It must be possible to save all the settings required to achieve a connection
in non-volatile memory. This feature is only required for modems at the
outstation end of the link.
Notes:
1. The V23 asymmetric data rate (1200/75bits/s) is not supported
2. Modems made by Hayes do not support 11 bit characters.
SECTION 4. DATA FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION
4.1 Differences between K Range series 1 and series 2 relays

As far as system integration is concerned there should be little difference between
relays from series 1 and series 2. However, the following should be noted:
Changing the communication address is now password protected for added
security and to change the address the password must first be entered. This does
not apply to the auto-addressing facility available within the Courier language that
will apply the next available address on the bus to a relay set to address 0, nor the
new address feature that allows a relay to be directly addressed by serial number
sent to the global address 255. Both auto-addressing and direct addressing by
serial number are supported by PAS&T, but direct addressing by serial number is
also supported by Courier Access.
Measurement functions retain their original cell references and some additional
measurements will be available on the K Range series 2 relays.
The data under fault records has been rearranged to enable five full fault records
to be stored. The menu cell references for these have changed and reference
should be made to Chapter 3, Section 6 for the new cell locations. A notable
change is that the circuit breaker operation time which was stored in menu cell
0109 is now to be found in menu cell 010B.
Additional input masks and output masks have also been generated for the new
functions and this has resulted in them being renumbered.
Software function links have been added for the new functions and they must be
set to “1” in order to select the new features. Previously these links were unused
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 6 of 16
and hence set to “0” by default. The functions of some existing links have been
changed. Reference should be made to the logic diagrams to determine how they
should be set for series 2 relays.
Application setting files for series 1 relays will require some modification before
they can be used with series 2 relays.
4.2 Relay address
The relay can have any address from 1 to 254 inclusive. Address 255 is the
global address that all relays, or other slave devices, respond to. The Courier
protocol specifies that no reply shall be issued by a slave device in response to a
global message. This is to prevent all devices responding and causing contention
on the bus.
Each relay is supplied with its address set to 255 to ensure that when connected to
an operational network it will not have a conflicting address with another device
that is already operational. To make the new device fully operational it must have
its address set. The address can be changed manually by entering the password
and changing the address by the setting change method via the user interface on
the front of the relay.
Alternatively, if the software running on the PC supports auto-addressing, the relay
address can be set to 0 and the auto-addressing feature of the PC software turned
on. The relay will then be automatically set to the next available address on the
bus. PAS&T software supports both these features.
If the address is 255, or unknown, the device address can be changed by sending
a new address, in a global message, to a device with a particular serial number.
This method (supported by PAS&T, Courier Access and CourierCom) is useful for
devices that are not provided with a user interface with which to read or change
the current address.
4.3 Measured values
Any measured value can be extracted periodically by polling the relay. Measured
values are stored in the same menu locations in the KCGG/KCEG relays and the
KMPC measurement centre.
4.4 Status word
A status byte is contained in every reply from a slave device. This is returned by
the relay at the start of every message to signal important data on which the
master station may be designed to respond automatically.
The flags contained are:
Bit 0 – 1 = Disturbance record available for collection
Bit 1 – 1 = Plant status word changed
Bit 2 – 1 = Control status word changed
Bit 3 – 1 = Relay busy, cannot complete reply in time
Bit 4 – 1 = Relay out of service
Bit 5 – 1 = Event record available for retrieval
Bit 6 – 1 = Alarm LED lit
Bit 7 – 1 = Trip LED lit
Bits 7 and 8 are used to mimic the trip and alarm indication on the frontplate of
the slave devices. They cannot be used to extract fault and alarm information from
a slave device because they cannot be guaranteed to be set for a long enough
period to be identified.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 7 of 16
Bits 5 and 0 enable the master station to respond automatically and extract event
records and disturbance records, if they are so programmed.
4.5 Plant status word
The plant status word can be found at menu location 000C and each pair of bits
in the plant status word is used to indicate the status (position) of items of plant
controlled via the relay.
Only the circuit breaker can be controlled via the relays described in this service
manual and the associated bits in the plant status word are defined as follows:
Bit 1 Bit 0 – Circuit breaker 1
0 0 – No CB connected (auxiliary CB1 contacts faulty)
0 1 – CB1 open
1 0 – CB1 closed
1 1 – Auxiliary CB1 contacts or wiring faulty
Bit 8 Bit 9 – Circuit breaker 2
0 0 – No CB connected (auxiliary CB2 contacts faulty)
0 1 – CB2 open
1 0 – CB2 closed
1 1 – Auxiliary CB2 contacts or wiring faulty
The master PAS&T control unit software makes use of this information to generate a
table of all the circuit breakers and isolators that can be controlled and to show
their current status.
To make this information available to the master control unit it is necessary to
allocate a logic input that will be energised when the circuit breaker is closed in
input mask [0A0E CB CLOSED IND] and one that is energised when the circuit
breaker is open in input mask [0A0F CB OPEN IND]. Bits 0 and 1 will then
indicate the position of the circuit breaker.
If the circuit breaker can be racked into one of two positions, such that it can be
connected to busbar 1 or busbar 2, then a third logic input that will be energised
when the circuit breaker is connected to busbar 2 must be assigned in the input
mask [0A10 CB BUS 2]. The circuit breaker open/closed states will then be
transferred to bits 8 and 9 when the circuit breaker is in position for connecting the
feeder to busbar 2. The circuit breaker can then be controlled with the appropriate
open and close commands.
4.6 Control status word
The control status word will be found in menu cell 000D. It is used to transfer
control information from the slave device to the master control unit. However, the
relays described in this manual are protection relays and this feature is not used.
4.7 Logic input status word
The status of the logic control inputs can be observed by polling menu cell 0020,
where the lowest 8 bits of the returned value indicates the status of each of the 8
logic inputs. This cell is read only.
4.8 Output relay status word
The status of the output relays can be observed by polling menu cell 0021, where
the lowest 8 bits of the returned value indicates the status of each of the 8 output
relays. This cell is read only.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 8 of 16
4.9 Alarm indications

The status of the internal alarms produced by the relays self test routine can be
observed by polling menu cell 0022, where the lowest 7 bits of the returned value
indicate the status of each of the alarms. Bit 6 can be set/reset, in order to test the
watchdog relay. No other control actions are possible on this cell.
Bit 0 Error in factory configuration detected (relay inoperative)
Bit 1 Error in calibration detected (relay running in uncalibrated state)
Bit 2 Error detected in storage settings (relay operationsal, check settings)
Bit 3 No service (protection out of service)
Bit 4 No samples (A/D converter not sampling)
Bit 5 No Fourier (Fourier routine not being performed)
Bit 6 Test watchdog (set to 1 to test and rest to 0 afterwards)
4.10 Event records
An event may be a change of state of a control input or an output relay. It may be
a setting that has been changed locally or a protection or control function that has
performed its intended function. A total of 50 events may be stored in a buffer,
each with an associated time tag. This time tag is the value of a timer counter that
is incremented every 1ms.
The event records can only be accessed via the serial communication port when
the relay is connected to a suitable master station. When the relay is not connected
to a master station the event records can still be extracted within certain limitations:
- The event records can only be read via the serial communication port and a
K-Bus/IEC870-5 interface unit will be required to enable the serial port to be
connected to an IBM or compatible PC. Suitable software will be required to
run on the PC so that the records can be extracted.
- When the event buffer becomes full the oldest record is overwritten by the
next event.
- Records are deleted when the auxiliary supply to the relay is removed, to
ensure that the buffer does not contain invalid data. Dual powered relays
are most likely to be affected.
- The time tag will be valid for 49 days assuming that the auxiliary supply has
not been lost within that time. However, there may be an error of ±4.3s in
every 24 hour period due to the accuracy limits of the crystal. This is not a
problem when a master station is on line as the relays will usually be polled
once every second or so.
The contents of the event record are documented in Chapter 5, Section 5.
4.11 Notes on recorded times
As described in Chapter 5, Section 5.2, the event records are appended with the
value of a 1 millisecond counter and the current value of the counter is appended
to the start of each reply form a relay. Thus it is possible to calculate how long ago
the event took place and subtract this from the current value of the real time clock
in the PC.
If transmission is to be over a modem there will be additional delays in the
communication path. In which case the KITZ can be selected to append the real
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 9 of 16
time at which the message was sent and this value can then be used in the
conversion of the time tags. With this method of time tagging, the time tags for all
relays on K-Bus will be accurate, relative to each other, regardless of the accuracy
of the relay time clock.
See also Chapter 5, Section 6.6 for additional information on time tagging
accuracy.
4.12 Protection flags
The protection flags hold the status of the various protection elements in the relay
and it is from these that the fault flags are generated. They are transmitted in the
event records as part of a fault record and this is the only way they can be
accessed.
The following table lists the protection flags:
Bit position Hexadecimal mask Protection function
0 0x00000001L PhA lowset trip
1 0x00000002L PhB lowset trip
2 0x00000004L PhC lowset trip
3 0x00000008L E/F lowset trip
4 0x00000010L PhA 1st highset trip
5 0x00000020L PhB 1st highset trip
6 0x00000040L PhC 1st highset trip
7 0x00000080L E/F 1st highset trip
8 0x00000100L PhA 2nd highset trip
9 0x00000200L PhB 2nd highset trip
10 0x00000400L PhC 2nd highset trip
11 0x00000800L E/F 2nd highset trip
12 0x00001000L PhA lowset forward/normal start
13 0x00002000L PhB lowset forward/normal start
14 0x00004000L PhC lowset forward/normal start
15 0x00008000L E/F lowset forward/normal start
16 0x00010000L PhA lowset reverse start
17 0x00020000L PhB lowset reverse start
18 0x00040000L PhC lowset reverse start
19 0x00080000L E/F lowset reverse start
20 0x00100000L Thermal overload
21 0x00200000L Phase undercurrent trip
22 0x00400000L Undervoltage trip
23 0x00800000L Manual remote CB trip
24 0x01000000L AUX1 trip
25 0x02000000L AUX2 trip
26 0x04000000L AUX3 trip
27 0x08000000L Manual remote CB close
28 0x10000000L Breaker fail trip
29 0x20000000L Trip occurred in GROUP 2 settings
30 0x40000000L E/F Undercurrent trip
31 0x80000000L Thermal overload alarm
This 32 bit word can be found in packet #4 of the event record as the menu cell
value. A decoded text form can be found in packet #3 as the ASCIIText Description
of the event (refer to Courier User Manual). The value can be decoded to establish
which elements were operated at the time of the event. The bit position is identical
for K Range series 1 and series 2 relays with the exception of following bits:
- Bit 20 for series 1 relays indicated cold load start; for series 2 relays this
function is transferred to AUX3 and bit 20 now indicates operation of the
thermal overload element.
- Bit 31 for series 1 relays was not used. For series 2 relays bit 31 indicates
the operation of the thermal overload alarm element.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 10 of 16
4.13 Fault records

Although fault records are stored in the event records and they may be extracted in
this way, it may be necessary in some instances to extract the fault records directly.
To do this, the record number must be first entered in menu cell 0101 so that the
correct fault record can be extracted. Fn is the record for the last fault; Fn-1 is the
previous fault record and Fn-4 is the oldest record. Then the values for menu
column 01 should be requested.
The Courier User Guide gives the detailed commands associated with these
functions.
4.14 Disturbance records
The procedure for setting up the disturbance recorder in the relays, is fully
described in Chapter 5, Section 6 of this manual. If the extraction of these records
is to be incorporated in some bespoke software program reference should be
made to the Courier User Guide for the relevant commands that are necessary to
extract the records.
It is recommended that all such records are stored in a Comtrade format to enable
commercially available programs to use the files. Comtrade includes minimum and
maximum values for each analogue chanel. In all K Range relays these are 0 and
32767.
SECTION 5. SETTING CONTROL
Control functions via a K Range relay can be performed over the serial
communication link. They include change of individual relay settings, change of
setting groups, remote control of the circuit breaker, and operation and latching
selected output relays.
Remote control is restricted to those functions that have been selected in the relays
menu table and the selection cannot be changed without entering the password.
CRC and message length checks are used on each message received. No
response is given for received messages with a detected error. The master station
can be set to resend a command a set number of times if it does not receive a
reply or receives a reply with a detected error.
Note: Control commands are generally performed by changing the value
of a cell and are actioned by the setting change procedure, as
described in Chapter 6, 3.1, and have the same inherent security.
No replies are permitted for global commands as these would cause
contention on the bus; instead a double send is used for verification
of the message by the relay for this type of command. Confirmation
that a control command, or setting change, has been accepted is
issued by the relay and an error message is returned when it is
rejected.
The command to change setting group does not give an error
message when the group 2 settings are disabled unless link SD3=0
to inhibit response to a remote setting group change commands.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 11 of 16
5.1 Remote setting change

The relay will only respond to setting change commands via the serial port if link
SD0=1. Setting SD0=0 inhibits all remote setting changes with the exception of the
SD software links and the password entry. Thus, with link SD0=0, remote setting
changes are password protected.
To change them, the password must be remotely entered and the function link SD
function link SD0 set to “1” to enable remote setting changes. When all setting
changes have been made, set link SD0=0 to restore password protection to remote
setting changes.
5.2 Remote control of setting group
The setting group selection is fully described in Chapter 4, Section 12.1 including
the remote control of this function. Group 2 must be activated before it can be
selected by setting software link SD4=1. Set link SD3=1 to enable the relay to
respond to change setting group commands, via the serial port to select group 2
and set SD4=1 to inhibit this function.
If the remote setting changes have been selected to have password protection, as
described in Section 5.1, then it can also be applied to the remote setting group
selection as follows. Set link SD3=0 to inhibit remote setting changes, then set link
SD0=1 to enable remote setting changes and set link LOG8=1. The group 2
settings will then be in operation and setting link SD0=0 will restore the password
protection.
If conventional SCADA has an output relay assigned to select the alternative setting
group then it may be used to energise a logic input assigned in the input mask
[0A0D STG GRP 2]. In this case set link SD3=0.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 12 of 16
SECTION 6. REMOTE OPERATION OF OUTPUT RELAYS
K Range series 2 relays respond to the load shed by level Courier commands.
These were intended to be used to control the load shedding control of
conventional voltage regulating relays and can of course still be used for that
purpose. However, it also provides a way of remotely operating and latching
selected output relays. In the following example it is assumed that relays are
allocated in the load shedding output masks as follows:
RLY0 assigned in [0B14 LEVEL 1]
The following truth table then applies:
Command RLY 0 RLY 1 RLY 3
Load shed to level 0 0 0 0
If the relays are assigned as follows :
RLY0, RLY1 & RLY2 assigned in [0B16 LEVEL 3]
The truth table would read:
Command RLY 0 RLY 1 RLY 3
The relays will retain their selected state until a new command is received. The
settings will be stored when the relay is powered-down and restored again on
power-up. This allows these particular outputs to be used to select other functions
such as block sensitive earth fault, or inhibit instantaneous low set overcurrent
elements.
SECTION 7. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
To set-up the relay for circuit breaker control, relay RLY7 must be assigned in output
mask [0B0D CB TRIP] and RLY6 in output mask [0B0E CB CLOSE]. Some circuit
breakers require the closing pulse to be interrupted when a trip command is issued
during the closing sequence, such as when closing onto a fault. This is to prevent
pumping of the circuit breaker, ie. reclosing again when the trip signal is
terminated, and it can be arranged by setting link LOG9 = 1. Some other types of
circuit breaker require the close pulse to be maintained and to achieve this, set link
LOG9 = 0.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 13 of 16
Block start
0A0 L TRIP
0B0 CB TRIP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ≥1
SD tTRIP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Trip circuit breaker
1
0B0 CB
0A0 L CLOSE Close circuit breaker ≥1 tCLOSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset
LOG9
0
≥1 1
LOG2
0A0 EXT. TRIP 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
≥1 I< ≥1 0B0 CB FAIL
tBF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RLY3 Io<
LOG Generate circuit breaker

0 ≥1 maintenance records
1
RLY7
LOG Latch flags
0 ≥1 Generate fault records and
1 I> ≥1 Copy to events records
Io>
Figure 2. Circuit breaker control logic

7.1 Remote control of circuit breaker
Set link SD2=1 to enable remote control of the circuit breaker. The ACCESS,
PAS&T, or other suitable program that supports this feature can then be used to
perform the remote control of this plant item. When using PAS&T, logic inputs must
be assigned in input masks [0A0E CB CLOSED IND] and [0A0F CB OPEN IND]
to indicate the status of the circuit breaker so that a table of circuit breakers and
their status can be generated. If the circuit breaker can be racked into an
alternative position, such that it can then be connected to busbar 2 instead of
busbar 1, then a logic input must be assigned in mask [0A10 CB BUS2] if this
information is required to be displayed by PAS&T.
Password protection for remote circuit breaker control can be applied as follows.
Set link SD2=0 to inhibit remote changes. To make a remote change, enter the
password, set link SD2=1, and send the command to control the circuit breaker.
Then to re-establish password protection set link SD2=0 again.
7.2 Local control of the circuit breaker
If local controls are routed to the circuit breaker via the logic inputs assigned in
masks [0A07 Ltrip] and [0A08 Lclose], the circuit breaker maintenance records
will be updated for local control of the circuit breaker. In this case it will be the
action of relay RLY7 operating that causes the record to be incremented as
described in Chapter 5, Section 4.1.
7.3 Safe manual closing of the circuit breaker
There have been instances of injury to personnel when closing a circuit breaker
onto a fault. So, from a health and safety point of view, it is sometimes considered
necessary to manually close the circuit breaker from a safe distance. This is
particularly important, when the autoreclose has locked-out, or after maintenance
on the primary plant when temporary earth clamps may have been left connected.
If the closure of the circuit breaker is routed via the KCGG/KCEG relay, any of the
following procedures may be considered:
7.3.1 Closing the circuit breaker via the serial communication port
If the serial port of the relay has no connections made to it, then the terminals 54
and 56 can be connected to a jack plug on the front of the panel. To close the
circuit breaker from a safe distance it is then only necessary to plug in an
extension lead and connect it to a laptop computer. The circuit breaker can then
be closed as described in Section 7.1.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 14 of 16
7.3.2 Closing the circuit breaker via a lead mounted push-button

A spare logic input of the relay can be wired, via the field voltage supply of the
relay, to a plug that is mounted on the panel of the cubicle. In this case a jack plug
is not advised because the two terminals may be temporarily short circuited when
the plug is being inserted. This logic input is then assigned in the input mask
[0A08 Lclose].
To operate the circuit breaker an extension lead is plugged into the socket and a
lead mounted push-button at the other end is then pressed to initiate a pulse of
fixed duration to close the circuit breaker. For extra security, one of the auxiliary
timers may be connected in the control path, so that the push-button has to be
pressed for the set time of the timer before the circuit breaker will close.
7.3.3 Delayed manual closure of the circuit breaker
If auxiliary timer tAUX3 is not being used for some other purpose and either tAUX1
or tAUX2 is also available then proceed as follows:
1. Set link LOGB = 1 to give tAUX3 a delay on drop-off.
2. Allocate an output relay in mask [0B12 AUX3] and connect its contact to a
spare logic input.
3. Assign this logic input in input mask [0A0A AUX1] to start tAUX1 or [0A0C
AUX2] to start tAUX2.
4. Assign an output relay in mask [0B10 AUX1] or [0B11 AUX2] depending
on the timer to be used.
5. Energise a logic input via the contact of this output relay and assign it in
input mask [0A08 Lclose] to initiate the closing pulse.
6. Allocate a logic input in mask [0A0C AUX3] and arrange for this to be
energised via a switch (preferably a key switch) that is spring loaded in the
off position.
When the initiating switch is closed momentarily timer tAUX3 will pick-up its output
relay which will remain picked-up for the set time of tAUX3. Timer tAUX1 (or
tAUX2) will be picked up by the output relay assigned to tAUX3 and when it times
out it will pick-up a relay that triggers the close pulse via the Lclose input. The time
setting for tAUX1 (ortAUX2) should be the required delay and tAUX3 should be set
2 seconds longer. When tAUX3 times out the circuit resets.
The close sequence can be interrupted by breaking the link, from the output of
tAUX3 to the logic input initiating tAUX1 (or tAUX2, whichever is being used), with
a push-button or an alternative position on the key switch. Note that these timers
have very wide setting ranges and that the delay is in the order of 20 to 30
seconds only.
Where no auxiliary timers are available the close pulse could be initiated by
energising a logic input assigned in the input mask [0A08 Lclose] via a push
button connected via a twisted pair of wires of sufficient length. If an auxiliary
timer is available and is connected in the initiating path it would add to the
security.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 15 of 16
SECTION 8. AIDS TO CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE
The information gathered by the relay can be of assistance in determining the need
for circuit breaker maintenance. The circuit breaker opening time is recorded
under FAULT RECORDS. If this value is monitored, any significant increase may be
used as an indication that circuit breaker maintenance is required.
Additionally the number of circuit breaker operations is recorded under
MEASUREMENTS (2). An indication of the summated contact breaking duty which
is recorded separately for each phase will also be found under this heading.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 16 of 16
Chapter 7
Technical Data
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. RATINGS 1
1.1 Inputs 1
1.2 Outputs 1
2. BURDENS 2
2.1 Current circuits 2
2.2 Reference voltage 2
2.3 Auxiliary voltage 3
2.4 Opto-isolated inputs 3
3. OVERCURRENT SETTING RANGES 3
3.1 Auxiliary powered relays 3
3.2 Dual powered relays 3
4. TIME SETTING RANGES 4
4.1 Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) 4
4.2 Definite independent time 5
4.3 Auxiliary time delays 5
5. OTHER PROTECTION SETTINGS 5
5.1 Directional 5
5.2 Thermal 5
5.3 Undervoltage 5
5.4 Underfrequency 6
5.5 Ratios 6
6. MEASUREMENT (DISPLAYED) 6
7. ACCURACY 6
7.1 Reference conditions 6
7.2 Current 6
7.3 Time delays 7
7.4 Directional 7
7.5 Thermal 7
7.6 Undervoltage 7
7.7 Under frequency 7
7.8 Auxiliary timers 8
7.9 Measurements 8
8. INFLUENCING QUANTITIES 8
8.1 Ambient temperature 8
8.2 Frequency 8
8.2.1 With frequency tracking 8
8.2.2 Without frequency tracking (KCGG 122, KCEG 112) 8
8.3 Auxiliary supply 9
8.4 System X/R 9
9. OPTO-ISOLATED INPUTS 9
10. Output relays 10
10.1 Output relays 0 to 7 10
10.2 Watchdog 10
11. OPERATION INDICATOR 10
12. COMMUNICATION PORT 10
13. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 11
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
14. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND 11

14.1 Dielectric withstand IEC 255-5: 1977 11
14.2 High voltage impulse IEC 255-5: 1977 12
14.3 Insulation resistance IEC 255-5: 1977 12
14.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 255-22-1: 1988 12
14.5 Fast transient IEC 255-22-4: 1992 12
14.6 EMC compliance 12
14.7 Electrostatic discharge test IEC 255-22-2: 1996 12
15. IEEE/ANSI SPECIFICATIONS 12
15.1 Standard for relay systems associated with electrical power
apparatus 12
15.2 Surge withstand capability 12
15.3 Radio electromagnetic interference 12
16. ENVIRONMENTAL 12
16.1 Temperature IEC 255-6:1988 12
16.2 Humidity IEC 68-2-3: 1969 12
16.3 Enclosure protection IEC 529: 1989 13
16.4 Vibration IEC 255-21-1: 1988 13
16.5 Shock and bump IEC 255-21-2: 1988 13
16.6 Seismic IEC 255-21-3: 1993 13
17. MODEL NUMBERS 13
18. FREQUENCY RESPONSE 15
18.1 Transient overreach 16
18.2 Peak measurement 16
18.3 Frequency response of directional elements 17
Figure 1. Response of Fourier filtering 15

Figure 2. Response when frequency tracking 16
Figure 3. Frequency response when relay responds to both peak
and Fourier values 17
K-SERIES 2 Chapter 7
Overcurrent and Directional Overcurrent Relays Page 1 of 20
SECTION 1. RATINGS
1.1 Inputs
Current input Rated (In) Continuous 3s 1s
(In) (A) (xIn) (xIn) (A)
Auxiliary powered 1 3.2 30 100
5 3.2 30 400
Dual powered 1 2.4 30 100
5 2.4 30 400
Voltage input Rated (Vn) Continuous 10s

(Line) (V) (xVn) (xVn)
110 4 5.4
440 2 2.6
Operative range
Auxiliary voltage Rated voltage DC supply AC supply Crest
(Vx) (V) (V) (V) (V)
Auxiliary powered 24-125 19-150 50-133 190
48-250 33-300 87-265 380
Dual powered 100-250 60-300 60-265 380
Frequency Nominal rating Operative range

(Fn) (Hz) (Hz)
Frequency tracking 50 or 60 45-65
Non-tracking 50 47-52.5
Non tracking 60 57-63
Rating Off state On state

(Vdc) (Vdc) (Vdc)
Logic inputs 50 ≤ 12 ≥ 35
1.2 Outputs
Field Voltage 48V dc (Current limited to 60mA)
Capacitor Trip 50V dc (680µF capacitor - Energy = 0.85J)
SECTION 2. BURDENS
2.1 Current circuits
Auxiliary powered Phase Earth Conditions

In = 1A 0.06 0.06 ohms at In
In = 1A 0.06 0.06 ohms at 30In
In = 5A 0.006 0.006 ohms at In
In = 5A 0.006 0.006 ohms at 30In
Dual powered Phase Earth

In=1A 0.58 2.7 ohms at 0.5In for Vx =110V
0.45 2.3 ohms at 1.0In for Vx = 110V
0.37 2.0 ohms at 2.0In for Vx = 110V
0.33 1.9 ohms at 5.0In for Vx = 110V
0.31 1.9 ohms at 10In for Vx = 110V
In=1A 8.1 27.3 ohms at 0.5In for Vx = 0V
5.4 11.4 ohms at 1.0In for Vx = 0V
0.027 0.088 ohms at 1.0In for Vx = 110V
0.024 0.078 ohms at 2.0In for Vx = 110V
0.022 0.072 ohms at 5.0In for Vx = 110V
0.021 0.071 ohms at 10In for Vx = 110V
0.021 0.069 ohms at 20In for Vx = 110V
0.021 0.062 ohms at 30In for Vx = 110V
0.220 0.454 ohms at 1.0In for Vx = 0V
0.091 0.207 ohms at 2.0In for Vx = 0V
0.037 0.103 ohms at 5.0In for Vx = 0V
0.026 0.078 ohms at 10In for Vx = 0V
0.022 0.073 ohms at 20In for Vx = 0V
0.021 0.070 ohms at 30In for Vx = 0V
2.2 Reference voltage
Vn = 110V 0.02VA @ 110V phase/neutral

Vn = 440V 0.08VA @ 110V phase/neutral
2.3 Auxiliary voltage

DC supply 2.5 – 6.0W at Vx max with no output relays or logic inputs energized
4.0 – 8.0W at Vx max with 2 output relays & 2 logic inputs energized
5.5 – 12W at Vx max with all output relays & logic inputs energized
AC supply 6.0 – 12VA at Vx max with no output relays or logic inputs energized
6.0 – 14VA at Vx max with 2 output relays & 2 logic inputs energized
13 – 23VA at Vx max with all output relays & logic inputs energized
2.4 Opto-isolated inputs
DC supply 0.25W per input (50V 10kΩ)
SECTION 3. OVERCURRENT SETTING RANGES
3.1 Auxiliary powered relays
Threshold (Is) Step size

Phase fault I> 0.08 – 3.2In 0.01In
I>> 0.08 – 32In 0.01In
I>>> 0.08 – 32In 0.01In
I< 0.02 – 3.2In 0.01In
Standard earth fault Io> 0.005 – 0.8In 0.0025In
Io>> 0.005 – 8.0In 0.0025In
Io>>> 0.005 – 8.0In 0.0025In
Io< 0.005 – 0.8In 0.0025In
Special earth fault Io> 0.02 – 3.2In 0.01In
Io>> 0.02 – 32In 0.01In
Io>>> 0.02 – 32In 0.01In
Io< 0.02 – 3.2In 0.01In
Reset General 0.95Is
3.2 Dual powered relays
Threshold (Is) Step size

Phase fault I> 0.4 – 2.4In 0.01In
I>> 0.4 – 32In 0.01In
I>>> 0.4 – 32In 0.01In
I< 0.02 – 2.4In 0.01In
Standard earth fault Io> 0.005 – 0.6In 0.0025In
Io>> 0.005 – 8.0In 0.0025In
Io>>> 0.005 – 8.0In 0.0025In
Io< 0.005 – 0.6In 0.0025In
Special earth fault Io> 0.02 – 2.4In 0.01In

Io>> 0.02 – 32In 0.01In
Io>>> 0.02 – 32In 0.01In
Io< 0.02 – 2.4In 0.01In
Reset General 0.95Is
Note: Operation is not guaranteed for earth faults below 0.2In, regardless
of the actual setting, when the load current is below 0.4In and the
auxiliary voltage is not available. See also the special application
notes for dual powered relays and the table in Chapter 4,
Section13.3 regarding the maximum number of outputs and inputs
that may be energized at any one time.
SECTION 4. TIME SETTING RANGES
4.1 Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)

Nine inverse reset time characteristics are available and the general mathematical
expression for the curves is:
k
t = TMS I a -1 + c seconds
Is
where TMS = Time Multiplier (0.025 to 1.5 in 0.025 steps)

I = Fault current
Is = Overcurrent setting
k, c, a = Constants specifying curve
Curve Description Name IEC k c a

0 Definite Time DT - 0 0 to 100 1
1 Standard Inverse SI 30xDT A 0.14 0 0.02
2 Very Inverse VI 30xDT B 13.5 0 1
3 Extremely Inverse EI 10xDT C 80 0 2
4 Long Time Inverse LTI 30xDT - 120 0 1
5 Moderately Inverse MI (IEEE/ANSI) D 0.103 0.228 0.02
6 Very Inverse VI (IEEE/ANSI) E 39.22 0.982 2
7 Extremely Inverse EI (IEEE/ANSI) F 56.4 0.243 2
8 Short Time Inverse STI 30xDT - 0.05 0 0.04
9 Rectifier Protection RECT - 45900 0 5.6
Although the curves tend to infinity at the setting current value (Is), the guaranteed
minimum operation current is 1.05Is ±0.05Is for all inverse characteristic curves,
except curve 10 for which the minimum operating current is 1.6Is ±0.05Is (see
section on rectifier protection).
Curves numbers 1, 2, 4, and 8 become definite time for currents in excess of

30xIs. Curve 3 becomes definite time for currents above 10xIs to give extra time
grading steps at high current levels. Curves 1, 2 and 3 are curves A, B and C in
IEC255-3.
Curves 5, 6 and 7 are slightly different in that they tend to a definite operating
time given by the constant (a) at high fault levels. Curves 5, 6 and 7 were
proposed by IEEE/ANSI, for inclusion in the IEC standard IEC255-3, as curves D,
E and F.
4.2 Definite independent time
Setting range Step size
to>/t> Definite time 0 to 100s 0.01s
tRESET Definite time 0 to 60s 0.1s
to>>/t>> Definite time 0 to 100s 0.01s
to>>>/t>>> Definite time 0 to 10s 0.01s
4.3 Auxiliary time delays
Setting range Step size
tV> Definite time 0 to 10s 0.01s
tAUX1 Definite time 0 to 28 days 0.01s min - graded
tBF Definite time 0 to 10s 0.01s
tTRIP Definite time 0.5 to 5s 0.1s
tCLOSE Definite time 0.5 to 5s 0.1s
SECTION 5. OTHER PROTECTION SETTINGS
5.1 Directional
Characteristic angle (Øc) –180°.....0°.....+180°

Operating boundary fc ±90°
Voltage threshold Vp> 0.6V for Vn = 0V
2.4V for Vn = 440V
Voltage threshold Vop> 0.6V to 80V - step 0.2V for Vn = 110V
2.4V to 320V - step 0.8V for Vn = 440V
5.2 Thermal
Time Constant 1 to 120 minutes - step 1 minute

Current Rating Ith> 0.08In to 3.2In - step 0.01In
5.3 Undervoltage
Undervoltage (V<) 0 to 220V for Vn = 110V

0 to 880V for Vn = 440V
5.4 Underfrequency
Under frequency (F<) 46 to 64Hz step 0.01Hz

Reset F<+0.05Hz
5.5 Ratios
CT ratios 9999 : 1 Default = 1 : 1
VT ratios 9999 : 1 Default = 1 : 1
SECTION 6. MEASUREMENT (DISPLAYED)
Voltage (0 – 327) x VT ratio volts phase/neutral

Current (0 – 64)In x CT ratio amps per phase
Power (0 – 9.999)x1021 W
VAr (0 – 9.999)x1021 VAr
VA (0 – 9.999)x1021 VA
CB Operations (0 – 65535)
Current2 broken (0 – 9.999)x1021 A2 (or A)
Frequency 45 – 65 (or 0 ) Hz
SECTION 7. ACCURACY
7.1 Reference conditions
Ambient temperature 20°C

Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz (whichever is set)
Time multiplier setting 1.0
Auxiliary voltage 24V to 125V (auxiliary powered)
48V to 250V (auxiliary powered)
100V to 250V (dual powered)
Fault Position Within ±80 ° of the RCA where appropriate.
7.2 Current
Undercurrent Minimum operation ±10% (> 4 x minimum setting)

±20% (< 4 x minimum setting)
Overcurrent Minimum operation ±5%
Reset ±5%
Repeatability ±2.5%
Earth Fault Minimum operation ±20% (@ minimum setting)
±10% (@2x minimum setting)
±5% (@ >4x minimum setting)
7.3 Time delays
Reference
range
Operating time IDMT except (EI) ±5% + (20 to 40)ms 2Is to 30Is
and (Rectifier)
(t>/to>) Extremely inv (EI) ±7.5% + (20 to 40)ms 2Is to 10Is
Rectifier ±7.5% + (20 to 40)ms 2Is to 5Is
Definite time ±0.5% + (20 to 40)ms 3Is to 30Is
Repeatability Inverse time ±2% ±40ms
Definite time ±0.5% or10ms
Overshoot time Less than 50ms when current reduced to zero.
Reset time Definite time ±1% ±50ms
t>/to>
Disengagement I< typically 35ms
I>/Io> typically 30ms
t>/to> typically 30ms*
t>>/to>> typically 50ms*
t>>>/to>>> typically 50ms*
*Minimum dwell disengagement time is affected if measuring circuit resets
within 100ms of pick-up. For further information see
Chapter 3, Section 5.6.
7.4 Directional
Characteristic angle Øc ±2°

Operating boundary Øc ±90° accuracy ±2°
PU – DO differential less than 3° (typically <1°)
Polarizing voltage (Vp>) ±10% (at Øc ±80°)
Polarizing voltage (Vop>) ±10% (at Øc ±80°)
7.5 Thermal
Thermal (Ith>) Minimum operation ±5%

Operation Time ±2% of TC from 1.2Ith> to 5Ith>
7.6 Undervoltage
Undervoltage (V<) ±10% (at Øc< ±80°)

Undervoltage delay (tV<) ±0.5%+(50 to 70)ms
7.7 Under frequency
Under frequency (F<) ±0.02Hz from 46Hz to 64Hz

7.8 Auxiliary timers

Operating time Set time ±0.5%(set time)+(15 to 35)ms
Disengagement time 0 to 10ms (for timers alone)
15 to 30ms (including output relays and opto-inputs)
Breaker Fail Timer tBF ±0.5% or ±10ms
7.9 Measurements
Voltage ±2%Vn (typical) - Reference range = 1 to 320 V
Current ±2%In (typical) - Reference range = setting range
Power ±2%Pn (typical)
VAr ±2%Pn (typical)
VA ±2%Pn (typical)
Frequency (45-65Hz) ±0.02Hz (typical)
SECTION 8. INFLUENCING QUANTITIES
8.1 Ambient temperature

Operative range –25°C to +55°C
Current settings ±1%
Voltage settings ±0.03% per °C
Operation times ±1%
Angle measurement <2°
8.2 Frequency
8.2.1 With frequency tracking
Operative range 46 to 65Hz
Current setting ±1%
Earth fault settings ±20% @ minimum setting
±10% @ 2x minimum setting
±5% @ 4x minimum setting or above.
Voltage settings ±1%
Operating times ±1%
8.2.2 Without frequency tracking (KCGG 122 KCEG 112)
Reference range 47 to 5Hz or 57 to 61Hz
Earth fault settings ±20% @ minimum setting
±10% @ 2x minimum setting
±5% @ 4x minimum setting or above.
Operating times ±2%
8.3 Auxiliary supply

Nominal Operative range
24/125V 19 to 150V dc (aux powered)
50 to 133V ac (aux powered)
48/250V 33 to 300V dc (aux powered)
87 to 265V ac (aux powered)
100/250V 60 to 300V dc (dual powered)
60 to 265V ac (dual powered)
Current settings ±0.5%
Voltage settings ±0.5%
Operation times ±0.5%
Angle measurement ±0.5°
8.4 System X/R
Transient overreach <5%
Effect upon directional characteristics
Effect upon Operating Times (fault 45° from RCA)
<40ms (X/R < 30, I ≥ 5Is)
<75ms (X/R ≤ 90, I ≥ 5Is)
Minimum protection time delay for directional stability (fault 45° from RCA)
40ms (X/R ≤ 15, I ≤ 40In)
Additional time delay incurred for forward direction fault (45° from RCA)
≤60ms (X/R ≤ 5, I ≤16In)
≤100ms (X/R ≤ 15, I ≤ 40In)
SECTION 9. OPTO-ISOLATED INPUTS
Capture time 12.5 ±2.5ms at 50Hz

10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz
Release time 12.5 ±2.5ms at 50Hz
10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz
Minimum operating voltage >35V dc
Maximum operating voltage 50Vdc
Input resistance 10kΩ
(add 12kΩ for every additional 50V in
excess of 50V)
Maximum series lead resistance 2kΩ for single input at 40V min.
1kΩ for 2 inputs in parallel at 40V min.
0.5kΩ for 4 inputs in parallel at 40V min.
Maximum ac induced loop voltage 50V rms (thermal limit)
Maximum capacitance coupled
ac voltage 250V rms via 0.1µF
SECTION 10. OUTPUT RELAYS
10.1 Output relays 0 to 7

Type 1 make
Rating Make 30A and carry for 0.2s
Carry 5A continuous
Break DC – 50W resistive
25W inductive (L/R = 0.04s)
AC – 1250VA (maxima of 5A)
Subject to maxima of 5A and 300V
10.2 Watchdog
Type 1 make + 1 break
Rating Make 10A and carry for 0.2s
Carry 5A continuous
Break DC – 30W resistive
DC – 15W inductive (L/R = 0.04s)
AC – 1250VA (maxima of 5A)
Subject to a maxima of 5A and 300V
Durability >10,000 operations
SECTION 11. OPERATION INDICATOR
3 light emitting diodes – internally powered.

16 character by 2 line liquid crystal display (with backlight).
SECTION 12. COMMUNICATION PORT
Language Courier
Transmission Synchronous – RS485 voltage levels
Format HDLC
Baud Rate 64kbit/s
K-Bus Cable Screened twisted pair
Length 1000m
Bus Loading 32 units (mulitdrop system)
SECTION 13. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
CT requirements for use in typical applications are shown below. These CT

requirements are based on a maximum prospective fault current of 50x relay rated
current (In) and the relay having a maximum high-set setting of 25In. The CT
requirements are designed to provide operation of the phase and earth fault
elements.
Where the criteria for a specific application are in excess of those detailed above,
or the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value quoted, the CT
requirements may need to be increased. CT requirements for a variety of further
applications are provided in publication R6069.
Auxiliary powered relays - KCGG122, 142 and KCEG 112, 142, 152
Relay and CT Nominal Accuracy Accuracy Limiting lead
secondary rating output class limit factor resistance
(one way)
1A 2.5VA 10P 20 0.6Ω
5A 7.5VA 10P 20 0.06Ω
Dual powered relays - KCEG242

Relay and CT Nominal Accuracy Accuracy Limiting lead
secondary rating output class limit factor resistance
(one way)
1A 7.5VA 10P 15 0.7Ω
5A 10VA 10P 20 0.06Ω
Where the K Range relays are being used for restricted earth fault protection the
CTs must be sized to assure stability as described in Chapter 4, Section 5.10.
The accuracy class of the CTs should be chosen to suit the required accuracy of
measurement values.
Limits of error for accuracy classes 5P and 10P
Accuracy class Current error (%) Composite error (%)
5P ±1 ±5
10P ±3 ±10
The accuracy limit factors detailed above should be used to ensure full range fault
recording.
SECTION 14. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
14.1 Dielectric withstand IEC 255-5: 1977

2.0kV rms for one minute between all terminals and case earth, except terminal 1.
2.0kV rms for one minute between terminals of independent circuits, including
contact circuits.
1.5kV rms across open contacts of output relays 0 to 7.
1.0kV rms for 1 minute across open contacts of the watchdog relay.
14.2 High voltage impulse IEC 255-5: 1977

5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and all terminals to case earth.
14.3 Insulation resistance IEC 255-5: 1977
>100MΩ when measured at 500Vdc
14.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 255-22-1: 1988
Class III
2.5kV peak between independent circuits and case.
1.0kV peak across terminals of the same circuit.
14.5 Fast transient IEC 255-22-4: 1992
Class IV
4kV, 2.5kHz applied to all inputs and outputs.
14.6 EMC compliance
89/336/EEC
Compliance to the European Commission Directive on EMC is claimed via the
Technical Construction File route.
EN50081-1
EN50082-2
Generic Standards are used to establish conformity. .
14.7 Electrostatic discharge test IEC 255-22-2: 1996
Class 3 (8kV) discharge in air with cover in place
Class 2 (4kV) point contact discharge with cover removed (IEC 801-2)
SECTION 15. IEEE/ANSI SPECIFICATIONS
15.1 Standard for relay systems associated with electrical power

apparatus
C37.90 - 1989
15.2 Surge withstand capability
C37.90.1 - 1989
15.3 Radio electromagnetic interference
C39.90.2 - 1989
SECTION 16. ENVIRONMENTAL
16.1 Temperature IEC 255-6: 1988

Storage and transit –25°C to +70°C
Operating –25°C to +55°C
16.2 Humidity IEC 68-2-3: 1969
56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40°C
16.3 Enclosure protection IEC529:1989

IP50 (Dust protected)
16.4 Vibration IEC 255-21-1:1988
Class 1
16.5 Shock and bump IEC 255-21 2:1988
Class 1
16.6 Seismic IEC 255-21-3:1993
Class 1
SECTION 17. MODEL NUMBERS
Relay type: KCGG 0 1 D 0

122 1 2 2
142 1 4 2
Configuration:
Standard 0 1
Case size:
Size 4 Midos flush mounting D
Auxiliary voltage:
24/125V 2
48/250V 5
Not used
CT rating:
1A CT standard (0.005In to 0.8In for earth faults) C
1A CT special (0.02In to 3.2In for earth faults) D
5A CT standard (0.005In to 0.8In for earth faults) E
5A CT special (0.02In to 3.2In for earth faults) F
Language:
English E
French F
German G
Spanish S
Relay type: KCEG 0 1

112 1 1 2
142 1 4 2
152 1 5 2
242 2 4 2
Configuration:
Standard 0 1
Case size:
Size 4 Midos flush mounting (KCEG112 only) D
Size 6 Midos flush mounting (KCEG142/152 only) F
Size 8 Midos flush mounting (KCEG242 only) H
Auxiliary voltage:
24/125V (except KCEG242) 2
48/250V (except KCEG242) 5
110/250V (KCEG242 only) 9
Operating voltage:
110V ac; 50-60Hz 1
440V ac; 50-60Hz 4
CT rating:
1A CT standard (0.005In to 0.8In for earth faults) (0.005In to 0.6In for earth faults) C
1A CT special (0.02In to 3.2In for earth faults) (0.002In to 2.4In for earth faults) D
5A CT standard (0.005In to 0.8In for earth faults) (0.005In to 0.6In for earth faults) E
5A CT special (0.02In to 3.2In for earth faults) (0.02In to 2.4In for earth faults) F
Language:
English E
French F
German G
Spanish S
SECTION 18. FREQUENCY RESPONSE
The operating criteria for each element have been chosen to suit the applications
for which it is most likely to be used. Knowing how these elements respond under
operating conditions will help to apply them effectively.
1 Fourier filter response
Anti-aliasing filter response
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Harmonic
Figure 1. Response of Fourier filtering

Measurement is based on the Fourier derived value of the fundamental component
of current and Figure 1 shows the frequency response that results from this filtering.
The '1' on the horizontal scale relates to the selected rated frequency of the relay
and the figures '2', '3', '4' etc. are the second, third and fourth harmonic
frequencies respectively. It can be seen that harmonics up to and including the 6th
are suppressed, giving no output. The 7th is the first predominant harmonic and
this is attenuated to approximately 30% by the anti-aliasing filter. For power
frequencies that are not equal to the selected rated frequency. ie. the frequency
does not coincide with '1' on the horizontal scale, the harmonics will not be of
zero amplitude. For small frequency deviations of ±1Hz, this is not a problem but
to allow for larger deviations, an improvement is obtained by the addition of
frequency tracking.
With frequency tracking the sampling rate of the analogue/digital conversion is
automatically adjusted to match the applied signal. In the absence of a signal of
suitable amplitude to track, the sample rate defaults to that to suit the selected
rated frequency (Fn) for the relay. In presence of a signal within the tracking range
(45 to 65Hz), the relay will lock on to the signal and the '1' on the horizontal axis
in diagram above will coincide with the measured frequency of the measured
signal. The resulting output for 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th harmonics will be zero.
Thus this diagram applies when the relay is not frequency tracking the signal and
also if it is tracking a frequency within the range 45 to 65Hz.
Power frequency signals are predominant in phase quantities and are therefore
used in the frequency tracking routine, whereas, earth fault quantities often contain
a high proportion of harmonic signals. The earth fault element of multi-pole relays
will generally be locked to the power frequency as the relay tracks it using the
phase quantities. If the relay were to track a frequency above 65Hz then it would
try to lock on to a sub-harmonic frequency and the response would then be as
shown in diagram below. The horizontal axis of this graph is in Hz, the unit of
frequency, and a substantial output is produced for the 2nd harmonic of the system
frequency and also for the 3rd, etc. Hence it is for this reason the relays are
restricted to tracking the phase quantities and do not track earth fault signals.
0 100 200 300 400

Frequency - Hz
Figure 2. Response when frequency tracking

18.1 Transient overreach
The I>>/Io>> and I>>>/Io>>> elements are often required for instantaneous
high set and/or low set functions and for these applications they need to be
unaffected by offset waveforms, which may contain a large dc exponential
component, and by transformer inrush currents. To achieve this, two criteria for
operation are applied independently. The first is that the Fourier derived power
frequency component of the fault current is above the set threshold, as for I>/Io>.
The second is that the peak of any half cycle of current exceeds twice the set
threshold value and is provided to reduce the operation time to less than that
which could be obtained with the Fourier measurement alone.
18.2 Peak measurement
Another point to be aware of is that the second criterion uses peak values and
these are only filtered by the anti-aliasing filter. However, the peak measurements
are still based on sampled values and the position of the samples relative to the
peak of the harmonic will depend on the phase relationship. The frequency
response will therefore be modified for the I>>/Io>> and I>>>/Io>>> elements
for which the diagram below is typical only.
For certain applications it may be necessary to set the I>> or Io>> element to a
low setting, possibly lower than that for the I> or Io> elements. In these situations
the modified frequency response shown may not be acceptable because of the
lack of harmonic rejection. To overcome this problem a software link is provided to
select or deselect the peak detection feature for the I>> and Io>> overcurrent
elements.
The peak measurement is not used for the I>>/Io>> and I>>>/Io>>> elements of
directional overcurrent relays. This is to ensure that the overcurrent and directional
measurement is made from the same data to ensure decisive operation. Therefore,
following diagram will only apply to KCGG relays and the following diagram will
apply to KCEG relays and a KCGG relay that has been set so as not to respond to
peak values.
1 Filter response for I>>/I>>> with peak measurement

tracking a single frequency
0 50 100 200 300 400

Frequency Hz
Figure 3. Frequency response when relay responds to both peak and Fourier
values
18.3 Frequency response of directional elements
The phase directional elements are provided with synchronous polarization which
is maintained for 320ms, or 3.2s, after the voltage collapses so that decisive
operation is ensured. During the period of synchronous polarization the relay
tracks the frequency on a current signal so that the phase correction is maintained,
even with some deviation in frequency.
Chapter 8
Commissioning
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. COMMISSIONING PRELIMINARIES 1
1.1 Quick guide to local menu control 1
1.1.1 With the cover fitted to the case 1
1.1.2 With the cover removed from the case 2
1.2 Terminal allocation 2
1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 2
1.4 Inspection 2
1.5 Earthing 3
1.6 Main current transformers 3
1.7 Test block 3
1.8 Insulation 3
2. COMMISSIONING TEST NOTES 4
2.1 Commissioning the relay with its calculated application settings 4
2.2 Commissioning the relay with the logic required for a particular
application 5
2.3 Equipment required 5
3. AUXILIARY SUPPLY TESTS 6
3.1 Auxiliary powered relays (100 series) 6
3.1.1 Auxiliary supply 6
3.1.2 Energisation from auxiliary voltage supply 6
3.1.3 Field voltage 6
3.2 Dual powered relays (200 series) 7
3.2.1 Auxiliary supply 7
3.2.2 Energisation from auxiliary voltage supply 7
3.2.3 Field voltage 7
3.2.4 Capacitor trip voltage 8
3.2.5 Energisation from line CTs 8
4. SETTINGS 8
5. MEASUREMENT CHECKS 10
6. EARTH FAULT/SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT ELEMENT 10
6.1 Test connections 10
6.2 Current sensitivity for Io> 11
6.3 Time characteristic for to> 11
6.4 Current setting for Io>> and Io>>> 12
6.5 Special note when using as sensitive earth fault relays 13
7. PHASE FAULT ELEMENTS 13
7.2 Current sensitivity for I> 14
7.3 TIME CHARACTERISTIC FOR T> 14
7.4 CURRENT SETTING FOR I>> AND I>>> 15
8. DIRECTIONAL EARTH/SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT ELEMENTS 16
8.1 Test connections for directional earth fault relays 17
8.1.1 KCEG142/242 17
8.1.2 KCEG112, KCEG152 17
8.2 Polarising voltage sensitivity Vop> 17
8.3 Angular boundary of operation for Vop> 19
8.4 Current sensitivity for Io> 19
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
8.5 Time characteristic for to> 20

8.6 Current setting for Io>> 21
8.7 Special note when using as sensitive 21
9. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT ELEMENT 22
9.2 Angular boundary of operation 22
9.3 Current sensitivity for I> 23
9.4 Time characteristic for t> 24
9.5 Current setting for I>> and I>>> 25
10. SELECTIVE LOGIC 25
10.1 Opto-input checks 25
10.2 Controlled blocking of time delay elements 26
10.3 Undervoltage logic 27
10.4 Auxiliary timers 27
10.4.1 Timer AUX1 27
10.5 Breaker fail 28
10.6 Change of setting group 29
10.7 Cold load start/pick-up 29
10.8 Circuit breaker control 30
10.8.1 CB trip test 30
10.8.2 CB close test 31
10.9 Broken conductor logic 31
10.10 Thermal overcurrent 31
11. ON-LOAD TESTS 32
11.1 On-load measurement checks 32
11.2 On load directional check 33
11.2.1 Phase fault directional elements - KCEG 142/242 33
11.2.2 Earth fault directional relay - KCEG 142/242 33
11.2.3 Earth fault directional relay - KCEG 112/152 34
12. PROBLEM SOLVING 35
12.1 Password lost or not accepted 35
12.2 Protection settings 35
12.2.1 Settings for high sets not displayed 35
12.2.2 Second setting group not displayed 36
12.2.3 Function links cannot be changed 36
12.2.4 Curve selection cannot be changed 36
12.3 Alarms 36
12.3.1 Watchdog alarm 36
12.3.2 Unconfigured or uncalibrated alarm 37
12.3.3 Setting error alarm 37
12.3.4 'No service' alarm 37
12.3.5 Fault flags will not reset 37
12.4 Records 37
12.4.1 Problems with event records 37
12.4.2 Problems with disturbance records 38
12.5 Circuit breaker maintenance records 38
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
12.6 Communications 39
12.6.1 Measured values do not change 39
12.6.2 Relay no longer responding 39
12.6.3 No response to remote control commands 39
12.7 Output relays remain picked-up 39
12.8 Thermal state 40
12.8.1 Thermal state reset to zero 40
12.8.2 Thermal ammeter time constants 40
13. MAINTENANCE 40
13.1 Remote testing 40
13.1.1 Alarms 40
13.1.2 Measurement accuracy 40
13.1.3 Trip test 40
13.1.4 CB maintenance 41
13.2 Local testing 41
13.2.1 Alarms 41
13.2.2 Measurement accuracy 41
13.2.3 Trip test 41
13.2.4 CB maintenance 41
13.2.5 Additional tests 41
13.3 Method of repair 41
13.3.1 Replacing a pcb 41
13.3.2 Replacing output relays and opto-isolators 42
13.3.3 Replacing the power supply board 42
13.3.4 Replacing the back plane (size 4 and 6 case) 43
13.4 Recalibration 43
13.5 Digital test equipment 43
Figure 1. Connection diagram for KCEG142/242 17

Figure 2. Connection diagram for KCEG112, KCEG152 18
Figure 3. Connections for directional overcurrent relays KCEG142/242 22
Figure 4. Connections for on-load directional earth fault test KCEG142/242 34
Figure 5. Connections for on-load directional earth fault test KCEG112/152 35
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 1 of 44
SECTION 1. COMMISSIONING PRELIMINARIES
The Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on

the equipment.
When commissioning a K series relay for the first time the engineers should allow
an hour to get familiar with the menu. Section1.1.1 provides simple instructions for
negotiating the relay menu using the push buttons [F] [+] [–] and [0] on the front of
the relay. Individual cells can be viewed and the settable values can be changed
by this method.
If a portable PC is available together with a K-Bus interface unit and the courier
access software, then the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full
column of data and text. Settings are also more easily entered and the final
settings can be saved to a file on a disk for future reference or printing a
permanent record. The instructions are provided with the Courier Access software.
1.1 Quick guide to local menu control
With the cover in place only the [F] and [0] push buttons are accessible, so data
can only be read or flag and counter functions reset. No protection or
configuration settings can be changed. In the table [F]long indicates that the key is
pressed for 1s and [F]short for less than 0.5s. This allows the same key to perform
more than one function.
1.1.1 With the cover fitted to the case
Default display or [F]short or Display changes to first menu column
fault flags after a trip [F]long heading “SYSTEM DATA”.
[0]short Back-light turns ON.
[0]long If the fault flags are displayed the trip
led will be reset and the display will
return to the selected default display.
Column heading [0]short Back-light turned ON.
[0]long Returns to the selected default display
without waiting for the time-out delay.
Anywhere in menu [F]short Displays the next item of data in the
column.
[F]+[0]long Displays the previous item.
[F]long Displays the heading for the next
column.
[0]short Turns the back-light ON.
[0]long If a resettable cell is displayed it will
be reset.
Table 1
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 2 of 44
1.1.2 With the cover removed from the case

The key presses listed in 1.1.1 still apply and in addition the [+] and [–] keys are
accessible:
Column heading [–] Move to next column heading.

[+]short Move to previous column heading
A settable cell [+] or [–] Puts relay in the setting mode (flashing
cursor on bottom line of display) if the
cell is not password protected.
Setting mode [+] Increments value.
[–] Decrements value.
[F] Changes to the confirmation display.
If function links, relay or input masks
are displayed then the [F] key will step
through them from left to right. A
further key press will change to the
confirmation display.
[0] Escapes from the setting mode without
setting being changed.
Confirmation display [+] Confirms setting and enters new value.
[–] Returns prospective value of setting for
checking and further modification.
[0] Escapes from the setting mode without
the setting being changed.
Table 8.2
1.2 Terminal allocation
Reference should be made to the appropriate connection diagram. Chapter 3,
Section 5 gives further information on the external connections to the relay.
Reference should also be made to the relay masks to identify which functions are
allocated to which outputs.
1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Before handling the module, see recommendations in Chapter 1 of this user
manual.
1.4 Inspection
Carefully examine the module and case to see that no damage has occurred since
installation. Visually check that the current transformer shorting switches in the case
are wired into the correct circuit and are closed when the module is withdrawn.
Check that the serial number on the module, case and cover are identical and that
the model number and rating information are correct.
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme
diagram. The relay diagram number appears inside the case on a label at the left
hand side. The serial number of the relay also appears on this label, the inside of
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 3 of 44
the cover and on the front plate of the relay module. The serial numbers marked on
these three items should match; the only time that they may not match is when a
failed relay module has been replaced for continuity of protection.
With the relay removed from its case, ensure that the shorting switches between
terminals listed below are closed by checking with a continuity tester.
Terminals: 21 and 22; 23 and 24; 25 and 26; 27 and 28.
1.5 Earthing
Ensure that the case earthing connection, above the rear terminal block, is used to
connect the relay to a local earth bar. Where there is more than one relay, ensure
that the copper earth bar is in place connecting the earth terminals of each case in
the same tier together.
1.6 Main current transformers
DO NOT OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A LIVE CT SINCE THE
HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL TO PERSONNEL AND COULD
DAMAGE INSULATION.
1.7 Test block
If the MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked to the
scheme diagram, particularly that the supply connections are to the live side of the
test block (coloured orange) and with the terminals allocated odd numbers
(1, 3, 5, 7 etc.). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13(+) and
15(–), but check against the schematic diagram for the installation.
1.8 Insulation
Insulation tests only need to be done when required.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or
brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 1000V. Terminals of the
same circuits should be temporarily strapped together.
The main groups on the relays are given below but they may be modified by
external connection as can be determined from the scheme diagram.
a) Current transformer circuits.
b) Voltage transformer circuits.
c) Auxiliary voltage supply
(and capacitor discharge circuit on 200 series relays).
d) Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs.
e) Relay contacts.
f) Communication port.
g) Case earth.
Note: Do not apply an insulation test between the auxiliary supply and the
capacitor discharge terminals because they are part of the same
circuit and internally connected.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 4 of 44
SECTION 2. COMMISSIONING TEST NOTES
2.1 Commissioning the relay with its calculated application settings

Relay Model Auxiliary Dual Earth fault Phase Directional Directional Wattmetric
powered powered element fault earth fault phase fault element
element element element
Test Test Test Test Tests Tests Tests
3.1 3.2 6 7 8& 9& 12
11.2.1 11.2.2
KCEG 112 P 1
KCEG 142 P 1 3
KCEG 152 P 3 1
KCEG 242 P 1 3 1 3 1
KCGG 122 P 1 2
KCGG 142 P 1 3
Table 3
Table 3 lists the relay types and the tests that must be performed on the relay
power supply, overcurrent, earth fault and directional elements.
A “P” in a column indicates the type of power supply for each particular relay.
A number in a column indicates for each relay the number of elements of that type
available.
After the auxiliary supply tests the settings required for the particular application
should be entered as described in Section 4.
Note: The relay rated frequency must be set to the nominal system
frequency before the injection tests are performed.
After the settings have been entered the measurements checks described in
Section 5 should be carried out.
None of the current, voltage and time ranges given in these instructions make any
allowance for instrument errors.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 5 of 44
2.2 Commissioning the relay with the logic required for a particular
application
The relay should be commissioned with the selective logic settings required for the
particular application. Table 4 lists the selective logic schemes and the tests that
must be performed on the relay to ensure these work correctly.
Selective logic function Test

Opto-input blocking logic 8.1.10.1
Timer blocking functions 8.1.10.2
Undervoltage logic 8.1.10.3
Auxiliary timers (Aux1, Aux2, Aux3) 8.1.10.4
Breaker fail and back-tripping 8.1.10.5
Change of setting group 8.1.10.6
Cold load start / pickup 8.1.10.7
Circuit breaker control 8.1.10.8
Table 4
Selective logic features listed below require K-Bus remote commands and are not
covered by the commissioning instructions:
Remote setting change
Remote group change
Remote circuit breaker control
Remote load shedding control
2.3 Equipment required
For KCGG relays the following equipment is required :
Overcurrent test set with time interval meter.
Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 for use with test block type MMLG.
Continuity tester.
For KCEG relays the following additional equipment is required :
440/110V star/star phase shifting transformer.
AC voltmeter 0-440V
DC voltmeter 0-250V
AC multi-range ammeter
Suitable non-inductive potentiometer to adjust polarising voltage level.
Phase angle meter or transducer. If necessary suitable current shunt(s) for use with
the phase angle meter.
A portable PC, with suitable software and a KITZ101 K-Bus/IEC870-5 interface
unit will be useful but in no way essential to commissioning.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 6 of 44
SECTION 3. AUXILIARY SUPPLY TESTS
3.1 Auxiliary powered relays (100 series)

3.1.1 Auxiliary supply
The relay can be operated from either an ac or a dc auxiliary supply but the
incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 5.
Relay rating DC operating AC operating Maximum crest

(V) range (V) range (VAC) voltage (V)
24/125 19 – 150 50 – 133 190
48/250 33 – 300 87 – 265 380
Table 5
CAUTION: The relay can withstand some ac ripple on a dc auxiliary supply.
However, in all cases the peak value of the auxiliary supply must not
exceed the maximum crest voltage. Do not energise the relay using
the battery charger with the battery disconnected.
3.1.2 Energisation from auxiliary voltage supply
For secondary injection testing using the test block type MMLG, insert test plug
type MMLB01 with CT shorting links fitted. It may be necessary to link across the
front of the test plug to restore the auxiliary supply to the relay.
Isolate the relay trip contacts and insert the module. With the auxiliary supply
disconnected from the relay use a continuity tester to monitor the state of the
watchdog contacts as listed in Table 6.
Connect the auxiliary supply to the relay. The relay should power up with the lcd
showing the default display and the centre green led being illuminated; this
indicates the relay is healthy. The relay has a non-volatile memory which
remembers the state (ON or OFF) of the led trip indicator when the relay was last
powered, and therefore the indicator may be illuminated. With a continuity
checker, monitor the state of watchdog contacts as listed in Table 6.
Terminals With relay With relay
de-energised energised
3 and 5 contact closed contact open

4 and 6 contact open contact closed
Table 6
3.1.3 Field voltage
The relay generates a field voltage that should be used to energise the opto-
isolated inputs. With the relay energised, measure the field voltage across
terminals 7 and 8. Terminal 7 should be positive with respect to terminal 8 and
should be within the range specified in Table 7 when no load is connected.
Nominal dc Range
rating (V) (V)
48 45 – 60
Table 7
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 7 of 44
3.2 Dual powered relays (200 series)

3.2.1 Auxiliary supply
The relay can be operated from either an ac or a dc auxiliary supply but the
incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 8.
Relay rating DC operating AC operating Maximum crest

(V) range (V) range (VAC) voltage (V)
100/250 60 – 300 60 – 265 380
Table 8
CAUTION: The relay can withstand some ac ripple on a dc auxiliary supply.
However in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not
exceed the maximum specified operating limits.
Do not energise the relay using the battery charger with the batteries
disconnected.
Note: The application of the auxiliary voltage supply reduces the burden
that is imposed by the relay on the current injection equipment. For
the secondary injection tests in Sections 6 to 9 inclusive, it is
recommended that the relay should be powered from an auxiliary
supply rather than from the current circuit.
3.2.2 Energisation from auxiliary voltage supply
For secondary injection testing using the test block type MMLG, insert test plug
type MMLB 01 with CT shorting links fitted. It may be necessary to link across the
front of the test plug to restore the auxiliary supply to the relay.
Isolate the relay trip contacts and insert the module. With the auxiliary
disconnected from the relay, use a continuity tester to monitor the state of the
watchdog contacts as listed in Table 9.
Reconnect the auxiliary supply to the relay. The relay should power up with the lcd
showing the default display and the centre green led being illuminated; this
indicates the relay is healthy. The relay has a non-volatile memory which
remembers the state (ON or OFF) of the led trip indicator when the relay was last
powered, and therefore the indicator may be illuminated. With a continuity
checker, monitor the state of watchdog contacts as listed in Table 9.
NB. These contacts only change state for an internal fault within the relay.
Terminals With relay With relay
de-energised energised
3 and 5 contact closed contact open

4 and 6 contact open contact closed
Table 9
3.2.3 Field voltage
The relay generates a field voltage that should be used to energise the opto-
isolated inputs.
With the relay energised measure the field voltage across terminals 7 and 8.
Terminal 7 should be positive with respect to terminal 8 and should be within the
range specified in Table 10 when no load is connected.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 8 of 44
Nominal dc Range
rating (V) (V)
48 45 – 60
Table 10
3.2.4 Capacitor trip voltage
Measure the supply to trip coil voltage across terminals 9 and 10. Terminal 9
should be positive with respect to terminal 10 and should be within the range
specified in Table 11 when no load is connected.
Nominal capacitor DC range

trip voltage (V dc) (V)
50 45 – 55
Table 11
3.2.5 Energisation from line CTs
With the auxiliary supply disconnected from the relay inject current into the relay
terminals listed in Table 12. In each case the relay should power up correctly with
the lcd showing the default display and the centre green led being illuminated.
Repeat tests 3.2.3 and 3.2.4 with the relay powered from the injected current.
Injected current Terminals

0.4 x In Inject into terminals 21 and 23.
Link terminals 22 and 24.
Table 12
Note: For 0.2 x In the relay may chatter. This is due to the loading effect of
the output relays and is overcome by disabling the relevant output
relay masks (Start and Trip).
SECTION 4. SETTINGS
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If
operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set as follows:
From ‘SYSTEMS DATA’ menu, press the ‘F’ key until ‘0009 Freq 50Hz’ appears on
the lcd. Press the ‘+’ key until the display shows ‘0009 Freq 60Hz’. Then press the
‘F’ key once more followed by the ‘+’ key to confirm the change.
The commissioning engineer should be supplied with all the required settings for
the relay. The settings should be entered into the relay via the front keypad or using
a portable PC with a K-Bus connection.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 9 of 44
The protection settings for the relay are contained in PHASE FAULT (1), EARTH
FAULT (1), PHASE FAULT (2) and EARTH FAULT (2) menu columns. The last two
columns are only required if setting group 2 is used. Other settings are found in
the SYSTEM DATA and LOGIC columns.
The time characteristics for the first overcurrent stages are selectable and it is not
necessary to select the same curve for both phase and earth faults. The selection is
made in the menu columns for phase and earth fault settings, but the password
must first be entered before the characteristic can be changed.
The following abbreviations are used for the relay characteristic curves:
Curve Abbreviation Description IEC

No. Curve
0 DT Definite time characteristic -

1 SI30xDT Standard inverse characteristic goes definite time after 30xIs A
2 VI30xDT Very inverse characteristic goes definite time after 30xIs B
3 EI10xDT Extremely inverse characteristic goes definite time after 10xIs C
4 LTI30xDT Long time earth fault characteristic goes definite time after 30xIs -
5 MI Moderately Inverse D
6 VI Very Inverse E
7 EI Extremely Inverse F
8 STI30xDT Short time inverse characteristic goes definite time after 30xIs -
9 RECT Inverse curve for rectifier protection -
Table 13
The characteristics of the relay can be further changed by setting function links as
described in Chapter 3 Section 3 and Chapter 4. These links change the logic
within the relay so that the auxiliary functions can be used for alternative tasks.
They can also turn OFF or block some of the unwanted functions and so this is the
first place to look if the relay is not configured as required.
SYSTEM DATA 0003 SD Links
EARTH FAULT (1) 0501 EF Links
PHASE FAULT (1) 0601 PF Links
EARTH FAULT (2) 0701 EF Links
PHASE FAULT (2) 0801 PF Links
LOGIC FUNCTIONS 0901 LOG Links
INPUT MASKS An eight bit mask is allocated to each protection and
control function that can be influenced by an external
input applied to one or more opto-isolated inputs.
RELAY MASK An eight bit mask is allocated to each protection and
control function that can operate one or more outputs.
It is necessary to enter the password before the functions link, time curve, masks,
VT and CT ratios can be changed.
For each control function input required, at least one opto-input must be allocated
in the INPUT MASK menu.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 10 of 44
For each protection and control function output required, at least one output relay
must be allocated in the RELAY MASK menu.
When the relay leaves the factory it is configured with a set of default relay masks,
input masks and protection settings. Any of these settings can be left at these
default values if required.
When the relay settings have been entered into the relay, they should be noted
down on the commissioning test record sheet. If the K-Bus communications are
being used then the master station can extract the settings from the relay, record
any relay settings on disc and download recorded settings to other relays.
Where the commissioning tests require a change from the in-service settings a note
should be made of these settings before any changes are made to ensure that the
settings are restored to their correct values after the tests are performed.
SECTION 5. MEASUREMENT CHECKS
To test the relay measurement functions a known current should be injected into
each phase input and the neutral input. For directional relays the polarising
voltage(s) should be applied to the VT inputs as per the application diagram.
The phase to neutral voltage should be measured with a voltmeter, or for single
pole relays the open delta winding voltage from the line VTs.
With the CT and VT ratio settings of the PHASE FAULT and EARTH FAULT headings
set to the values of the line CTs and VTs the displayed, measured values and
settings will be in the equivalent primary quantities.
All measured values have a tolerance of ±5% except power which is the product
of two quantities and therefore has a tolerance of ±10%.
SECTION 6. EARTH FAULT/SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT ELEMENT
The relay should be commissioned with the settings calculated for the application.
For dual powered relays it is recommended that the relay is energised from an
auxiliary voltage supply as this will reduce the burden imposed by the relay on the
current injection test set.
Ensure that the main system current transformers are short circuited before isolating
them from the relay in preparation for secondary injection tests. Also isolate the
relay trip contacts.
6.1 Test connections
Connect the auxiliary supply to the relay and record the voltage at terminals
13(+ve) and 14(–ve).
Ensure that the line CTs are short circuited and disconnected from the relay.
If relay has simple overcurrent elements then connect the current injection test set to
terminals 27 and 28 of the relay. If the earth fault elements are directionalised then
go to Section 8.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 11 of 44
6.2 Current sensitivity for Io>

This test checks the current sensitivity of the relay. Operation of the relay can be
monitored in three ways:
1 By indication from the relay contacts.
2 Viewing the [0021 Relay Status] display under the SYSTEM DATA heading of
the menu.
3 Setting the display to [0023 FnowG1] which will be found in the system data
column.
If the display is [0023 FnowG1], the current state of the flags, a letter is displayed
to indicate which phase has started and an * will indicate which element has
tripped. See Chapter 3, Section 2.5 for more information on the flag display.
Inject single phase current into the earth fault current input of the relay (terminals
27 and 28) and slowly increase the current, noting the pick-up value at which the
START relay operates. Reduce the current slowly and note the drop-off value at
which the START relay resets. Check the pick-up and drop-off current is within the
range shown in Table 14 taking note of the two setting ranges available.
Current level
Standard E/F elements US E/F elements

(Io> setting range 0.5% to 80% In) (Io> setting range 2% to 320% In)
Pick-up Io> above 2% 0.95 x Is – 1.05 x Is Io> above 8% 0.95 x Is – 1.05 x Is

Io> above 1% 0.9 x Is – 1.1 x Is Io> above 4% 0.9 x Is – 1.1 x Is
Io> above 0.5% 0.8 x Is – 1.2 x Is Io> above 2% 0.8 x Is – 1.2 x Is
Drop-off 0.9 x pick-up – 1.0 x pick-up
Table 14
6.3 Time characteristic for to>
The relay selected for the to> trip can be found under the RELAY MASKS heading
in [0B03 to>]. The terminals for each relay are shown in the application diagram.
Connect the relay contacts for the to> trip to both trip the test set and to stop a
timer. Inject single phase current into the earth fault current input (terminals 27 and
28) at 2 x setting current. If the test set used can inject sufficient current, repeat the
test again at 10 x setting current.
Check that the operating time for the relay is within the range shown in Table 15.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 12 of 44
Curve Operating time at specified current (seconds) x TMS

Ref. Name 2 x Is 10 x Is
Nominal Range Nominal Range
0 DT [Set time t0>] ±5% + [0.02 to 0.04 seconds]
1 SI30xDT 10.03 9.53 - 10.53 2.971 2.822 - 3.119
2 VI30xDT 13.50 12.83 - 14.18 1.500 1.425 - 1.575
3 EI10xDT 26.67 25.33 - 28.00 0.808 0.768 - 0.848
4 LTI30xDT 120.0 114.0 - 126.0 13.33 12.67 - 14.00
5 MI 7.606 7.226 - 7.987 2.414 2.293 - 2.534
6 VI 14.06 13.35 - 14.76 1.378 1.309 - 1.447
7 EI 19.04 18.09 - 20.00 0.813 0.772 - 0.853
8 STI30xDT 1.778 1.690 - 1.867 0.518 0.492 - 0.544
9 RECT 966 917 - 1014 0.115 0.110 - 0.121
Table 15
Note: The operating times given above are for TMS = 1. Therefore to
obtain the operating time for any other TMS setting the relay’s actual
TMS setting must be multiplied by the time given in the table above.
For all curves there is an additional tolerance of between 0.02 and 0.04 seconds.
All the operating times given have no allowance for errors in the measuring
instruments.
6.4 Current setting for Io>> and Io>>>
Caution:
THE RELAY MAY BE DAMAGED BY APPLYING EXCESSIVE CURRENT FOR
LONG DURATIONS DURING TESTING, OR IN RECURRENT BURSTS
WITHOUT ALLOWING TIME FOR THE RELAY TO COOL DOWN.
This test is to check that the instantaneous current level of the Io>> and Io>>> is
correct. If the Io>> element is to be used by the customer then the EARTH FAULT
function link 1 must be set to “1”. This test can only be performed if the test set
available can inject sufficient current into the relay to cause the element to operate
at the customer’s current setting. The relay selected for the Io>> trip can be found
under the RELAY MASKS heading in [0B04 to>>].
To prevent sustained application of excessive current the trip output contacts for
to>> should be connected to trip the test set. The time delay to>> should be set to
less than 0.1 second for the test and restored to its original value when the test has
been completed.
When the setting is above the continuous current rating of the relay DO NOT
INCREASE THE CURRENT SLOWLY since this may damage the relay before it can
operate. Instead the current level should be set and then suddenly applied.
Two tests are specified in Table 16 for the particular current setting required for the
application. Initially the higher current level should be applied to check that the
instantaneous element operates and then the lower current level should be applied
to check that no trip occurs.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 13 of 44
Current level

(Io>> and Io>>> setting range (Io>> and Io>>> setting range
0.5% to 80% In) 2% to 320% In)

Table 16
If the Io>>> threshold is to be used by the customer then the EARTH FAULT function
link 2 should be set to “1”. Test 6.4 can then be repeated for Io>>>, but only if the
test set available can inject sufficient current into the relay to cause the element to
operate at the customer’s current setting. The relay selected for the Io>>> trip can
be found under the RELAY MASKS heading in [0B05 to>>>].
The instantaneous trip output contacts must be connected to trip the test set.
To prevent sustained application of excessive current the time delay to>>> should
be set to less than 0.1 second for this test, the original setting being restored when
the test has been completed.
6.5 Special note when using as sensitive earth fault relays
The actual minimum operation current for the sensitive earth fault settings will be
affected by the magnetising current that is taken by the core balance CT. The effect
that the CT has on the relay setting can be assessed if the primary circuit is de-
energised, by reconnecting the CTs to the relay and repeating the setting test 6.2.
The effective setting may be more than doubled in some cases.
SECTION 7. PHASE FAULT ELEMENTS
the relay from the current transformers in preparation for secondary injection tests.
Also isolate the relay trip contacts.
Connect the auxiliary supply to the relay and record the voltage at terminals
13 (+ve) and 14 (–ve).
Ensure that the line CTs are short circuited and disconnected from the relay.
If any of the phase elements are directionalised refer to Section 9 for the test
instructions.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 14 of 44
7.2 Current sensitivity for I>

1 By indication from the relay contacts.
2. Viewing the [0021 Rly Status] display under the SYSTEM DATA heading of
the menu.
3. Setting the display to [0023 FnowG1] which will be found in the fault record
column.
If [0023 FnowG1], the current state of the flags is displayed, indication that a
phase has picked up is given by a letter and an * will indicate which element
has tripped.
See Chapter 3 Section 5 for more information on the flag display.
Where there is a star point on the relay, it is advantageous to inhibit the operation
of the earth fault elements (inhibit to>, to>> and to>>>) in order to avoid confusion
with trip signals and indications. The preferred method of achieving this is to inject
current into the phase fault elements only as shown by the terminal numbers in
Table 18. Alternative methods would be either to map the earth fault elements to
separate output contacts or to temporarily increase the earth fault element settings.
It is important to make a note of any changes to the settings so that they can be
restored after the tests are completed.
Inject single phase current into one of the phase inputs to the relay and slowly
increase the current, noting the pick-up value at which the START relay operates.
Reduce the current slowly and note the drop-off value at which the START relay
resets. Check the pick-up and drop-off current is within the range shown in
Table 17.
Current level
Pick-up 0.95 x Is – 1.05 x Is
Table 17
The test must be repeated on all the phase elements of the relay. Table 8.18 lists
the terminals that current should be injected into for each of the phases.
Phase Terminals
A 21 – 22
B 23 – 24
C 25 – 26
Table 18
In addition, with some site wiring, it may be necessary to inject A-N, B-N, C-N.
7.3 Time characteristic for t>
The relay selected for the t> trip can be found under the RELAY MASKS heading in
[0B08 tA>], [0B09 tB>] and [0B0A tC>]. The terminals for each relay are shown
in the application diagram. Connect the relay contacts for the t> trip to both trip
the test set and to stop a timer. Inject single phase current of 2 x setting current into
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 15 of 44
one of the phase fault current inputs listed in Table 18. If the test set used can inject
sufficient current, repeat the test at 10 x setting current. Check that the operating
time for the relay is within the range shown in the Table 19 below.
1 SI30xDT 10.03 9.53 - 10.53 2.971 2.822 - 3.119
2 VI30xDT 13.50 12.83 - 14.18 1.500 1.425 - 1.575
3 EI10xDT 26.67 25.33 - 28.00 0.808 0.768 - 0.848
4 LTI30xDT 120.0 114.0 - 126.0 13.33 12.67 - 14.00
5 MI 7.606 7.226 - 7.987 2.414 2.293 - 2.534
6 VI 14.06 13.35 - 14.76 1.378 1.309 - 1.447
7 EI 19.04 18.09 - 20.00 0.813 0.772 - 0.853
8 STI30xDT 1.778 1.690 - 1.867 0.518 0.492 - 0.544
9 RECT 966 917 - 1014 0.115 0.110 - 0.121
Table 19
For all curves there is an additional tolerance of between 0.02 and
0.04 seconds.
The operating times given make no allowance for errors in the
measuring instruments.
7.4 Current setting for I>> and I>>>
Caution
This test is to check that the instantaneous current level of the I>> and I>>> is
correct. If the I>> element is to be used by the customer then the PHASE FAULT
at the customer’s current setting. The relay selected for the I>> trip can be found
under the RELAY MASKS heading in [0B0B t>>]. Table 18 shows which terminals
are used for each relay element.
to>> should be connected to trip the test set. The time delay t>> should be set to
been completed.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 16 of 44
Two tests specified in Table 20 are for the particular current setting required for the
application. Initially the higher current level should be applied to check that the
instantaneous element operates and then the lower current level should be applied
to check that no trip occurs.
TRIP I>> / I>>> NO TRIP I>> / I>>>

1.05 x current setting 0.95 x current setting
Table 20
If the I>>> threshold is to be used by the customer then the PHASE FAULT function
link 2 should be set to “1”. Test 7.4 can then be repeated for I>>>, but only if the
operate at the customer’s current setting. The relay selected for the I>>> trip can
be found under the RELAY MASKS heading in [0B0C t>>>].
Table 18 shows which terminals to use for current injection into the individual
phase elements.
To prevent sustained application of excessive current the time delay for the I>>
current threshold should be set to operate in zero seconds for this test. The setting
can be restored to the original value when the test has been completed. If the
setting is to be changed it is important that the existing settings are noted so that
they can be restored after testing is completed.
SECTION 8. DIRECTIONAL EARTH/SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT ELEMENTS
If it is required that the earth fault overcurrent element is directionalised, it is
necessary to set some function links. Table 21 shows which EARTH FAULT function
links must be set to “1” to enable directional control of each of the earth fault
elements.
Earth fault element Earth fault function link 0701 EF

Io> 3
Io>> 4
Io>>> 5
Table 21
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 17 of 44
8.1 Test connections for directional earth fault relays

If the relay being commissioned has directional earth fault elements then the relay
and the overcurrent test set and phase shifting transformer must be set up as shown
in Figure 1. Taking positive phase angles as the current leading the voltage and
negative phase angles as the current lagging the voltage, adjust the phase shifting
transformer so the phase angle meter reads (180°+ set earth fault characteristic
angle). Once the phase angle has been set and the current input of the phase
angle meter has been short circuited with a wire link, the overcurrent tests can be
performed.
The correct polarity of connection for operation with forward current flow is shown
in the two tables at the beginning of Chapter 3, Section 6. The test arrangement
will depend on the type of relay being tested.
8.1.1 KCEG142/242
The residual voltage is internally derived from the summation of the three phase to
neutral voltages and for these relays a three phase voltage should be applied to
the relay. The residual voltage is then produced by collapsing one of the phase
voltages with a potentiometer, as shown in Figure 40; the residual voltage being
equal to the actual amount by which the phase voltage is reduced.
8.1.2 KCEG112, KCEG152
The earth fault elements of other relays in the range require the residual polarising
voltage to be derived from an external source and so the connections should be as
shown in Figure 41.
8.2 Polarising voltage sensitivity Vop>
To test the sensitivity of the polarising voltage the relay must be connected as
shown in Figure 40 or Figure 41 according to relay type.
Directional relays
V
A A 17
B
Vp 18
C 19
N N 20
440V/110V
Phase
angle
meter
A 27
Current
injection Io
test set
28
Figure 1. Connection diagram for KCEG142/242

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 18 of 44
Directional relays
V
A A 19
B
Vp
C
N N 20
440V/110V
Phase
angle
meter
A 27
Current
injection Io
test set
28
Figure 2. Connection diagram for KCEG112, KCEG152

When using the connections shown in Figure 1 the full three phase voltage should
be applied and the voltage output from the potential divider adjusted to vary the
residual voltage; the voltage measured across the top half of the potentiometer
should agree with the value of Vo displayed on the relay under MEASUREMENTS
(1). When using the connections shown in Figure 2 the single phase voltage being
applied is the residual quantity and should agree with the value of Vo displayed on
the relay under MEASUREMENTS (1).
Set the current, from the secondary injection test set, to a value within the rating of
both the relay and the phase angle meter. Then taking positive angles as the
current leading the voltage and negative angles as the current lagging the voltage,
adjust the phase shifting transformer so the phase angle meter reads the set earth
fault characteristic angle. Once the phase angle has been set the current input to
the meter should be short circuited.
While monitoring the forward start contact, selected by the [0B01 Io> Fwd] relay
mask, current above twice the Io> setting should be injected into terminal 27 and
the polarising voltage should be reduced to the minimum. In this condition the
forward start contact should be open. The polarising voltage should be then slowly
increased until the forward start contact [0B01 Io> Fwd] operates; this value
should be the set value for Vop> ±10%.
Note: for the KCEG142, where the residual voltage is generated internally,
the Vop> settings cannot be guaranteed below 3V when the low
gain range is selected by the healthy phases.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 19 of 44
8.3 Angular boundary of operation for Vop>

Apply polarising voltage above the threshold voltage Vop> and operating current
above the setting Io> to the relay under test. From the EARTH FAULT heading make
a note of the relay characteristic angle (RCA).
The forward start contact selected by the [0B01 Io> Fwd] relay mask under the
RELAY MASKS heading and the reverse start contact selected by the
[0B02 Io> Rev] relay mask should be monitored to indicate when the relay is in
the operate region.
Taking positive angles as leading and negative angles as lagging, adjust the
phase shifting transformer so the phase angle meter reads (180°+RCA). Check that
the reverse start contacts selected by the [0B02 Io> Rev] relay mask have closed
and the forward start contacts selected by the [0B01 Io> Fwd] relay mask are
open.
Rotate the phase shifting transformer so the phase lag is decreasing or the phase
lead is increasing on the phase angle meter and continue until the forward start
contacts close and the reverse contacts open. Note the angle on the phase angle
meter and check it is within the limits stated in Table 22.
Continue rotating the phase shifting transformer until the forward start contacts
open and the reverse start contacts close. Note the angle on the phase meter and
check it is within the limits stated in Table 22.
Relay in operate region: Phase angle meter indication Tolerance
(RCA – 90°) lag through to (RCA + 90°) lead ±5°
Table 22
8.4 Current sensitivity for Io>
1. By indication from the relay contacts.
2. Viewing the [0021 Rly Status] display under the SYSTEM DATA heading of
the menu.
3. Setting the display to [0023 FnowG1] which will be found in the fault record
column.
Note: The default display can be set to [0023 FnowG1] if preferred.
If the display is [0023 FnowG1], the current state of the flags, a
letter is displayed to indicate which phase has started and an * will
indicate which element has tripped.
See Chapter 3, Section 1.5 for more information on the flag display.
With the applied polarising voltage set above twice the threshold level and the
phase shifter adjusted to the characteristic angle of the relay, inject current into the
earth fault current input of the relay (terminals 27 and 28). Slowly increase the
current and note the pick-up value at which the [0B01 Io> Fwd] relay operates.
Reduce the current slowly and note the drop-off value at which the START relay
resets.
Check the pick-up and drop-off current is within the range shown in Table 23
taking note of the two setting ranges available.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 20 of 44
Current level

(Io> setting range 0.5% to 80% In) (Io setting range 2% to 320% In)

Table 23
8.5 Time characteristic for to>
The relay selected for the to> trip can be found under the RELAY MASKS heading
in [0B03 to>]. The terminals for each relay are shown in the application diagram.
Connect the relay contacts for the to> trip to both trip the test set and to stop a
timer.
phase shifter adjusted to the characteristic angle of the relay, inject a single phase
current into the earth fault current input (terminals 27 and 28) at 2 x setting current.
If the test set used can inject sufficient current, repeat the test at 10 x setting
current. Check the operating time against Table 24.
1 SI30xDT 10.03 9.53 - 10.53 2.971 2.822 - 3.119
2 VI30xDT 13.50 12.83 - 14.18 1.500 1.425 - 1.575
3 EI10xDT 26.67 25.33 - 28.00 0.808 0.768 - 0.848
4 LTI30xDT 120.0 114.0 - 126.0 13.33 12.67 - 14.00
5 MI 7.606 7.226 - 7.987 2.414 2.293 - 2.534
6 I 21.63 20.55 - 22.72 2.401 2.281 - 2.521
7 VI 14.06 13.35 - 14.76 1.378 1.309 - 1.447

8 EI 19.04 18.09 - 20.00 0.813 0.772 - 0.853
9 STI30xDT 1.778 1.690 - 1.867 0.518 0.492 - 0.544
10 RECT 966 917 - 1014 0.115 0.110 - 0.121
Table 24
0.04 seconds.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 21 of 44
8.6 Current setting for Io>> and Io>>>

Caution
LONG DURATIONS DURING TESTING OR IN RECURRENT BURSTS,
This test is to check that the instantaneous current level of the Io>> and Io>>> is
correct. If the Io>> element is to be used by the customer then the EARTH FAULT
at the customer’s current setting. The relay selected for the Io>> trip can be found
under the RELAY MASKS heading in [0B04 to>>].
to>> should be connected to trip the test set. The time delay to>> should be set to
been completed.
phase shifter adjusted to the characteristic angle of the relay, inject the higher of
the two currents specified in Table 25. Check that the output relay operates and the
correct flags are displayed. Reset the flags and repeat for the lower value of
current and check that the relay does not operate, the trip led is not lit and no flags
are fault displayed.
Current level

(Io>> and Io>>> setting range (Io>> and Io>>> setting range
0.5% to 80% In) 2% to 320% In)

Table 25
If the Io>>> threshold is to be used by the customer then the EARTH FAULT function
8.7 Special note when using as sensitive earth fault relays
The actual minimum operation current for the sensitive earth fault settings will be
affected by the magnetising current that is taken by the core balance CT. The effect
that the CT has on the relay setting can be assessed if the primary circuit is de-
energised, by reconnecting the CTs to the relay and repeating setting test 6.2. The
effective setting may be more than doubled in some cases.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 22 of 44
SECTION 9. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT ELEMENT
To test the directional phase fault element, it is necessary to set some function links
to directionalise the phase fault overcurrent elements. Table 26 shows which phase
fault function links must be set to “1” to enable directional control of each of the
phase fault elements.
Phase fault element Phase fault function link

I> 3
I>> 4
I>>> 5
Table 26
If the relay being commissioned has directional phase fault elements then the test
equipment should be wired to the relay as shown in Figure 2. Care should be
taken to ensure that the correct polarities are connected to the phase angle meter.
With the phase shifter set to 0° the phase angle meter should read 0°.
9.2 Angular boundary of operation
With the test connections as detailed in Section 9.1 apply current and rated volts
to the phase under test. The current should be set above the setting threshold to I>.
Make a note of the relay characteristic angle (RCA) which can be found under the
Phase Fault (1) heading of the relay menu.
A B C
A A 18 19 17
B B
C C
N 19 17 18
N VPOL
Phase
angle
meter
R
21 23 25
22 24 26
IOP
Figure 3. Connections for directional overcurrent relays KCEG142/242

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 23 of 44
The forward start contact selected by the [0B06 I> Fwd] relay mask under the
RELAY MASKS heading and the reverse start contact selected by the [0B07 I> Rev]
relay mask should be monitored to indicate when the relay is in the operate
region.
Taking positive angles as leading and negative angles as lagging, adjust the
phase shifting transformer so the phase angle meter reads (180°+RCA). Check that
the reverse start contacts selected by the [0B07 I> Rev] relay mask have closed
and the forward start contacts selected by the [0B06 I> Fwd] relay mask are open.
Rotate the phase shifting transformer so the phase lag is decreasing or the phase
lead is increasing on the phase angle meter and continue until the forward start
contacts close and the reverse contacts open. Note the angle on the phase angle
meter and check it is within the limits stated in Table 27. Rotate the phase shifting
transformer in the opposite direction to check the other operating boundary.
Relay in operate region :
Phase angle meter indication Tolerance
(RCA –90°) lag through to (RCA +90°) lead ±5°
Table 27
9.3 Current sensitivity for I>
This test checks the current sensitivity of the relay. The start contact selected by the
[0B06 I>] relay mask (or by [0B06 I> Fwd] for directional phase fault relays)
under the RELAY MASKS heading should be monitored to indicate when the input
current exceeds the setting current Is. This can be by either monitoring the relay
contacts or viewing the [0021 Rly Status] display in the SYSTEM DATA heading.
Where there is a star point on the relay, it is advantageous to inhibit the operation
of the earth fault elements (inhibit to>, to>>, to>>>) in order to avoid confusion
with trip signals and indications.
Inject single phase current into a convenient phase current input on the relay and
slowly increase the current, noting the pick-up value at which the START relay
operates. Reduce the current slowly and note the drop-off value at which the START
relay resets. Check the pick-up and drop-off current is within the range shown in
the Table 28.
Current level
Pick-up 0.95 x Is – 1.05 x Is
Table 28
The test must be repeated on all the phase elements of the relay.
Table 29 lists the terminals into which current should be injected for each of the
phases.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 24 of 44
Phase Terminals
A 21 – 22
B 23 – 24
C 25 – 26
Table 29
In addition, with some site wiring, it may be necessary to inject A-N, B-N, C-N.
9.4 Time characteristic for t>
The relay selected for the t> trip can be found under the RELAY MASKS heading in
[0B08 tA>], [0B09 tB>] and [0B0A tC>]. The terminals for each relay are shown
in the application diagram. Connect the relay contacts for the t> trip to both trip
the test set and to stop a timer.
With the rated three phase polarising voltage applied to the relay, set to twice the
threshold level and the phase shifter adjusted to the characteristic angle of the
relay, inject a 2 x rated current into one phase of the relay (terminals numbers are
given in Table 29 for each phase) and measure the operation time. If the test set
used can inject sufficient current, repeat the test at 10 x setting current. Check the
operating time against Table 30.
0.04 seconds.
1 SI30xDT 10.03 9.53 - 10.53 2.971 2.822 - 3.119
2 VI30xDT 13.50 12.83 - 14.18 1.500 1.425 - 1.575
3 EI10xDT 26.67 25.33 - 28.00 0.808 0.768 - 0.848
4 LTI30xDT 120.0 114.0 - 126.0 13.33 12.67 - 14.00
5 MI 7.606 7.226 - 7.987 2.414 2.293 - 2.534
6 VI 14.06 13.35 - 14.76 1.378 1.309 - 1.447
7 EI 19.04 18.09 - 20.00 0.813 0.772 - 0.853
8 STI30xDT 1.778 1.690 - 1.867 0.518 0.492 - 0.544
9 RECT 966 917 - 1014 0.115 0.110 - 0.121
Table 30
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 25 of 44
9.5 Current setting for I>> and I>>>

Caution
This test is to check that the instantaneous current level of the I>> and I>>> is
correct. If the I>> element is to be used by the customer then the PHASE FAULT
at the customer’s current setting. The relay selected for the I>> trip can be found
under the RELAY MASKS heading in [0B0B t>>].
phase shifter adjusted to the characteristic angle of the relay, inject the higher of
the two currents specified in Table 31 and check that the output relay operates and
the correct flags are displayed. Reset the flags and repeat for the lower value of
current and check that the relay does not operate, the trip led is not lit and no flags
are fault displayed.
TRIP I>> / I>>> NO TRIP I>> / I>>>

1.05 x current setting 0.95 x current setting
Table 31
If the I>>> threshold is to be used by the customer then the EARTH FAULT function
SECTION 10. SELECTIVE LOGIC
For the selective logic checks only the features that are to be used in the
application should be tested. Relay settings must not be changed to enable
other logic functions that are not being used to be tested. For detailed descriptions
of the selective logic please refer to Chapter 3, Section 4 of this manual.
10.1 Opto-input checks
This test is to check that all the opto-inputs are functioning correctly. The state of the
opto-isolated input can be viewed from the [0020 Log Status] display under the
SYSTEM DATA heading. Relays of the type 110, 120 and 210 only have 3 opto-
inputs (L0, L1 and L2). All other relay types have the full 8 opto-inputs (L0, L1, L2,
L3, L4, L5, L6 and L7).
To enable energisation of the opto-inputs, terminal 8 should be linked to terminals
52 and 55. The opto-inputs can then be individually energised by connecting
terminal 7 to the appropriate opto-input listed in Table 32.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 26 of 44
Opto-input number Terminal

L0 46
L1 48
L2 50
L3 45
L4 47
L5 49
L6 51
L7 53
Table 32
The status of each opto-input can be viewed by displaying [0020 Log Status],
which will be found towards the end of the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu.
When each opto is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the
display will change to indicate the new state of the inputs. The number printed on
the front plate under the display will identify which opto each character represents.
A “1” indicates an energised state and a “0” indicates a de-energised state.
Note: The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external 50V
battery in some installations. Check that this is not the case before
connecting the field voltage otherwise damage to the relay may
result.
10.2. Controlled blocking of time delay elements
These tests should only be done if the particular relay application requires blocking
of one or more of the time delay settings associated with the overcurrent elements.
Typically this will occur in auto-reclose schemes when blocking of the instantaneous
element is required for certain parts of the auto-reclose cycle, or in blocking
schemes used to provide unit protection such as that to protect a busbar.
To perform the earth fault element blocking tests, opto-isolated inputs must have
been allocated for each blocking function. Table 33 lists which input masks must
have inputs allocated to them to enable blocking of earth fault elements. It is not
necessary for opto-inputs to be assigned in masks to elements which do not require
blocking.
Earth fault element Input mask

to> [0A01 Blk to>]
to>> [0A02 Blk to>>]
to>>> [0A03 Blk to>>>]
Table 33
To perform the phase fault element blocking tests, opto-isolated inputs must have
been allocated for each blocking function. Table 34 lists which input masks must
have inputs allocated to them to enable blocking of phase fault elements. It is not
necessary for opto-inputs to be assigned in masks to elements which do not require
blocking.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 27 of 44
Phase fault element Input mask

t> [0A04 Blk t>]
t>> [0A05 Blk t>>]
t>>> [0A06 Blk t>>>]
Table 34
Repeat Tests 8.5 and 8.6 for earth faults and Tests 9.4 and 9.5 for phase faults,
with appropriate opto-inputs energised and check that the element is correctly
blocked and does not operate.
The test should be repeated on each element that has been allocated a blocking
input.
10.3 Undervoltage logic
Only directional relays have the undervoltage trip facility.
If PHASE FAULT Function Link 8 is set to “1” then undervoltage tripping is blocked
if the circuit breaker status input indicates that the breaker is open.
If PHASE FAULT Function Link 8 is set to “0” then undervoltage tripping is not
controlled by the position of the circuit breaker.
If PHASE FAULT Function Link 9 is set to “0” then all three voltages must be below
setting for the set time delay before the relay will perform an undervoltage trip.
If PHASE FAULT Function Link 9 is set to “1” then the relay will perform an
undervoltage trip if any one of the voltages falls below setting for the set delay
period.
To test the undervoltage logic, a single phase voltage must be applied to the relay.
When the voltage falls below the threshold setting V< the timer tV< will be
energised and when it times out, the selected output relay in relay mask [0B13
tV<] will pick up. When the applied voltage exceeds the threshold setting V<, the
output relay will instantaneously reset. The setting value for V< and tV< can be
found in the PHASE FAULT heading of the menu.
The length of the delay measured should be within tV< ±0.5% + (0.02 to 0.05)
seconds and the voltage at which the relay operates should be within ±10% of the
V< setting.
Note: If a three phase voltage is applied to the relay, then all three phase
to neutral voltages will need to be reduced below the set voltage
threshold V< before the output relay can operate and any one phase
voltage exceeding the threshold will cause reset.
The auxiliary timers present in the relay should only be tested if they are to be used
in the intended application and if the timer settings are not so high that testing is
impractical. Reference should be made to Chapter 4 for the software link selection
and the effect of this on the use of the auxiliary timers.
10.4.1 Timer AUX1
To test the tAUX1 time delay an external switch must be connected to start an
external timer interval meter and energise the opto input that activates tAUX1. The
time interval meter must be stopped by the contacts of the relay allocated in relay
mask [0B10 Aux1] when it operates.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 28 of 44
The measured time delay should be within the set time tAUX1 ±0.5% + (0.02 to
0.05) seconds.
If the LOGIC function link [0901 Log Links] link B is set to “1” then tAUX1 can be
started by the under-frequency element. This function can be tested either using a
variable frequency supply or by selecting an under-frequency setting greater than
the system frequency.
10.4.2 Timer AUX2
0.05) seconds.
For other uses of tAUX2 see Chapter 4, Section 10. To summarise, tAUX2 can be
selected as part of the loss of load scheme, to provide a time delay on the stage 4
earth fault element, as part of the disturbance recorder reset facility or as part of
the cold load pick-up scheme (Chapter 4, Section 5.12 and Chapter 8,
Section10.7).
10.4.3 Timer AUX3
0.05) seconds.
Timer tAUX3 can be selected as part of the cold load pick-up scheme (Chapter 4,
Section 5.12 and Chapter 8, Section10.7).
10.5 Breaker fail
Operation of relay 3, initiated via any relay mask, will start the breaker fail timer
tBF. The breaker fail timer can also be initiated in response to a logic input being
energised if that logic input is allocated in the mask [0A09 Ext Trip].
The relay should be connected to an overcurrent test set as described in
Section 7.1 for overcurrent relays, or Section 8.1 for directional overcurrent relays.
A time interval meter should be connected so that it starts when current is injected
into the relay and arranged to stop by one of two functions:
- If the function link [0901 LOG Links] link 2 is set to “0” the time interval
meter should be arranged to stop when a relay allocated by the mask [0B0F
CB Fail] is operated by the breaker fail timer.
- If function link [0901 LOG Links] link 2 is set to “1” then the time interval
meter should be arranged to stop when a relay allocated via relay masks
[0B01 Io> Fwd], [0B02 Io> Rev], [0B02 Io> Rev] or [0B07 I> Rev] resets.
The measured time delay should be within the set value of tBF ±0.5% + (0.02 to
0.05) seconds.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 29 of 44
10.6 Change of setting group

Test the change of setting group if [0003 SD Links] function link 4 is set to “1” as
this will enable control of the setting group. If link 4 is set to “0” then there is no
need for the tests in this section to be carried out.
The setting group can be changed by energising the opto-input allocated by input
mask [0A0D Set Grp2].
The setting group can be changed by selecting [0901 LOG Links] function link 8 to
“1”. This selects and holds the group 2 settings operational.
However, if link [0901 LOG Links] function link 5 is set to “1” and no relay is
allocated in input mask [0A0D Set Grp2] the setting group will have to be tested
as described under cold load pick-up in Section 10.7.
If link [0003 SD Links] function link 3 is set to “1” then the setting group can be
changed by a command over the communication channel, either from the master
station or a local PC via suitable software.
To test the change of setting group initiate the change as described above. The
active setting group can be observed in the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu
under [000E Grp now] where the current selected group is displayed. The active
setting group is stored with the flags for each fault record.
If necessary some of the earlier setting tests can be repeated on setting group 2 to
verify the settings in that group.
10.7 Cold load start/pick-up
The cold load start feature can operate in either of two ways.
The first method of operation is by inhibiting the instantaneous low set element for
an additional time delay, equivalent to the setting of the tAUX3, when the circuit is
first energised. This would be achieved using a circuit breaker auxiliary contact
that is closed when the breaker is in the open state. This contact would be used to
energise a logic input that would be allocated in mask [0A0C Aux3]. A relay
would be allocated in the output mask [0B12 Aux3] and a logic input would be
energised via its contacts. This logic input would then be allocated to block the
short time overcurrent elements.
To test the cold load start in this configuration the relay must be connected to an
overcurrent test set as described in Sections 6.1; 7.1; 8.1 and 9.1 for the
appropriate type of relay. The current should be set to a value above the current
threshold setting I>> (or Io>>) and then switched to the relay. The time interval
meter should be connected so that it starts when current is applied to the relay and
stops when the output relay selected in the [0B0B t>>], [0B04 to>>] mask
operates. The measured time should be increased by an amount equal to setting
for tAUX3 when the cold load pick-up function is activated.
To activate the cold load pick-up timer energise the opto-input allocated in [0A0F
CB Open] or [0A0B Aux2] as appropriate.
Note: When timer tAUX2 is in circuit there will be a delay before the cold
load pick-up function is activated.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 30 of 44
The second method of operation is by selecting setting group 2 when tAUX3 is

energised. To operate in this way the function links must be set as follows:
SYSTEM DATA function link [0003 SD Links] link 3 (Rem ChgGrp) = “0”
SYSTEM DATA function link [0003 SD Links] link 4 (En Grp2) = “1”
LOGIC function link [0901 LOG Links] link 5 (tAUX3 Grp2) = “1”
Input mask [0A0C Aux3] must be allocated an input.
The cold load start can be initiated by energising the input set by the [0A0C Aux3]
mask.
If delayed initiation is required, allocate the logic input in mask [0A0B Aux2]
instead of [0A0C Aux3]; set LOGIC function link [0901 LOG Links] link 6 (tAUX2-
tAUX3) = “1” and set the required delay on tAUX2. For installations where an
auxiliary circuit breaker contact is not available, undercurrent initiation via tAUX2
may be used. In this case, if no initial delay is necessary tAUX2 can be set to
zero.
To test the cold load start, the relay should be injected with current above its setting
during the cold load start period. The trip flags can then be examined to ensure
that it was setting group 2 which initiated the trip during the cold load start period.
10.8 Circuit breaker control
Provided the relay is wired to control a circuit breaker a manual test can be
performed via the user interface of the relay as a check that the connection is
functioning correctly.
10.8.1 CB trip test
The relay mask [0B1D CB Trip] must be assigned to the output relays that are to
trip the circuit breaker. This will not enable the remote control of the circuit breaker
provided system data link 2 is set to “0”. The circuit breaker trip time delay (tTRIP)
under the LOGIC heading, should be set to a value appropriate to the application.
Select the SYSTEM DATA heading from the menu.
Step down the column with short [F] key presses until the display reads:
0010 CB Control
No Operation
Press the [+] key and the cursor will flash on the bottom line of the display.
Press the [+] key once again and the bottom line of the display will change to TRIP.
Press the [F] key and the prompt will be displayed:
Are You Sure?
+ = YES – = NO
Press the [0] key to abort.
[–] key to change option.
[+] key to execute command.
After executing the open command the output relay assigned to trip the circuit
breaker by the [0B1D CB Trip] relay mask, will operate for the trip time (tTRIP).
During the trip test the status of this relay should be monitored to ensure it operates
correctly.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 31 of 44
10.8.2 CB close test

The relay mask [0B1E CB Close] must be assigned to the output relays that are to
trip the circuit breaker. This will not enable the remote control of the circuit breaker
provided the System Data Link 2 is set to “0”. The circuit breaker close time delay
(tCLOSE), under the LOGIC heading, should be set to a value appropriate to the
particular application.
Select the SYSTEM DATA heading from the menu.
Step down the column with short [F] key presses until the display reads:
0010 CB Control
No Operation
Press the [+] key and the cursor will flash on the bottom line of the display.
Press the [+] key once again and the bottom line of the display will change to TRIP
and press again to display CLOSE.
Press the [F] key and the prompt will be displayed:
Are You Sure?
+ = YES – = NO
Press the [0] key to abort.
[–] key to change option.
[+] key to execute command.
After executing the close command the output relay assigned to close the circuit
breaker by the [0B1E CB Close] relay mask, will operate for the close time delay
(tCLOSE). During the close test the status of this relay should be monitored to
ensure it operates correctly.
10.9 Broken conductor logic
The output relay selected for the broken conductor logic is allocated in the output
relay mask [0A0C t>>>]. To latch the flags relay RLY3 must be assigned in this
same output masks.
Inject current into two phases at a current level above the setting level of the third
overcurrent stage. Confirm that indication is given of a broken conductor
condition after t>>> has timed out.
10.10 Thermal overcurrent
Select [0601 PF Links] link 0 = “1” to enable the thermal element. The settings for
the time constant (TC), the continuous thermal current rating (Ith>) and the thermal
alarm (th>) will be found in the menu columns containing the phase fault settings.
The relay selected for the thermal trip can be found under the RELAY MASKS
heading in [0B18 thTrip]. Relay 3 is most likely to be the relay used as otherwise
the fault flags will not latch for a thermal trip. The terminals for each relay are
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 32 of 44
shown in the application diagram. Connect the relay contacts for the th Trip to both
trip the test set and to stop a timer. Inject single phase current of 2x setting current
into one of the phase fault current inputs listed in Table 18. If the test set used can
inject sufficient current, repeat the test at 10 x setting current. Check that the
operating time for the relay is within the range shown in the Table 35 below. The
time quoted are for zero pre-fault current ie. with the thermal state fully reset.
x Ith> Operating time at specified current (seconds) ±2% TC

TC = 1 min TC = 10 min TC = 20min
2 19.30 192.95 385.90
4 4.27 42.74 85.47
Table 35
There is an additional tolerance of between 0.02 and 0.04 seconds.
The operating times given make no allowance for errors in the measuring
instruments.
For other multiples of setting and other time constants the operating time is given
by:
t = -60 x TC x LOGe(1.0 - (1.1 / I2 )) seconds
Where: I is the current in multiples of Ith>
TC is the time constant in minutes.
t is the operating time
SECTION 11. ON-LOAD TESTS
There are some tests that may be carried out with the circuit on-load provided there
are no operational restrictions in force that prohibit this.
11.1 On-load measurement checks
Measure the secondary CT currents and if applicable, the secondary VT voltages.
Compare the values of the secondary quantities with the relay’s measured values,
which can be found in MEASUREMENTS (1). If the CT and VT ratios are set to 1:1
then the values will be within ±5% of the secondary quantities, if the CT and VT
ratios are not set to 1:1, then the measurement values will be equal to the
secondary values multiplied by the set transformer ratios.
A check should be made of the signing of the direction of power flow displayed by
the relay against the actual power flow. The signing of the direction of power flow
is set in menu cell [031E Power mode] to one of the following four alternatives:
Mode 0 - Net export signing : + = net export of power and negative VARs.
Mode 1 - Import to busbar : + = net power flow to busbar in (a + jB) form.
Mode 2 - Export from busbar : + = net power flow to feeder in (a + jB) form.
Mode 3 - Net import signing : + = net import of power and negative VARs.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 33 of 44
11.2 On load directional check

Check the relay is wired correctly according to the system diagram.
Measure that the secondary VT voltage is correct, and check with a phase rotation
meter that the system phase rotation is correct.
Check that the CT polarities are correct and that the current flowing in the neutral
circuit of the current transformers is negligible.
If it is required to check the directionality of the overcurrent elements this can be
done by setting I> to below the load current and monitoring [0B06 I> Fwd] and
[0B07 I> Rev]. It should be noted that the relay will trip for load flow in the
operate direction after the set delay on t> unless blocked by operating [0A04 BLK
t>].
11.2.1 Phase fault directional elements – KCEG 142/242
Check the magnitude and direction of flow of the load current.
Check the relay characteristic angle for the phase fault elements is correct.
Note the current setting of the overcurrent setting I> (this will be found under the
PHASE FAULT(1) column heading of the menu). Then temporarily reduce this setting
to a value less than the level of load current that is flowing at the time. The
direction of the relay can then be determined from operation of either the forward
or reverse start relays.
Should the operation of the relay be the reverse of what is expected, recheck the
direction of current flow against the settings of the relay before making any
changes to the external connections.
Restore all settings to their application values.
Note: These tests alone are not conclusive that the phase connections to
the relay are correct. A phase angle measurement is required for
conclusive testing.
11.2.2 Earth fault directional relay – KCEG142/242
Earth fault directional relays are not energised under normal load conditions and it
is therefore necessary to simulate operating conditions.
For relays that also have directional phase elements the earth fault polarising
voltage is derived from the VT phase inputs.
To carry out an on-load test, we recommend the temporary connections shown in
Figure 4 which simulate a phase A to neutral fault.
If load current is flowing in the operating direction then, providing that the correct
phase relationships of the CTs and VTs have been proven and the artificially
generated earth fault current is above setting, the forward start contacts will be
closed.
Should the load current happen to be in the reverse direction then the current
connections should be temporarily reversed, to check the operation of the relay,
and then restored.
conclusive testing.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 34 of 44
11.2.3 Earth fault directional relay – KCEG 112/152

Earth fault directional relays are not energised under normal load conditions and it
is therefore necessary to simulate operating conditions.
For relays with only earth fault elements the relay should be connected to an open
delta winding of a voltage transformer and the residual circuit of the current
transformers.
There are many ways of making the special connections on the CT and VT circuits
to carry out an on-load test, but we recommend the temporary connections shown
in Figure 5 which simulate a phase A to neutral fault.
If load current is flowing in the operating direction then provided that the correct
phase relationships of the CTs and VTs have been proven and the artificially
generated earth fault current is above setting, then the forward start contacts will
be closed.
Should the load current happen to be in the reverse direction then the current
connections should be temporarily reversed, to check the operation of the relay,
and then restored.
conclusive testing.
Direction of forward current flow

P2 P1 A
A
S2 S1
B
C B
C Phase rotation
A B C Temporary
short circuit
connections Directional relays
21
22
Temporary 23
a b c open circuit 24
connections 25
26
27
28
17
18
19
20
Figure 4. Connections for on-load directional earth fault test KCEG142/242

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 35 of 44

P2 P1 A
A
S2 S1
B
C B
C Phase rotation
A B C Temporary
short circuit
connections Directional relays
dn
Temporary
da open circuit
connections
27
Io
28
19
Vo
20
Figure 5. Connections for on-load directional earth fault test KCEG112/152
SECTION 12. PROBLEM SOLVING
12.1 Password lost or not accepted

Relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.
Only uppercase letters are accepted.
Password can be changed by the user, see Chapter 3, Section 3.
There is an additional unique recovery password associated with the relay which
can be supplied by the factory, or service agent, if given details of its serial
number.
The serial number will be found in the system data column of the menu and should
correspond to the number on the label at the top right hand corner of the front
plate of the relay. If they differ, quote the one in the system data column.
12.2 Protection settings
12.2.1 Settings for high sets not displayed
For Group 1 settings:
Set function link [0601 PF Links] link 1 to “1” to turn on settings I>>/t>>.
Set function link [0601 PF Links] link 2 to “1” to turn on settings I>>>/t>>>.
Set function link [0501 EF Links] link 1 to “1” to turn on settings Io>>/to>>.
Set function link [0501 EF Links] link 2 to “1” to turn on settings Io>>>/to>>>.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 36 of 44
For Group 2 settings:

Set function link [0801 PF Links] link 1 to “1” to turn on settings I>>/t>>.
Set function link [0801 PF Links] link 2 to “1” to turn on settings I>>>/t>>>.
Set function link [0701 EF Links] link 1 to “1” to turn on settings Io>>/to>>.
Set function link [0701 EF Links] link 2 to “1” to turn on settings Io>>>/to>>>.
12.2.2 Second setting group not displayed
Set function link [0003 SD Links] link 4 to “1” to turn on the group 2 settings.
12.2.3 Function links cannot be changed
Enter the password as these menu cells are protected.
Links are not selectable if associated text is not displayed.
12.2.4 Curve selection cannot be changed
Enter the password as these menu cells are protected.
Curves may not have been made selectable in the particular relay.
12.3 Alarms
If the watchdog relay operates, first check that the relay is energised from the
auxiliary supply. If it is, then try to determine the cause of the problem by
examining the alarm flags towards the bottom of the SYSTEM DATA column of the
menu. This will not be possible if the display is not responding to key presses.
Having attempted to determine the cause of the alarm it may be possible to return
the relay to an operable state by resetting it. To do this, remove the auxiliary
power supply for approximately 10 seconds and if it is powered from the CT
circuit as well, remove this source of supply, possibly by withdrawing the module
from its case. Then re-establish the supplies and the relay should return to an
operating state.
Recheck the alarm status if the alarm led is still indicating an alarm state.
The following notes will give further guidance.
12.3.1 Watchdog alarm
Auxiliary powered relays: the watchdog relay will pick up when the relay is
operational to indicate a healthy state, with its “make” contact closed. When an
alarm condition that requires some action to be taken is detected, the watchdog
relay resets and its “break” contact will close to give an alarm.
Dual powered relays: the watchdog relay operates in a slightly modified way on
this version of the relay, because it does not initiate an alarm for loss of the
auxiliary power, as this may be taken from an insecure source, or it may be
powered solely from the current circuit. In either case it will not be required to
indicate an alarm for loss of the auxiliary power source, as this may be a normal
operational condition. Operation of the watchdog is therefore inverted so that it
will pick-up for a failed condition, closing its “make” contact to give an alarm and
in the normal condition it will remain dropped-off with its “break” contact closed to
indicate that it is in a healthy state.
Note: The green led will usually follow the operation of the watchdog relay
in either of the above two cases.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 37 of 44
There is no shorting contact across the case terminals connected to the “break”
contact of the watchdog relay. Therefore, the indication for a failed/healthy relay
will be cancelled when the relay is removed from its case.
If the relay is still functioning, the actual problem causing the alarm can be found
from the alarm records in the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu (see Chapter 3,
Section 7.1).
12.3.2 Unconfigured or uncalibrated alarm
For a CONFIGURATION alarm the protection is stopped and no longer performing
its intended function. For an UNCALIBRATED alarm the protection will still be
operational but there will be an error in its calibration that will require attention.
It may be left running provided the error does not cause any grading problems.
To return the relay to a serviceable state the initial factory configuration will have
to be reloaded and the relay re-calibrated. It is recommended that the work be
carried out at the factory, or entrusted to a recognised service centre.
12.3.3 Setting error alarm
A SETTING alarm indicates that the area of non-volatile memory where the
selected protection settings are stored, has been corrupted. The current settings
should be checked against those applied at the commissioning stage or any later
changes that have been made.
If a personal computer (PC) is used during commissioning then it is recommended
that the final settings applied to the relay are copied to a floppy disc with the serial
number of the relay used as the file name. The setting can then be readily loaded
back into the relay if necessary, or to a replacement relay.
12.3.4 “No service” alarm
This alarm flag can only be observed when the relay is in the calibration or
configuration mode when the protection program will be stopped.
12.3.5 Fault flags will not reset
These flags can only be reset when the flags Fn are being displayed or by resetting
the fault records, see Section 3.3.10.
12.4 Records
12.4.1 Problems with event records
Fault records will only be generated if RLY3 is operated as this relay is the trigger
to store the records.
Fault records can be generated in response to another protection operating if RLY3
is operated by one of its trip contacts via an auxiliary input. This will result in the
fault values, as measured by the K-Relay, being stored at the instant RLY3 resets.
The flag display will include a flag to identify the auxiliary input that initiated the
record.
Fault currents recorded are lower than actual values, as the fault is interrupted
before measurement is completed.
Few fault records can be stored when changes in state of logic inputs and relay
outputs are stored in the event records. These inputs and outputs can generate
many events for each fault occurrence and limit the total number of faults that can
be stored. Setting System Data Link 7 to “0” will turn off this feature and allow the
maximum number of fault records to be stored.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 38 of 44
The event records are erased if the auxiliary supply to the relay is lost for a period
exceeding the hold-up time of the internal power supply.
Events can only be read via the serial communication port and not on the lcd.
Any spare opto-inputs may be used to log changes of state of external contacts in
the event record buffer of the K-Relay. The opto-input does not have to be assigned
to a particular function in order to achieve this.
The oldest event is overwritten by the next event to be stored when the buffer
becomes full.
When a master station has successfully read a record it usually clears it
automatically and when all records have been read the event bit in the status byte
is set to “0” to indicate that there are no longer any records to be retrieved.
12.4.2 Problems with disturbance records
Only one record can be held in the buffer and the recorder must be reset before
another record can be stored. Automatic reset can be achieved by setting function
link [0003 SD Links] link 6 to “1”. It will then reset the recorder 3 seconds after a
current, greater than the undercurrent setting, has been restored to the protected
circuit.
The disturbance records are erased if the auxiliary supply to the relay is lost for a
period exceeding the hold-up time of the internal power supply.
Disturbance records can only be read via the serial communication port. It is not
possible to display them on the lcd.
No trigger selected to initiate the storing of a disturbance record.
The disturbance recorder is automatically reset on restoration of current above the
undercurrent setting for greater than 3 seconds. Change function link [0003 SD
Links] link 6 to “0” to select manual reset.
Post trigger set to maximum value and so missing the fault.
When a master station has successfully read a record it will clear it automatically
and the disturbance record bit in the status byte will then be set to “0” to indicate
that there is no longer a record to be retrieved.
12.5 Circuit breaker maintenance records
When a replacement relay is fitted it may be desirable to increment the CB
maintenance counters to the values of that on the old relay. The current squared
counters can be incremented by applying a number of secondary injection current
pulses to the current inputs of the relay, but note that the counter will increment
rapidly for large current values. The counter for the number of circuit breaker
operations can be incremented manually by operating the relay the required
number of times.
The circuit breaker trip time for the last fault cannot be cleared to zero. This is to
enable the master station to interrogate the relay for this value as a supervisory
function.
The circuit breaker maintenance counters are not incremented when another
protection trips the circuit breaker. Add a trip input from the protection to an
auxiliary input of the relay and arrange for relay RLY3 or RLY7 to operate
instantaneously in response to the input.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 39 of 44
12.6 Communications
Address cannot be automatically allocated if the remote change of setting has
been inhibited by function link [0003 SD Links] link 0. This must be first set to “1”,
alternatively the address must be entered manually via the user interface on the
relay.
Address cannot be allocated automatically unless the address is first manually set
to 0. This can also be achieved by a global command including the serial number
of the relay.
Relay address set to 255, the global address for which no replies are permitted.
12.6.1 Measured values do not change
Values in the MEASUREMENTS (1) and MEASUREMENTS (2) columns are snap-
shots of the values at the time they were requested. To obtain a value that varies
with the measured quantity it should be added to the poll list as described in
R8514, the User Manual for the Protection Access Software & Tool kit.
12.6.2 Relay no longer responding
Check if other relays that are further along the bus are responding and if so,
power down the relay for 10 seconds and then re-energise to reset the
communication processor. This should not be necessary as the reset operation
occurs automatically when the relay detects a loss of communication.
If relays further along the bus are not communicating, check to find out which are
responding towards the master station. If some are responding then the position of
the break in the bus can be determined by deduction. If none is responding then
check for data on the bus or reset the communication port driving the bus with
requests.
Check there are not two relays with the same address on the bus.
12.6.3 No response to remote control commands
Check that the relay is not inhibited from responding to remote commands by
observing the system data function link settings. If so reset as necessary; a
password will be required.
System data function links cannot be set over the communication link if the remote
change of settings has been inhibited by setting system data function link [0003
SD Links] 0 to “0”. Reset [0003 SD Links] link 0 to “1” manually via the user
interface on the relay first.
Relay is not identified in the Circuit Breaker Control Menu of the Courier Access
Software if two auxiliary circuit breaker contacts have not been connected to opto-
inputs of the relay, to indicate its position via the Plant Status Word. Check input
mask settings and the connections to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.
12.7 Output relays remain picked-up
Relays remain picked-up when de-selected by link or mask
If an output relay is operated at the time it is de-selected, either by a software link
change or by de-selecting it in an output mask, it may remain operated until the
relay is powered down and up again. It is therefore advisable to momentarily
remove the energising supply after such changes.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 40 of 44
12.8 Thermal state

12.8.1 Thermal state reset to zero
If the thermal ammeters are reset this will also reset the thermal state of the thermal
protection.
12.8.2 Thermal ammeter time constants
The setting for the time constant is shared between the thermal ammeter and the
thermal protection. Priority would normally be given to the thermal protection.
SECTION 13. MAINTENANCE
13.1 Remote testing

K-Range Midos relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than
earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial
action can be taken. However, some periodic tests could be done to ensure that
the relay is functioning correctly. If the relay can be communicated with from a
remote point, via its serial port, then some testing can be carried out without
actually visiting the site.
13.1.1 Alarms
The alarm status led should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions
exist. The alarm records can then be read to identify the nature of any alarm that
may exist.
13.1.2 Measurement accuracy
The values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to
check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are, then the
analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly.
13.1.3 Trip test
If the relay is configured to provide remote control of the circuit breaker then a trip
test can be performed remotely in several ways:
1. Measure the load current in each phase and reduce the phase fault setting of
the relay to a known value that is less than the load current. The relay should
trip in the appropriate time for the given multiple of setting current.
The settings can then be returned to their usual value and the circuit breaker
re-closed.
Note: If the second group of settings is not being used for any other
purpose it could be used for this test by having a lower setting
selected and issuing a command to change the setting group that is
in use to initiate the tripping sequence.
2. If the relay is connected for remote control of the circuit breaker then a trip/
close cycle can be performed. This method will not check as much of the
functional circuit of the relay as the previous method but it will not need the
settings of the relay to be changed.
If a failure to trip occurs the relay status word can be viewed, whilst the test is
repeated, to check that the output relay is being commanded to operate. If it is not
responding then an output relay allocated to a less essential function may be
reallocated to the trip function to effect a temporary repair, but a visit to site may
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 41 of 44
be needed to effect a wiring change. See Chapter 3, Section 3.8 for how to set
relay masks.
13.1.4 CB maintenance
Maintenance records for the circuit breaker can be obtained at this time by
reading the appropriate data in the MEASUREMENT(2) and the FAULT RECORDS
columns.
13.2 Local testing
When testing locally, similar tests may be carried out to check for correct
functioning of the relay.
13.2.1 Alarms
The alarm status led should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions
exist. The alarm records can then be read to identify the nature of any alarm that
may exist.
13.2.2 Measurement accuracy
The values measured by the relay can be checked against own values injected into
the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals.
Suitable test methods will be found in Section 1 of this chapterwhich deals with
commissioning. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
13.2.3 Trip test
If the relay is configured to provide a “trip test” via its user interface then this
should be performed to test the output trip relays. If the relay is configured for
remote control of the circuit breaker the “trip test” will initiate the remote CB trip
relay and not the main trip relay used by the protections. In which case the main
trip relay should be tested by injecting a current above the protection setting so
that operation occurs.
If an output relay is found to have failed, an alternative relay can be reallocated
until such time as a replacement can be fitted. See Chapter 3, Section 3.8 for how
to set relay masks.
13.2.4 CB maintenance
Maintenance records for the circuit breaker can be obtained at this time by
reading the appropriate data in the MEASUREMENT(2) and the FAULT RECORDS
columns.
13.2.5 Additional tests
Additional tests can be selected from the Commissioning Instructions as required.
13.3 Method of repair
Please read the Safety Section and the handling instructions in Section 1 before
proceeding with this work. This will ensure that no further damage is caused by
incorrect handling of the electronic components.
13.3.1 Replacing a pcb
a) Replacement of user interface
Withdraw the module from its case.
Remove the four screws that are placed one at each corner of the front plate.
Remove the front plate.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 42 of 44
Lever the top edge of the user interface board forwards to unclip it from its
mounting.
Then pull the pcb upwards to unplug it from the connector at its lower edge.
Replace with a new interface board and assemble in the reverse order.
b) Replacement of main processor board
This is the pcb at the extreme left of the module, when viewed from the front.
To replace this board:
First remove the screws holding the side screen in place. There are two
screws through the top plate of the module and two more through the base
plate.
Remove screen to expose the pcb.
Remove the two retaining screws, one at the top edge and the other directly
below it on the lower edge of the pcb.
Separate the pcb from the sockets at the front edge of the board. Note that
they are a tight fit and will require levering apart, taking care to ease the
connectors apart gradually so as not to crack the front pcb card. The
connectors are designed for ease of assembly in manufacture and not for
continual disassembly of the unit.
Reassemble in the reverse of this sequence, making sure that the screen plate
is replaced with all four screws securing it.
c) Replacement of auxiliary expansion board
This is the second board in from the left hand side of the module.
Remove the processor board as described above in b).
Remove the two securing screws that hold the auxiliary expansion board in
place.
Unplug the pcb from the front bus as described for the processor board and
withdraw.
Replace in the reverse of this sequence, making sure that the screen plate is
replaced with all four screws securing it.
13.3.2 Replacing output relays and opto-isolators
PCBs are removed as described in Section 13.3.1 b and c. They are replaced in
the reverse order. Calibration is not usually required when a pcb is replaced unless
either of the two boards that plug directly on to the left hand terminal block are
replaced, as these directly affect the calibration.
Note that this pcb is a through hole plated board and care must be taken not to
damage it when removing a relay for replacement, otherwise solder may not flow
through the hole and make a good connection to the tracks on the component side
of the pcb.
13.3.3 Replacing the power supply board
Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the top plate of
the module.
Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the bottom plate
of the module.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 43 of 44
Unplug the back plane from the power supply pcb.

Remove the securing screw at the top and bottom of the power supply board.
Withdraw the power supply board from the rear, unplugging it from the front bus.
Reassemble in the reverse of this sequence.
13.3.4 Replacing the back plane (size 4 and 6 case)
Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the top plate of
the module.
Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the bottom plate
of the module.
Unplug the back plane from the power supply pcb.
Twist outwards and around to the side of the module.
Replace the pcb and terminal block assembly.
Reassemble in the reverse of this sequence.
13.4 Recalibration
Whilst recalibration is not usually necessary it is possible to carry it out on site, but
it requires test equipment with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program
to run on a PC. It is recommended that the work is carried out by an authorised
agency.
After calibration the relay will need to have all the settings required for the
application re-entered and so it is useful if a copy of the settings is available on a
floppy disk. Although this is not essential it can reduce the down time of the
system.
13.5 Digital test equipment
If commissioning testing is carried out using a digital secondary injection test set
there may be an apparent erratic operation at the boundaries of the directional
characteristic. This will be particularly noticeable when observing the operation of
the start relay contacts, which is the method described in the commissioning
instructions in Section 1. This is caused by the transitional errors when changing
direction or applying signals instantaneously.
The problem is easily overcome by using the t>, t>>, t>>>, to>,to>>, or to>>>
outputs for indication of relay operation instead of I>, or Io>. These time delays
should then be set to a minimum of 20ms. See also the notes in Chapter 4,
Section 3.5 of this manual.
The slight directional indecision of the start relays should not cause any problem as
it will be covered by the short time delays that are applied in the blocking
schemes.
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Page 44 of 44
Appendix 1
Relay Characteristic Curves

KCGG 122, 142 Appendix 1
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS 1
Figure 1. Operating times KCGG I>>, I>>>, Io>> and Io>>> 1
Figure 2. Operating times KCEG I>>, I>>>, Io>> and Io>>> 1
2. RELAY CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 2
Figure 3. Standard inverse SI 30xDT 2
Figure 4. Very inverse VI 30xDT 3
Figure 5. Extremely inverse EI 10xDT 4
Figure 6. Long time inverse LTI 30xDT 5
Figure 7. Short time inverse STI 30xDT 6
Figure 8. Moderately inverse MI 7
Figure 9. Inverse I 8
Figure 10. Very inverse VI 9
Figure 11. Extremely inverse EI 10
Figure 12. Rectifier protection RECT 11
3. THERMAL TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC WITH PREFAULT LOAD12
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
K-SERIES 2 Appendix 1
SECTION 1. TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS
150
135
120 Maximum
Minimum
105
Operating time (ms)
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
1 10 100
Multiple of setting (xIs)
Figure 1. Operating times KCGG I>>, I>>>, Io>> and Io>>>
150
135
120 Maximum
Minimum
105
Operating time (ms)
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
1 10 100
Multiple of setting (xIs)
Figure 2. Operating times KCEG I>>, I>>>, Io>> and Io>>>

SECTION 2. RELAY CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
1000
100
10
Operating time (seconds)
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Multiples of setting
Figure 3. Standard inverse - SI 30xDT

1000
100
10
1 TMS
1.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 4. Very inverse - VI 30xDT

1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 5. Extremely inverse - EI 10xDT

1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.1 0.1 0.1
Figure 6. Long time inverse - LTI 30xDT

1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 7. Short time inverse - STI 30xDT

1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1.0
1 0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 8. Moderately inverse - MI

1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.8
1 0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 9. Inverse - I
1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1 1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 10. Very Inverse - VI

1000
100
10
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.1 0.4
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100
Figure 11. Extremely inverse - EI

10000
Typical thermal limit

1000 for silicon rectifier
Protection curve
Time (seconds)
100 Instantaneous
overcurrent
10
Typical
1 load area
0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Multiple of rated current
Figure 12. Rectifier protection - RECT

SECTION 3. THERMAL TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC WITH

PREFAULT LOAD
10.000
1.000
Time (x t)
0.100
No pre-fault load
Pre-fault load at
50% thermal state
Pre-fault load at
0.010 70% thermal state
Pre-fault load at
90% thermal state
0.001
1 2 3 4 5 6
Current (xlth>)
Figure 13. Thermal time/current characteristic with prefault load

Appendix 2
Logic Diagrams
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
FIGURE 1. SCHEME LOGIC DIAGRAM KCGG 122 1

FIGURE 2. SCHEME LOGIC DIAGRAM KCGG 142 - NOT INCLUDED 2
FIGURE 3. SCHEME LOGIC DIAGRAM KCEG 112 3
FIGURE 6. SCHEME LOGIC DIAGRAM KCEG 242 - NOT INCLUDED 6
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
0A01 BLK to >

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B03 to>
Stage 1
& to> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
earth fault
Io> 0B01 Io> Start
Start
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 earth fault
0A02 BLK to>>
EF1 0B04 to>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Stage 2
1
Io>> & to>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
earth fault
0A03 BLK to>>>
EF2 0B05 to>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Stage 3
0
1
Io>>> & to>>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 earth fault
0A04 BLK t>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B09 t>
Stage 1
& t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
overcurrent
I> 0B06 I> Start
Start
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
overcurrent
0A05 BLK t>>
PF1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B0B t>>
0 Stage 2
1
I>> & t>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 overcurrent
0A06 BLK t>>>
PF2 0B0C t>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Broken conductor
0
1
I>>> & t>>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 stage 3
overcurrent
0A07 L Trip
0B0D CB Trip
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 ≥1 tTrip 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Trip circuit breaker Circuit breaker
1 0B0E CB Close control
SD2 0A08 L Close Close circuit breaker tClose
≥1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset
LOG9
0
≥1 1
LOG2
0A09 Ext. Trip I< 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0B0F CB Fail
≥1 ≥1 tBF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Breaker fail
RLY3 Io< protection
LOGA
0 Generate circuit breaker
1 Latch red trip LED Fault record
RLY7 and flag latch
LOG7 initiation
0 I> Latch flags
≥1 Generate fault records &
1 Io> ≥1 copy to event records
0A0A Aux1 0B10 Aux1
Under
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 tAux1 SD5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
frequency
0
I<
3Sec SD8
1 Reset trip flags
SD6
0A0B Aux2 0 0 Reset
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ≥1 1 1 disturbance Disturbance
SD8 recorder
Recorder recorder
0 stopped reset Auxiliary
1 timers
LOG3 Recorder 0B11 Aux2
0 stopped ≥1 Loss of load
tAux2 LOG6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 /stage 4 EP
1
LOG4 I< & 0
1
Scheme logic diagram KCGG 122

0 Io<
1
LOGB 0B12 Aux3
0A0C Aux3 0 Cold load
≥1 tAux3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SD8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 LOG5 start
0 0
1 1
0A0D Stg Grp 2 SD4
≥1 0 Setting
SD3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Change to
1 control
0 Remote set Grp2 setting group 2 group
Set 1
1 Reset 0
Remote reset Grp1
0A0E CB Closed Ind 0B14 Level 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Shed Level 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0D0F CB Open Ind Plant 0B15 Level 2
status Load shedding
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Shed Level 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
word plant status
0A10 CB Bus 2 0B16 Level 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Shed Level 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF0
0 0B17 th Alarm
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Alarm Thermal
0B18 th Trip phase element
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0A11 Reset Ith Trip
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Thermal
reset
LOG0 CB (ops) >
0 0B19 CB Alarm Circuit
CB duty > ≥1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 breaker
1 alarms
Figure 1.
SD EF1 PF1
LOG EF2 PF2
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sorry. It was not possible to incorporate this diagram at this time.

Please request drawing no. 08KCGG14200 sheets 1 and 2.
Scheme logic diagram KCGG 142

Figure 2.
0A01 Blk to>

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B03 to> Stage 1
& to> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
earth fault
EF3
Io> 0 EF4 EF5
0 0 0B01 Io> Fwd Start
1
1 1 & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FWD Start
0B02 Io>Rev Start earth fault
REV & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0A02 Blk to>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B04 to>> Stage 2
EF4 & to>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
earth fault
1 0
EF1 Io>> 1
FWD
0A03 Blk to>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B05 to>>> Stage 3
EF5 & to>>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
earth fault˜
1 0
EF2 Io>>> 1
FWD
0A07 L TRIP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B0D CB TRIP
>=1 tTRIP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SD2 TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER Circuit
1 breaker
0 0A08 L CLOSE TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 0B0E CB CLOSE control
>=1 tCLOSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset
LOG9
>=1 1
0
LOG2
0A09 EXT. TRIP Io< 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 >=1 tBF
>=1
0 0B0E CB FAIL Breaker fail
RLY3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 protection
Generate circuit breaker

maintenance records
>=1 latch red trip le
LOGA RLY7 Fault record
1 and flag latch
0 initiation
Latch flags generate fault
>=1 flags and copy to event
LOG7 Io< records
1
0
0A0A AUX1 0B10 AUX1

Under
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 tAUX1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 frequency
Recorder
0A0B AUX2 SD8 SD6 stopped Reset
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 >=1 1 1 disturbance Disturbance
0 0 recorder recorder
LOG3 Recorder stopped reset
1
0
SD8
0B11 AUX2 Loss of load
>=1
LOG4 Io< tAUX2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Scheme logic diagram KCEG 112

/stage 4 EF
1 LOG6
0
0
0A0C AUX3 0 0B121 AUX3 Cold load

>=1 tAUX3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 start
LOG8
1 LOG5
1
0
0
0A0D STG GRP 2 >=1 SD4

Change to Setting group
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
setting group 2
0
control
SD3 Remote set Grp2

Set 1
1
0
Reset 0
Remote reset Grp1
0A0E CB CLOSED IND 0B14 LEVEL 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOAD SHED LEVEL 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0A0E CB OPEN IND Plant 0B15 LEVEL 2 Load shedding

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 status LOAD SHED LEVEL 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 plant status
word
0A0E CB BUS IND 0B16 LEVEL 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOAD SHED LEVEL 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Figure 3.
LOG0 CB (0ps)> 0B19 CB ALARM

>=1 Cicuit breaker
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 alarms
0
SD EF1 PF1
LOG EF2 PF2
+ 0A01 BLK to> -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B03 to>
STAGE 1
& to> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EARTH FAULT
Io> EF3
0 EF4 EF5 0B01 Io> FWD START
0 0
1 1 1 & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FWD START
EARTH FAULT
0B02 Io> REV START
REV
0A02 BLK to>> & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B04 to>>
EF1 STAGE 2
0 EF4 & to> > 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EARTH FAULT
1 0
Io>>
1
FWD
0A03 BLK to>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B05 to>>>
EF2 STAGE 3
0 EF5 & to> >> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EARTH FAULT
1 0
Io>>>
1
FWD 0B08 tA>
0A04 BLK t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B09 tB>
STAGE 1
& t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B0A tC>
OVERCURRENT
I>
PF3 PF4 PF5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0
0B06 I> FWD START
1 1 1 & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P1
FWD START
OVERCURRENT
P1 0B07 I> REV START
0A05 BLK t>> REV & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B0B t>>
PF1 STAGE 2
0
1
PF4
& t>> P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OVERCURRENT
I>> 0
FWD 1
PFC
0
1 &
I<
P1
0A06 BLK t>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7 0B0C t>>> BROKEN CONDUCTOR
PF2
0
1
PF5
& t>>> 0
P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STAGE 3
OVERCURRENT
I>>> 0 2/3
1
FWD 1
0A07 L TRIP
0B0D CB TRIP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SD2 P1 tTRIP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER CIRCUIT
1 BREAKER
0B0E CB CLOSE
0A08 L CLOSE CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
P1 tCLOSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset
LOG9
0
P1 1
0A09 EXT. TRIP LOG2

0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
I< 0B0F CB FAIL BREAKER FAIL
P1 P1 tBF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PROTECTION
Io<
RLY3
LOGA
0 P1 I< P1 GENERATE CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 MAINTENANCE RECORDS
RLY7 Io< LATCH RED TRIP LED FAULT RECORD
AND FLAG LATCH
LOG7 LATCH FLAGS INITIATION
0 P1 GENERATE FAULT RECORD &
1 I> P1 COPY TO EVENT RECORDS
+ -
Io>
0A0A AUX1 0B10 AUX1

PFD UNDER

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 tAUX1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FREQUENCY
1
F<
SD5
I< 0
3SEC 1 RESET TRIP FLAGS

0A0B AUX2 SD8 SD6
0 0 RESET
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SD8 P1 1 1 DISTURBANCE DISTURBANCE
RECORDER AUXILIARY
0 RECORDER RECORDER
STOPPED TIMERS
1 RESET
RECORDER
LOG3
STOPPED
0 I<
1 & 0B11 AUX2
LOSS OF LOAD
LOG4 P1 tAUX2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 / STAGE 4 EF
0 Io< 0
1 1
LOG6
LOGB
0B12 AUX3 COLD
0A0C AUX3 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P1 tAUX3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOAD
1 START
LOG8 LOG5
0 0
1 1
SD4
0A0D STG GRP 2 0 SETTING
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P1 1 CHANGE TO GROUP
SD3 SETTING GROUP 2 CONTROL
0 Remote set Grp2
SET 1
1
RESET 0
Remote reset Grp1
PF8 PF9 0B13 tV<

V<
0
1
& 0 tV< 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UNDERVOLTAGE
1
P1
OAOE CB CLOSED IND 0B14 LEVEL 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOAD SHED LEVEL 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0D0F CB OPEN IND PLANT 0B15 LEVEL 2
LOAD SHEDDING
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATUS LOAD SHED LEVEL 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PLANT STATUS
0A10 CB BUS 2 WORD 0B16 LEVEL 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOAD SHED LEVEL 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0B17 th ALARM
Figure 4.
1 P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF0 ALARM THERMAL
0B18 th TRIP
PHASE ELEMENT
P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TRIP
0A11 RESET Ith
THERMAL
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RESET
LOG0 CIRCUIT
CB(ops) >
0 0B19 CB ALARM BREAKER
1 P1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALARMS
CBduty>
SD EF1 PF1
A.H.
LOG EF2 PF2
FEDCBA9876543210 FEDCBA9876543210 FEDCBA9876543210
0A01 BLK to >

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B03 to>
Stage 1
EF3
& to> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
earth fault
Io> EF4 EF5 0B01 Io> FWD Start
0 Start
1
0
1
0
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 earth fault
FWD 1
REV 0B02 Io> REV Start

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EF1
0A02 BLK to>> & 0B04 to>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
Io>>
EF4
0
& to>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Stage 2
earth fault
1
FWD
1
0A03 BLK to>>>
EF2 0B05 to>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Stage 3
0
1
Io>>>
EF5
0 & to>>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 earth fault
FWD
1
0A04 BLK t>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B09 t>
Stage 1
& t> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
overcurrent
I> 0B06 I> Start
Start
& 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
overcurrent
0A05 BLK t>>
PF1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0B0B t>>
0 Stage 2
1
I>> & t>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 overcurrent
0A06 BLK t>>>
PF2 0B0C t>>>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Broken conductor
0
1
I>>> & t>>> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 stage 3
overcurrent
0A07 L Trip
0B0D CB Trip
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 ≥1 tTrip 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Trip circuit breaker Circuit breaker
1 0B0E CB Close control
SD2 0A08 L Close Close circuit breaker tClose
≥1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset
LOG9
0
≥1 1
LOG2
0A09 Ext. Trip I< 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0B0F CB Fail
≥1 ≥1 tBF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Breaker fail
RLY3 Io< protection
LOGA
0 Generate circuit breaker
1 Latch red trip LED Fault record
RLY7 and flag latch
LOG7 initiation
0 I> Latch flags
≥1 Generate fault records &
1 Io> ≥1 copy to event records
0A0A Aux1 0B10 Aux1
Under
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 tAux1 SD5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
frequency
0
I<
3Sec SD8
1 Reset trip flags
SD6
0A0B Aux2 0 0 Reset
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ≥1 1 1 disturbance Disturbance
SD8 recorder recorder
Recorder
0 stopped reset Auxiliary
1 timers
LOG3 Recorder 0B11 Aux2
0 stopped ≥1 Loss of load
tAux2 LOG6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 /stage 4 EP
1
LOG4 I< & 0
1

0 Io<
1
LOGB 0B12 Aux3
0A0C Aux3 0 Cold load
≥1 tAux3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SD8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 LOG5 start
0 0
1 1
0A0D Stg Grp 2 SD4
≥1 0 Setting
SD3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Change to
1 control
0 Remote set Grp2 setting group 2 group
Set 1
1 Reset 0
Remote reset Grp1
0A0E CB Closed Ind 0B14 Level 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Shed Level 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0D0F CB Open Ind Plant 0B15 Level 2
status Load shedding
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Shed Level 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
word plant status
0A10 CB Bus 2 0B16 Level 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Load Shed Level 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF0
0 0B17 th Alarm
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Alarm 0B18 th Trip Thermal
phase element
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0A11 Reset Ith Trip
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Thermal
reset
LOG0 CB (ops) >
0 0B19 CB Alarm Circuit
CB duty > ≥1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 breaker
1
alarms
SD EF1 PF1
Figure 5.
LOG EF2 PF2

Sorry. It was not possible to incorporate this diagram at this time.

Please request drawing no. 08KCEG24200 sheets 1 and 2.

Figure 6.
Appendix 3
Connection Diagrams
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR CUSTOMISING 1

Figure 1. KCGG 122 1
Figure 3. KCEG 112 3
2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR RELAYS AS SUPPLIED 7
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
P2 P1
A 4
S2 S1 1
B AC/DC WD Relay healthy
K-SERIES 2
6
supply
C 1 3
Vx
A WD 5 Relay failed
2
SERVICE MANUAL
3
C B 2 RL0 3
Phase rotation 2
3
2 RL1 3
2
3
RL2 4
2
2 4
RL3 4
2
KCGG 122 1
Case earth
4 connection
Case L0
30
5
1 29 4
3 4 31 32 L1
K–bus communications port
5 6 33 34 5 5
7 8 35 36 L2
9 10 37 38
5
39 40 Logic input common (1) 7
13 14 41 42
+48V field voltage
43 44 8
17 18 45 46
19 20 48
47
21 22 49 Notes
50
23 24 51 52 (1) (a) CT shorting links make
before (b) and (c) disconnect.
SECTION 1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR CUSTOMISING
25 26 53 54
55 56 (b) Short terminals break before (c).
27 28 (c) Long terminal
SCN
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type).
Module terminal blocks (2) CT connections are typical only.
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link) (3) Earth connections are typical only.
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 1 of 12
Figure 1. Typical application diagram: 2 phase overcurrent relay KCGG 122

P2 P1
A 4
S2 S1 13
B AC/DC WD 6 Relay healthy
K-SERIES 2
A
supply
C 14 3
Vx
21 WD 5 Relay failed
C B
Phase rotation 3
SERVICE MANUAL
22 3 RL0
23
34
Case earth 24 36 RL1
25 38
1 29 30
3 4 31 32 40 RL2
26
5 6 33 34 42
27
7 8 35 36
44 RL3
9 10 37 38
39 40
28 29
13 14 41 42 KCGG 142 31 RL4
43 44
17 18 46 33
45 46 L0
19 20 RL5
47 48 35
21 22 48
49 50 L1 37
23 24 51 52
50 39 RL6
25 26 53 54 L2
55 56 41
27 28 52
Logic input common (1) RL7
SCN 43
Module terminal blocks 45 1

viewed from rear L3
(with integral case earth link) Case earth
47 connection
L4
54
Notes: 49
(1) (a) CT shorting links make
L5
before (b) and (c) disconnect. 51 56
(b) Short terminals break before (c).
L6
(c) Long terminal 53 7
L7
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). +48V field voltage
55 8
(2) CT connections are typical only. Logic input common (2)
(3) Earth connections are typical only.
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 2 of 12
Figure 2. Typical application diagram: 3 phase overcurrent and earth fault relay KCGG 142
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
A
P2 P1
A
4
S2 S1 13
C B
K-SERIES 2

Phase rotation supply
C 14 3
A B C Vx
SERVICE MANUAL
N 30
22 RL0 32
dn 23
34
24 RL1 36
da
25
38
RL2 40
26
27 42
RL3 44
28
1
28
KCEG 112
Case earth
connection
54
Case earth 46
L0
1 29 30
56
3 4 31 32 48
L1
5 6 33 34
7 8 35 36 50 7
9 10 37 38 L2
39 40 +48V field voltage

52 8
13 14 41 42 Logic input common (1)
43 44
17 18 45 46
19 20 47 48
21 22
49 50
23 24 51 52
25 26 53 54 Notes:
55 56 (1) (a) CT shorting links make
27 28
SCN
Module terminal blocks (c) Long terminal
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link) (d) Pin terminal (pcb type).
(2) CT connections are typical only.

Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 3 of 12
Figure 3. Typical application diagram: directional earth fault relay KCEG 112
P2 P1
A 13
S2 S1 AC/DC
B supply 4
K-SERIES 2
A 14
Vx WD 6 Relay healthy
C
A B C 21 3
C B
WD 5 Relay failed
Phase rotation
SERVICE MANUAL
22
N 23 30
RL0 32
n
24 34
25
RL1 36
a b c
26 38
Case earth
27
RL2 40
1 29 30
42
3 4 31 32 28
17
KCEG 142 RL3
5 6 33 34 44
7 8 35 36 29
9 10 37 38 18 RL4 31
39 40
13 14 33
41 42
19
43 44 RL5 35
17 18 20
45 46 37
19 20 47 48 46
21 22 L0 RL6 39
49 50
23 24 51 52 48 41
L1
25 26 53 54 RL7 43
55 56 50
27 28 L2 1
SCN 52
Logic input common (1)
Module terminal blocks 45 Case earth
viewed from rear L3 connection
(with integral case earth link)
54
47
L4
Notes:
49 56
L5
51 7
(b) Short terminals break before (c). L6
(c) Long terminal
53 +48V field voltage
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). 8
L7
(2) CT connections are typical only. 55

Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 4 of 12
Figure 4. Typical application diagram: 3 phase directional earth fault relay KCEG 142
P2 P1
A 13 4
S2 S1 AC/DC
B supply WD 6 Relay healthy
A 14
K-SERIES 2
Vx 3
C
A B C 21 WD Relay failed
5
C B
Phase rotation 30
22
SERVICE MANUAL
N 23 RL0 32
34
dn
24 RL1
25 36
Case d 38
26 RL2 40
1 29 30 27
3 4 31 32 42
5 6 33 34 RL3 44
28
7 8 35 36
29
9 10 37 38 19
39 40
RL4 31
13 14 41 42 20 33
43 44 RL5
17
35
18
45 46 KCEG 152
19 20 47 48 37
21 22 46
49 50 L0 RL6 39
23 24 51 52
48 41
25 26 53 54 L1
RL7 43
55 56 50
27 28
L2
SCN 1
52
Module terminal blocks Case earth
viewed from rear 45
L3 connection
47 54
Notes: L4
(1) (a) CT shorting links make 49 K–bus communications port
before (b) and (c) disconnect. L5 56
(b) Short terminals break before (c). 51
L6 7
(c) Long terminal
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). 53 +48V field voltage
L7 8
(3) Earth connections are typical only. Logic input common (2)
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 5 of 12
Figure 5. Typical application diagram: 3 phase overcurrent and directional earth fault relay KCEG 152
1 Series
4
P2 P1 AC/DC supplyVx REG WD Relay failed
A A 1 6
S2 S1 3
K-SERIES 2
B
9 WD Relay healthy
Supply to trip coil 5
C B C 1
Phase rotation A B C 3
2 RL0 3
SERVICE MANUAL
N 3
2 RL1
2 3
n
3
2 RL2 4
a b c 2
4
Case
2 RL3 4
1 29 30 2
2
3 4 31 32
5 6 33 34 RL4 3
2
7 8 35 36 3
1
9 10 37 38
RL5 3
39 40 1
13 14 41 42 3
43 44 KCEG 242 RL6 3
1
17 18 45 46 2 4
19 20 47 48
21 22 49 RL7 4
50 L0
23 24 51 4
52
4 1
25 26 53 54 L1
55 56
27 28 5 Case earth
L2
SCN connection
5
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear 4
L3
4 5
Notes L4
before (b) and (c) disconnect. L5 5
(b) Short terminals break before (c). 5
L6
(c) Long terminal
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). 5 7
L7
(2) CT connections are typical only. +48V field voltage
5 8
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 6 of 12
Figure 6. Typical application diagram: Dual powered directional 3 phase overcurrent and earth fault relay KCEG 242
P2 P1
L 4
K-SERIES 2
S2 S1 1
AC/DC WD 6 Relay healthy
supply
SECTION 2.
N 1 3
Vx
A WD 5 Relay failed
2
SERVICE MANUAL
3
C B 2 RL0 3 Start (Io>FWD)
2
Phase rotation 3
2 RL1 3 Start (Io>REV)

2
3 AR
RL2 initiate(to>/to>>/to>>>)
4 (t>/t>>/t>>>)
2
2 4
Trip(to>/to>>/to>>>/Au
RL3 4 x1)
(thTrip/t>/t>>/t>>>)
2
KCGG 122 1
Case earth
4
Case earth Change setting group connection

L0
5
1 29 30 4
Block t>>/to>> L1
3 4 31 32
5 6 33 34 5 5
7 8 35 36 Block t>>/to>> L2
9 10 37 38
5
39 40 Logic input common (1) 7
13 14 41 42
+48V field voltage
43 44 8
17 18 45 46
19 20 47 48
21 22 49 50 Notes:
53 54 before (b) and (c) disconnect.
25 26
27 28 (c) Long terminal
SCN
Module terminal blocks
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR RELAYS AS SUPPLIED
(2) CT connections are typical only.

viewed from rear
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 7 of 12
Figure 7. Typical application diagram: 2 phase overcurrent relay KCGG 122

P2 P1
A 4
13
K-SERIES 2
S2 S1
A
supply
C 14 3
Vx
C B
SERVICE MANUAL
Phase rotation 3
22 3 RL0 Start Io>
23
34
Case earth 24 36 RL1 Start I>
25 38
1 29 30
3 4 31 32 40 RL2 AR initiate (to>/to>>/to>>>)
26 (t>/t>>/t>>>)
5 6 33 34 42
27
7 8 35 36
44 RL3 Trip (to>/to>>/to>>>/Aux1)
9 10 37 38 (thTrip/t>/t>>/t>>>)
39 40
28 29
13 14 41 42 KCGG 142 31 RL4 thAlarm/CB alarm/CB fail
43 44
17 18 46 33
45 46 Change setting group L0

19 20 47 48 35 RL5 CB fail/backtrip
21 22 48
49 50 Block t>>/to>> L1 37
23 24 51 52
50 39 RL6 Conrol CB close
25 26 53 54 Block t>>>/to>>> L2
55 56 41
27 28 52
Logic input common (1) RL7 Control CB trip
SCN 43
Module terminal blocks 45 1

viewed from rear External trip L3
(with integral case earth link) Case earth
47 connection
Initiate auxiliary timer 2 L4
54
Notes: 49
(1) (a) CT shorting links make Initiate auxiliary timer 3 L5
before (b) and (c) disconnect. 51 56
(b) Short terminals break before (c). CB closed indication L6
(c) Long terminal 53 7
CB open indication L7
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). +48V field voltage
55 8
(2) CT connections are typical only. Logic input common (2)
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 8 of 12
Figure 8. Typical application diagram: 3 phase overcurrent and earth fault relay KCGG 142
P2 P1 4
A 13
AC/DC WD Relay healthy
K-SERIES 2
6
S2 S1 supply
B 14 3
A Vx
C WD 5 Relay failed
21
A B C
C B 30
SERVICE MANUAL
Phase rotation 22 RL0 Start (I0FWD)

32
N 23
34
RL1 36 Start (I0FREV
dn 24
25 38
d RL2 40 AR initiate (t0>/to>to>>>)

26
27 42
RL3 44 Trip (t0>/to>to>>>Aux1)
28
1
19 KCEG 112
Case earth
20 connection
Case earth
54
1 29 30 46
Change setting group L0 K-bus communications port
3 4 31 32
56
5 6 33 34 48
7 8 35 36 Block to>> L1
9 10 37 38
50 7
39 40 Block to>>> L2
13 14 41 42 +48V field voltage
52 8
43 44 Logic input common (1)
17 18 45 46
19 20 47 48
21 22 49 50 Notes:
53 54 before (b) and (c) disconnect.
25 26
27 28
(c) Long terminal
SCN
Module terminal blocks (2) CT connections are typical only.
viewed from rear
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 9 of 12
Figure 9. Typical application diagram: directional earth fault relay KCEG 112
P2 P1
A 13
S2 S1 AC/DC
B supply 4
K-SERIES 2
A 14
Vx WD 6 Relay healthy
C
A B C 21 3
C B
Phase rotation WD 5 Relay failed
22
SERVICE MANUAL
N 23 30
RL0 32 Start(Io>FWD/I>FWD (I0FWD
n
24 34
25
RL1 36 Start(Io>REV/I>REV)
a b c
Case earth 26 38
27 AR initiate
RL2 40 (to>/to>>/to>>>)
1 29 30 KCEG 142 42 (t>/t>>/t>>>)
3 4 31 32 28 Trip(to>/to>>/to>>>/Au
17 RL3 44 x1)
5 6 33 34
(thTRIP/t>/t>>/t>>>)
7 8 35 36 29
9 10 37 38 18 RL4 thALARM/CB ALARM/CB
31 FAIL
39 40
13 14 41 42
33
19 CB FAIL/Backtrip
43 44 RL5 35
17 18 45 46 20
37
19 20 47 48 46
21 22 Change setting group L0 RL6 39 Control CB Close
49 50
23 24 51 52 48 41
Block t>>/to>> L1
25 26 53 54 RL7 43 Control CB trip
55 56 50
27 28 Block t>>>/to>> L2 1
SCN 52
Module terminal blocks 45 Case earth
viewed from rear EXT. trip L3 connection
(with integral case earth link) 54
47
Initiate Aux timer 2 L4
Notes: K–bus communications port
49 56
51 7
CB closed indication L6
(c) Long terminal +48V field voltage
53 8
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). CB open indication L7
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 10 of 12
Figure 10. Typical application diagram: 3 phase directional earth fault relay KCEG 142
P2 P1
A 13 4
S2 S1 AC/DC
K-SERIES 2
B supply WD 6 Relay healthy

A 14
Vx 3
C
A B C 21 WD Relay failed
5
C B
SERVICE MANUAL
Phase rotation 30
22
N 23 RL0 32 Start (Io>FWD)
34
dn
24 RL1 Start (Io>REV)
25 36
Case d 38
26 RL2 AR
40 initiate(to>/to>>/to>>>)
1 29 30 27
42 (t>/t>>/t>>>)
3 4 31 32
5 6 33 34 RL3 44 x1)
28
7 8 35 36 (thTrip/t>/t>>/t>>>)
29
9 10 37 38 19
RL4 31 thAlarm/CBALARM/CB
39 40 FAIL
13 14 41 42 20 33
43 44 CB FAIL/BACKTRIP
RL5 35
17 18 45 46 KCEG 152
19 20 47 37
48
21 22 46
49 50 Change setting L0 RL6 39 CONTROL CB CLOSE
23 24 51 52 41
48
25 26 53 54 Block t>>/to>> L1
RL7 43 CONTROL CB TRIP
55 56 50
27 28 Block t>>>/to>> L2
SCN 1
52
Module terminal blocks Case earth
viewed from rear 45
EXT. trip L3 connection
47 54
Notes

before (b) and (c) disconnect. Initiate Aux timer 3 L5 56
(b) Short terminals break before (c). CB closed L6 51
(c) Long terminal 7
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). 53 +48V field voltage
CB open indication L7 8
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 11 of 12
Figure 11. Typical application diagram: 3 phase overcurrent and directional earth fault relay KCEG 152
13 Series
4
P2 P1 AC/DC supplyVx REG WD Relay failed
A 14 6
A S2 S1 3
K-SERIES 2
B
9 WD Relay healthy
Supply to trip coil 5
C 10
C B A B C 30
21 RL0 32 Start(Io>FWD/I>FWD (I0FWD
SERVICE MANUAL
Phase rotation
N 34
22 RL1 Start(Io>REV/I>REV)
23 36
n
38
AR initiate
24 RL2 40 (to>/to>>/to>>>)
a b c 25 (t>/t>>/t>>>)
Case 42
1 29 26 RL3 44 x1)
30
27 (thTRIP/t>/t>>/t>>>)
3 4 31 32 29
5 6 33 34 thALARM/CB ALARM/CB
RL4 31
7 8 35 36 28 FAIL
9 10 37 38 33
17
39 40 RL5 35 CB FAIL/Backtrip
13
18
14 41 42
37
43 44 KCEG 242
17 18 19 RL6 39 Control CB Close
45 46
19 20 47 48 20 41
21 22 49 50 RL7 Control CB trip
Change setting group L0 43
23 24 51 52 46
25 26 53 54 48 1
Block t>>/to>> L1
55 56
27 28
50 Case earth
SCN Block t>>>/to>> L2 connection
52
Module terminal blocks Logic input common (1)
viewed from rear 45
(with integral case earth link) EXT. trip L3
47 54
Notes Initiate Aux timer 2 L4
(1) (a) CT shorting links make K–bus communications port
49
before (b) and (c) disconnect. Initiate Aux timer 3 L5 56
51
(c) Long terminal CB closed indication L6
(d) Pin terminal (pcb type). 53 7
CB open indication L7
(2) CT connections are typical only. +48V field voltage
55 8
Appendix 3
R8551A
Page 12 of 12
Figure 12. Typical application diagram: Dual powered directional 3 phase overcurrent and earth fault relay KCEG 242
Appendix 4
Commissioning Test Record

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Contents
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8551A
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 1 of 16
Date ____________________
Station ____________________ Circuit _____________________
Front plate information
Multifunctional overcurrent relay type KC

Model No.
Serial No.
Rated current In
Aux Voltage Vx
Pol Voltage Vn
Frequency
System data settings

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0002 Password
0003 SD Links
0004 Description
0005 Plant
0006 Model
0008 Serial No.
0009 Frequency
000A Comms Level
000B Relay Address
0011 Software Ref.
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 2 of 16
Earth fault 1
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0501 EF Links 0 0 0 0 0 0
0502 CT Ratio
0503 VT Ratio
0504 Curve
0505 Io>
0506 to/TMS
0507 to/DT
0508 toRESET
0509 Io>>
050A to>>
050B Io>>>
050C to>>>
050D Char. Angle
050E Io<
050F Vop>
Phase fault 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0601 PF Links 0 0 0 0 0 0
0602 CT Ratio
0603 VT Ratio
0604 Curve
0605 I>
0606 t/TMS
0607 t/DT
0608 tRESET
0609 I>>
060A t>>
060B I>>>
060C t>>>
060D Char. Angle
060E I<
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 3 of 16
060F V<
0610 tV<
0611 F<
0612 th> Alarm
0613 Ith> Trip
0614 TC
Earth Fault 2
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0701 EF Links 0 0 0 0 0 0
0702 CT Ratio
0703 VT Ratio
0704 Curve
0705 Io>
0706 to/TMS
0707 to/DT
0708 toRESET
0709 Io>>
070A to>>
070B Io>>>
070C to>>>
070D Char. Angle
070E Io<
070F Vop>
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 4 of 16
Phase fault 2
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0801 PF Links 0 0 0 0 0 0
0802 CT Ratio
0803 VT Ratio
0804 Curve
0805 I>
0806 t/TMS
0807 t/DT
0808 tRESET
0809 I>>
080A t>>
080B I>>>
080C t>>>
080D Char. Angle
080E I<
080F V<
0610 tV<
0611 F<
0612 th> Alarm
0613 Ith> Trip
0614 TC
Logic functions F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0901 LOG Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0902 tBF
0903 tAUX1
0904 tAUX2
0905 tAUX3
0906 tTRIP
0907 tCLOSE
0908 CB ops>
0909 CB duty>
0905 Display
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 5 of 16
Input masks
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0901 LOG Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A01 Blk to> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A02 Blk to>> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A03 Blk to>>> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A04 Blk t> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A05 Blk t>> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A06 Blk t>>> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A07 L Trip 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A08 L Close 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A09 Ext Trip 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A0A Aux1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A0B Aux2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A0C P Aux3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A0D Set Grp 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A0E CB Closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A0F CB Opened 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A10 Bus2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0A11 Reset Ith 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 6 of 16
Relay masks
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0B01 Io> Fwd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0B02 Io> Rev
0B03 to>
0B04 to>>
0B05 to>>>
0B06 I> Fwd
0B07 I> Rev
0B08 tA>
0B09 tB>
0B0A tC>
0B0B t>>
0B0C t>>>
0B0D CB Trip
0B0E CB Close
0B0F CB Fail
0B10 Aux1
0B11 Aux2
0B12 Aux3
0B13 tV<
0B14 Level 1
0B15 Level 2
0B16 Level 3
0B17 thAlarm
0B18 thTrip
0B19 CB Alarm
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 7 of 16
Recorder F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0C01 Control
0C02 Capture
0C03 Post Trigger
0C04 Logic Trigger
0C05 Relay Trigger
Measurements 2
031E Power mode

KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 8 of 16
Commissioning preliminaries (tick)
1.4 Serial number on case, module and cover checked
CT shorting switches in case checked
Terminals 21 and 22; 23 and 24; 25 and 26; 27 and 28 checked for
continuity with module removed from case
External wiring checked to diagram (if available)
1.5 Earth connection to case checked
1.7 Test block connections checked
1.8 Insulation checked
Auxiliary supply checked
3.1 Auxiliary power checked
3.1.1 Auxiliary voltage at the relay terminals __________ V ac/dc
3.1.2 Watchdog contacts checked
Supply off Terminals 3 and 5
Terminals 4 and 6
Supply on Terminals 3 and 5
Terminals 4 and 6
3.1.3 Field voltage __________ V dc
3.2 Dual auxiliary powered relays __________
3.2.1 Auxiliary voltage at the relay terminals __________ V ac/dc
3.2.2 Watchdog contacts checked
Supply off Terminals 3 and 5
Terminals 4 and 6
Supply on Terminals 3 and 5
Terminals 4 and 6
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 9 of 16
3.2.3 Field voltage __________ V dc
3.2.4 Capacitor trip voltage __________ V dc
3.2.5 Minimum current injection to power the relay
Terminals 21 and 23 Terminals 22 and 24 linked __________ A
5 Metering checks
Actual value injected Relay metered value
CT ratio _____________________
Phase A current ____________________ A ___________________ A
Phase B current ____________________ A ___________________ A
Phase C current ____________________ A ___________________ A
VT ratio _____________________
Phase A voltage ____________________ V ___________________ V
Phase B voltage ____________________ V ___________________ V
Phase C voltage ____________________ V ___________________ V
6 Test results for earth fault/sensitive earth fault elements
Setting group 1 Setting group 2

(if required)
Setting _____________ ____________
Pick-up current Io> _____________ A ____________ A
Drop-off current Io> _____________ A ____________ A
Curve _____________ ____________
to>/TMS _____________ seconds ____________ seconds
Operate time at x2 _____________ seconds ____________ seconds
Operate time at x10 _____________ seconds ____________ seconds

KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 10 of 16
Io>> current setting _____________ A ____________ A
Current to trip Io>> _____________ A ____________ A
Current no trip Io>> _____________ A ____________ A
Io>>> current setting _____________ A ____________ A
Current to trip Io>>> _____________ A ____________ A
Current no trip Io>>> _____________ A ____________ A
7 Test results for phase fault elements

(if required)
Setting ____________ _____________
Pick-up current for I> Phase A ____________ A _____________ A
Drop-off current for I> Phase A ____________ A _____________ A
Pick-up current for I> Phase B ____________ A _____________ A
Drop-off current for I> Phase B ____________ A _____________ A
Pick-up current for I> Phase C ____________ A _____________ A
Drop-off current for I> Phase C ____________ A _____________ A
Curve ____________ _____________
t>/TMS ____________ seconds _____________ seconds
Phase A operate time at x2 ____________ seconds _____________ seconds
Phase B operate time at x2 ____________ seconds _____________ seconds
Phase C operate time at x2 ____________ seconds _____________ seconds
Phase A operate time at x10 ____________ seconds _____________ seconds
Phase B operate time at x10 ____________ seconds _____________ seconds
Phase C operate time at x10 ____________ seconds _____________ seconds

KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 11 of 16
Phase A current setting I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase A current to trip I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase A current to no trip I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase B current setting I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase B current to trip I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase B current to no trip I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase C current setting I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase C current to trip I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase C current to no trip I>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase A current setting I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase A current to trip I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase A current to no trip I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase B current setting I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase B current to trip I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase B current to no trip I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase C current setting I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase C current to trip I>>> ____________ A _____________ A
Phase C current to no trip I>>> ____________ A _____________ A

KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 12 of 16
8 Test results for directional earth/sensitive earth fault elements
Vop> setting _____________ V
Actual Vop> threshold _____________ V
Setting group E/F relay characteristic angle Lag Lead
1 __________________________ ________________ _________________
2 __________________________ ________________ _________________
Additional test results for dual polarized

elements when current polarized Lag _____________ Lead _____________
9 Test results for directional phase fault elements
E/F relay
Setting group characteristic Phase A Phase B Phase C
angle
1 __________ _____ Lag/Lead ______ Lag/Lead _____ Lag/Lead
2 __________ _____ Lag/Lead ______ Lag/Lead _____ Lag/Lead
10 Test results for selective logic
10.1 Opto input checks
Opto input number (tick)

L0
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 13 of 16
10.2 Controlled logic blocking of time delay elements
Earth fault element Input mask Input mask setting Operation

to> [0A01 Blk to>]
to>> [0A02 Blk to>>]
to>>> [0A03 Blk to>>>]
Phase fault element Input mask Input mask setting Operation

t> [0A04 Blk t>]
t>> [0A05 Blk t>>]
t>>> [0A06 Blk t>>>]
10.3 Undervoltage logic
Relay setting of tV< __________ seconds
Measured value of tV< __________ seconds
Relay setting of V< __________ V
Measured value of V< __________ V
Relay setting of auxiliary timer Measured value of auxiliary timer
Timer Aux1 _______ seconds _______ seconds
Setting _____________ ____________

KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 14 of 16
10.5 Breaker fail Relay setting Measured values
________________ s ______________ s
10.6 Change setting group (tick)
Change to setting group 2
10.7 Cold load start/pick-up
Initiate cold load start
10.8 Circuit breaker control
Trip test
Close test
Test results for thermal overcurrent elements

(if required)
Ith> setting ____________ A _____________ A
Time constant setting TC ____________ min _____________ min
Phase A operating time at x2 ____________ s _____________ s
Phase B operating time at x2 ____________ s _____________ s
Phase C operating time at x2 ____________ s _____________ s
Phase A operating time at x4 ____________ s _____________ s
Phase B operating time at x4 ____________ s _____________ s
Phase C operating time at x4 ____________ s _____________ s
_________________________________ __________________________________
Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness
____________________________________ _____________________________________
Date Date
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 15 of 16
KCEG 112 142, 152, 242 page 16 of 16

MR Mk30 Regulador Tension

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

MR Mk30 Regulador Tension

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

KCGG 122, 142

KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242

CHAPTER 2 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 3 RELAY DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 4 APPLICATION OF PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT AND RECORDS

CHAPTER 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

CHAPTER 7 TECHNICAL DATA

APPENDIX 1 RELAY CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

APPENDIX 2 LOGIC DIAGRAMS

APPENDIX 3 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

APPENDIX 4 COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Health and safety

Explanation of symbols and labels

Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Functional *earth terminal, note: this symbol may also be used

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment operating conditions

Insertion of modules and pcb cards

Current transformer circuits

Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs

Fibre optic communication

Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is

Insulation class: IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 This equipment requires a

The K Range of overcurrent and directional overcurrent relays has been

SECTION 2. USING THE MANUAL

This manual provides a description of the K Range series 2 overcurrent and

Appendix Appendices include relay characteristic curves, logic diagrams,

SECTION 3. AN INTRODUCTION TO K RELAYS

The K Range of protection relays brings numerical technology to the successful

SECTION 4. MODELS AVAILABLE

The following list of models is covered by this manual

K Range series 2 relay Equivalent K Range series 1 relays

SECTION 5. AVAILABILITY OF MAIN FEATURES

Feature KCGG KCGG KCEG KCEG KCEG KCEG

Handling and Installation

SECTION 1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

1.1 Receipt of relays

SECTION 2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of

SECTION 3. RELAY MOUNTING

Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. If

5.6 Output relay minimum dwell time 24

Figure 1 Frontplate layout 2

SECTION 1. RELAY DESCRIPTION

SECTION 2. USER INTERFACE

Figure 1. Frontplate layout

2.2 LED indications

Figure 2. Flag display format

SECTION 3. MENU SYSTEM

3.6 Fault records

030D VARa READ Reactive power in phase A

3.10 Earth fault 1

3.11 Phase fault 1

0611 F< SET Setting for underfrequency

3.12 Earth fault 2

3.13 Phase fault 2

8 CB blk V< 1 = undervoltage blocked when circuit breaker is

5 tAUX3 Grp2 1 = tAUX3 selects setting grp2

3.15 Input masks

0A0E CB Closed PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in closed

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of